Nesrine-Biology 0610 Paper4 2023-2016 QP

Table of Contents
February/March 2023 Variant 2 1

May/June 2023 Variant 1 19
For Examination from 2023 69

October/November 2022 Variant 1 160


Table of Contents



Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 4 6 1 0 0 3 2 8 7 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2023
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (EF/JG) 311941/4
© UCLES 2023 [Turn over
1/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a simplified diagram of the circulatory system in humans.
A
F
Y
E B
C
D
other organs
Fig. 1.1
(i) State the letter from Fig. 1.1 that represents the blood vessel that contains blood with the
highest concentration of oxygen.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the letter from Fig. 1.1 that represents the hepatic portal vein.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State all the letters from Fig. 1.1 that represent arteries.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
2/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(iv) Explain the importance of the part labelled Y in Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(v) State the evidence from Fig. 1.1 that the diagram shows a double circulation system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23 [Turn over
3/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the pressure of blood flowing through different blood vessels as it travels
around the body. (Venules are narrow vessels that connect capillaries to veins.)
18
16
14
12
blood 10
pressure
/ kPa 8
0
arteries X capillaries venules veins
type of blood vessel
Fig. 1.2
(i) Blood vessels X in Fig. 1.2 supply blood to skin-surface capillaries and have a role in
maintaining a constant internal temperature.
State the name of the blood vessels that are represented by the letter X in Fig. 1.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain reasons for the changes in pressure seen in the arteries in Fig. 1.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
4/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(iii) Using the information in Fig. 1.2, explain the structural adaptations of arteries and veins.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 14]
5/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 A student investigated the digestion of starch.
Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus she used.
distilled water distilled water

dialysis dialysis
tubing tubing
starch solution starch solution

+ amylase
test-tube A test-tube B
Fig. 2.1
Dialysis tubing is used to represent a cell membrane.
The dialysis tubing material allows small molecules to move across it, but not larger molecules.
Test-tubes A and B were set up as shown in Fig. 2.1 and placed in a water-bath at 37 °C for
30 minutes.
The liquid outside the dialysis tubing in test-tubes A and B was tested with Benedict’s solution at
0 minutes and after 30 minutes.
Table 2.1 shows the results.
Table 2.1
colour with Benedict’s solution colour with Benedict’s solution

test-tube
at 0 minutes at 30 minutes
A blue blue
B blue red
break down of startch

no change of colour
diffusion
going form high conc to lower conc
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
6/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(a) Using the information in Fig. 2.1 and Table 2.1, explain the reasons for the difference in the
results for test-tubes A and B in Table 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
7/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) Complete Table 2.2 by writing in the names of the missing enzymes, substrates and products.
Table 2.2
enzyme substrate product or products
pepsin
fatty acids and glycerol
trypsin
glucose
[4]
(c) State the name of the structures that increase the surface area for absorption in the small
intestine.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
8/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows part of a classification diagram for plants.
(i) Complete Fig. 3.1.
plants
flowering
ferns ...........………………….............
dicotylendon
monocotyledons ...........………………….............
Fig. 3.1
[2]
(ii) Describe two identifying features of monocotyledons.

parell veuin
1 ........................................................................................................................................
3 petals
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
9/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the life cycle of a fern. The life cycle of a fern has some similarities and some
differences compared with the life cycles of other plants.
The letters represent processes that occur during the life cycle.
The haploid stages of the life cycle are represented by (n).
The diploid stages of the life cycle are represented by (2n).
A B
spores (n)
adult sporophyte adult gametophyte (n)

(2n) C
D C
zygote gametes (n)

(2n)
not to scale
Fig. 3.2
(i) The adult sporophyte has 1200 chromosomes in its body cells.
State the number of chromosomes in the body cells of the gametophyte.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify and describe process A in Fig. 3.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) State the name of process D in Fig. 3.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
10/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(c) Fig. 3.3 shows the parts of two flowers from two different plants of the same species.
Fig. 3.3
(i) Describe what is meant by the term species.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Annotate Fig. 3.3 to show the mechanism of cross-pollination by:
• labelling the structures involved

• drawing an arrow to show the pathway of pollen.
[3]
(iii) Draw an X on Fig. 3.3 to show where fertilisation occurs. [1]
(iv) Explain the disadvantages of cross-pollination compared with self-pollination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 18]
11/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is a photograph of a tree that has been girdled.
Girdling involves removing a complete circle of bark and phloem from around the tree.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Explain why the area above the girdle in Fig. 4.1 will become swollen.
Use the terms source and sink in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
12/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Explain why the leaves in girdled trees are still able to receive mineral ions from the
roots.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why glucose made during photosynthesis is required for the absorption of mineral
ions by the roots.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) State the balanced symbol equation for photosynthesis.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
13/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 The eye is a sense organ that is part of the nervous system.
(a) Explain why the eye can be described as a sense organ.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State the two parts of the central nervous system.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Fig. 5.1 is a diagram of a section through the human eye.
A
H
C
G D
Fig. 5.1
(i) Draw an X on Fig. 5.1 to identify the blind spot. [1]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
14/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(ii) Table 5.1 shows some of the parts labelled in Fig. 5.1, their names and their functions.
Complete Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
name of the part letter in Fig. 5.1 function
transmits impulses to the central nervous system
cornea
[3]
(d) State the names of the two effectors that contract and relax during the pupil reflex.
................................................................... and ................................................................... [1]
(e) Explain why a person is unable to focus on distant objects if the suspensory ligaments
become permanently overstretched.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]
15/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 Golden rice is a type of rice that has been genetically modified to contain a nutrient called
beta-carotene.
Fig. 6.1 shows the genetic modification process used to produce golden rice.
bacterial cell plant DNA
rice plant cells

infected with the
genetically modified
bacteria
rice plants
with the ability
to produce
beta-carotene
are grown
tissue culture
not to scale
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
16/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(a) Using the information in Fig. 6.1, complete the sentences to describe how rice is genetically
modified to contain beta-carotene.
The part labelled A in the bacterial cell is a ................................................... .
Part A is extracted and cut using a .................................................. enzyme forming
..................................................... ends.
The part labelled B is the .................................................. that codes for the production of
beta-carotene.
The enzyme used to cut part A is also used to cut part B from the plant DNA.
Part B is inserted into the part labelled A using the enzyme .......................................... .
This forms the part labelled C, which is called a ........................................................... .
Part C is put into a bacterium. The bacterium is taken up by rice plant cells, giving them the
ability to produce beta-carotene.
Tissue culture is a form of .............................................................. reproduction that is used to
produce many identical rice plants producing beta-carotene for commercial use.
[7]
(b) Apart from structural features, state two reasons why bacteria are useful for genetic
modification.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
17/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(c) Discuss the disadvantages of genetically modifying rice plants to produce beta-carotene.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Beta-carotene is required to produce vitamin A, which is essential for eye function.
State the nutrient required to prevent:
scurvy .......................................................................................................................................
rickets. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23
18/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 7 9 8 3 3 0 5 3 1 6 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2023
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LE/SG) 312340/3
19/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of the digestive system.
L
B
K
C
E
H
G
F
Fig. 1.1
Each letter may be used once, more than once or not at all.
State the letter of the part shown in Fig. 1.1:
that produces bile ..........................................
that produces gastric juice .............................
that produces urea .........................................
where maltose is digested .............................
where trypsin acts. .........................................

[5]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23 [Turn over
20/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(b) A student investigated the effect of bile on the digestion of fat in milk.
They set up three different test-tubes:
• test-tube A contained milk and bile

• test-tube B contained milk and lipase
• test-tube C contained milk, lipase and bile.
They used an indicator that is pink in alkaline solutions and colourless in acidic solutions.
They added the same volume of indicator to each test-tube.
The student observed and recorded the colour of the contents of each test-tube at
0 minutes, 20 minutes and 40 minutes.
Table 1.1 shows the results of the investigation.
Table 1.1
indicator colour observed

test-tube
0 minutes 20 minutes 40 minutes
A pink pink pink
B pink pink colourless
C pink colourless colourless
(i) Explain the results for test-tubes B and C in Table 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
21/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(ii) Explain the purpose of test-tube A in Table 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The action of lipase is affected by temperature.
Fig. 1.2 shows the axes for a graph of the effect of temperature on the activity of lipase.
Complete the graph by:
• drawing a line to show the expected effect of temperature on the activity of lipase
• adding a label line and a label to show the point at which all the lipase has been denatured.
enzyme
activity
temperature
Fig. 1.2
[2]
22/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(d) Explain why lipase cannot be used to catalyse the breakdown of proteins.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
23/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
2 (a) A student investigated osmosis in potato plant cells.
He immersed cubes of potato tissue in water and different concentrations of sucrose solution
for 30 minutes.
The masses of the potato cubes were measured before and after immersion.
The percentage changes in mass were calculated.
Table 2.1
concentration mass of potato mass of potato

percentage
of sucrose cube before cube after
change in mass
solution / mol dm–3 immersion / g immersion / g
0.00 1.32 1.50 13.64
0.20 1.34 1.49 11.19
0.40 1.30 1.34 3.08
0.60 1.33 1.29 –3.01
0.80 1.22 1.12 –8.20
1.00 1.28 1.11
(i) Using the information in Table 2.1, calculate the percentage change in mass at
1.00 mol dm–3.
Give your answer to two decimal places.
Space for working.
............................................................ %
[3]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
24/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(ii) Using the information in Table 2.1, explain the difference in the results between the
0.6 mol dm–3 and the 0.8 mol dm–3 sucrose solutions.
Use the term water potential in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(iii) Describe the expected appearance of a cell from a potato cube that has been immersed
in distilled water for 30 minutes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how the process of active transport differs from the process of osmosis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
25/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) State the type of plant cells that use active transport to absorb mineral ions from the
environment.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Explain the effect of a lack of magnesium ions on the colour of plant leaves.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
26/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of some cells lining the trachea.
goblet cell
Fig. 3.1
(i) Describe the role of goblet cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the cell labelled X in Fig. 3.1 is adapted for its function.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
27/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(iii) State the name of one other part of the body where the type of cell labelled X in Fig. 3.1
is found.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Table 3.1 contains some features of the breathing system.
Complete Table 3.1 to show the actions of each feature of the breathing system that occur to
cause inspiration.
Table 3.1
feature of the
action that causes inspiration
breathing system
diaphragm
.......................................................................................
external intercostal
muscles .......................................................................................
pressure in the
thorax .......................................................................................
ribs
.......................................................................................
volume of the
thorax .......................................................................................
[5]
(c) State the name of the gas that is excreted by the breathing system.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Good ventilation is one feature of gas exchange surfaces.
State two other features.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) State the name of the gas exchange surface in humans.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 14]
28/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows the effect of light intensity on the rate of photosynthesis at different
temperatures and concentrations of carbon dioxide.
A 25 °C, 0.4% CO2
B 15 °C, 0.4% CO2

rate of
photosynthesis
C 15 °C, 0.04% CO2
light intensity
Fig. 4.1
Describe and explain the reasons for the shape of lines B and C in Fig. 4.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
29/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(b) C6H12O6 is one of the products of photosynthesis.
State the chemical formula of the other product.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Outline how the carbohydrates made during photosynthesis are used in plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 11]
30/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the stages involved in protein synthesis.
DNA
Y amino acid
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the names of the parts labelled X, Y and Z in Fig. 5.1.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
Z ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) State what determines the sequence of the amino acids in the protein that is produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the sequence of amino acids is important in the production of receptor
molecules for neurotransmitters.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
31/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) Explain why body cells can have different specialised functions even though they contain the
same genes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Allele frequency in a population can be changed by natural selection and artificial selection.
State the meaning of the term allele.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Describe how artificial selection differs from natural selection.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Mutation causes formation of new alleles which increases genetic variation.
State two other sources of genetic variation in populations.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 14]
32/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 (a) A scientist monitored the changes in the pH in muscles before, during and after two minutes
of vigorous exercise.
The changes in pH are caused by the production of lactic acid.
7.10
7.00
6.90
6.80
pH in
muscles
6.70
6.60
6.50
6.40
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
time / minutes
vigorous
exercise
Fig. 6.1
Complete the sentences to describe and explain the results in Fig. 6.1.
The pH decreases from ............................................... to ............................................... during

vigorous exercise.
There is not enough ............................................... supplied to the muscles.
The body respires anaerobically. The lactic acid produced builds up in the muscles causing
an ............................................... debt.
It takes ............................................... minutes for the muscle pH to return to its initial level
after exercise.
The pH value increases after vigorous exercise has ended, as lactic acid is transported in the
............................................... to the ............................................... .
During this time the breathing rate and ............................................... rate remain high.
[6]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
33/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(b) Yeast can respire anaerobically.
(i) Complete the balanced chemical equation for anaerobic respiration in yeast.
C6H12O6 ...................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Yeast belongs to the kingdom fungus.
State one cell component that is present in yeast cells but is absent in animal cells.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023 0610/41/M/J/23
34/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 2 6 5 3 5 0 6 4 4 6 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (EF/CT) 311948/5
35/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of part of a cross‑section of a leaf.
layer A
layer B
layer C
stomata
Fig. 1.1
(a) Explain why a leaf is considered to be an organ.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
36/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) Explain how layer B and layer C in Fig. 1.1 are adapted for their functions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
37/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) A student placed a plant in a very hot room for 12 hours. There was a bright light in the room
and the plant was not given any water during the 12‑hour period.
Fig. 1.2 shows a series of sketches that the student made of the stomata during the
investigation.
time / hours 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
stomata
D
Fig. 1.2
(i) Identify the cell labelled D on Fig. 1.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the main function of the stomata.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the advantage to the plant of the change to the stomata shown in Fig. 1.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The student increased the humidity in the room and repeated the investigation.
Predict and explain the effect of high humidity on the stomata.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
38/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 Fig. 2.1 is a diagram of part of a DNA molecule.
Fig. 2.1
(a) Draw a circle on Fig. 2.1 to identify one pair of bases. [1]
(b) The percentage of T bases in the DNA of a species is 29%.
Calculate the percentage of bases that would be base G in the DNA of this species.
Space for working.
G ......................................................% [1]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
39/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(c) (i) State the name given to a length of DNA that codes for a protein.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how proteins are made by a cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(iii) DNA controls cell function by controlling the production of proteins.
State two types of cell membrane proteins.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
40/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 (a) Antibiotic resistance is an increasing problem worldwide.
Erythromycin is an antibiotic.
Fig. 3.1 shows the daily doses of erythromycin per 1000 people over a 13‑year period.
The number of bacterial infections resistant to erythromycin per 1000 people is also shown.
3.0 200
180
2.5
160
140
2.0
daily doses of 120 number of
bacterial infections
erythromycin 1.5 100
resistant to
per 1000 people 80 erythromycin per
1.0 60 1000 people
40
0.5
20
0.0 0
1983 1985 1987 1989 1991 1993 1995
year
Key
daily doses of erythromycin per 1000 people
number of bacterial infections resistant to erythromycin per 1000 people
Fig. 3.1
(i) Calculate the percentage change in the number of bacterial infections resistant to
erythromycin per 1000 people between 1993 and 1995.
Give your answer to two significant figures.
Space for working.
.............................................................%
[3]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
41/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(ii) Describe the data shown in Fig. 3.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Suggest reasons for the change in the number of bacterial infections resistant to
erythromycin from 1993 to 1995 shown in Fig. 3.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Explain how bacteria become resistant to antibiotics.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
42/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(b) (i) Bacteria are prokaryotes.
State two features of all prokaryotes.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Some bacteria have a flagellum.
State the function of a flagellum.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
43/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 (a) A student recorded the information about an aquatic habitat.
Fig. 4.1 shows the student’s notes.
Aquatic plants provide food for freshwater

shrimps and midges.
Mayflies also feed on aquatic plants.
The mayflies provide food for salmon.
Stoneflies feed on midges and are eaten by

salmon. Salmon also eat freshwater shrimps.
Herons feed on salmon.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Construct a food web to show the feeding relationships described in Fig. 4.1.
Do not draw the organisms.
[4]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
44/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Complete Table 4.1 using the information in Fig. 4.1 by identifying the names of the
missing trophic levels and one organism at each different trophic level.
Table 4.1
name of the trophic level organism in Fig. 4.1
producer aquatic plants
primary consumer
secondary consumer
[3]
(iii) Outline how the energy in the primary consumers in this aquatic food web is used to
produce biomass in the secondary consumers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iv) Humans also eat salmon.
Predict the impact on the feeding relationships shown in Fig. 4.1 of overharvesting of
salmon.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
45/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(b) Describe what is meant by the term decomposer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Animals such as salmon can be farmed for meat.
Explain why it is more energy efficient for humans to eat crop plants than to eat livestock that
have been fed on crop plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
46/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 Fig. 5.1 is a photomicrograph of a structure found in animal and plant cells.
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the name and function of the cell structure labelled A in Fig. 5.1.
name .........................................................................................................................................
function .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State the two pieces of information needed to calculate the actual length of cell structure A in
Fig. 5.1.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
47/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(c) The actual length of cell structure A is 0.000 75 mm.
Convert this value to micrometres (µm).
..................................................... µm [1]
[Total: 4]
48/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 (a) A student investigated plant growth responses in roots and shoots. They used this method:
• Damp cotton wool was placed in two Petri dishes.

• Three bean seedlings were attached to the cotton wool in each Petri dish.
• Each seedling was orientated so that the roots pointed in a different direction in each
Petri dish.
• Petri dish 1 was kept on its side in a fixed position.
• Petri dish 2 was kept on its side and rotated constantly.
• Both Petri dishes were kept in the dark.
• Both Petri dishes were kept in these conditions for two days.
• After two days the seedlings were observed.
Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of the apparatus.
Petri dish 1 Petri dish 2
damp cotton wool motor to rotate Petri dish 2
B E
C F
D
A
support so that Petri dish 1 is in a fixed position bean seedling
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2 shows the seedlings after two days.
Petri dish 1 Petri dish 2
B E
C F
A D
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
49/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(i) Describe the pattern of growth of the bean roots and shoots in Petri dish 1 shown in
Fig. 6.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the growth responses observed in the bean roots and shoots.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain how auxin causes the difference in the pattern of growth shown by the shoots of
seedlings B and E shown in Fig. 6.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) Seeds require oxygen and water to germinate.
(i) State one other environmental condition that affects germination.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why oxygen and water are required for germination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
50/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
7 Complete the sentences about enzymes by writing a suitable word or phrase in each of the spaces
provided.
Enzymes are involved in chemical digestion which produces small ................................................
molecules that can be absorbed into the blood.
Two examples of protease enzymes are pepsin and trypsin. Pepsin is produced by the
................................................ and requires acidic conditions. These conditions are created by
the release of ................................................ , which provides the optimum pH for pepsin activity
and also kills harmful ................................................ .
The ................................................ produces trypsin which breaks down protein in
................................................ pH conditions. These conditions are created by a substance called
................................................ , which neutralises the gastric juices and also has an important role
in the ................................................ of fats and oils.

[8]
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2023 0610/42/M/J/23
51/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 9 4 6 1 0 0 9 5 4 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (KN/FC) 311949/4
52/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) The movement of molecules within an organism can occur by diffusion and active transport.
Complete Table 1.1 by placing ticks (3) to show the correct features of each process.
Table 1.1
active
feature diffusion
transport
movement of particles always occurs across a cell membrane
movement of molecules during gas exchange
rate of movement of particles is higher when the concentration

gradient is larger
requires energy from respiration
[4]
(b) Explain why active transport is important in root hair cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
it is important for the root hair cell so it can get its mineral ions and water for it
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
it can get nitrate ions so it can make protien and it can get mg to make chlorophyll
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
53/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
2 Transpiration is the loss of water vapour from the leaves of a plant.

mesophll
(a) Complete the sentence describing transpiration.
upper epidermis
Water evaporates from the surfaces of the ............................................... cells into the air
diffuses
spaces and then ............................................... out of the leaves, through the stomata, as
water vapour.
[2]
(b) Explain how water moves upwards in the xylem.
...................................................................................................................................................
First the water gets absorbed by the root hair cells then through transpiration pull the water
...................................................................................................................................................
from the bottom of the xylem or stem gets pulled to the upper layer of the xylem then it will
be distributed through the leaves
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
up the water potentonal
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
54/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) A student investigated the effect of wind speed on the rate of transpiration in a small
Pachira aquatica tree.
They measured the rate of transpiration when the plant was placed in different wind speeds
in both the light and the dark. The tree was given an adequate supply of water.
The results of this investigation are shown in Fig. 2.1.
rate of 4
transpiration
/ g per hr 3
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
wind speed / m per s
light dark
Fig. 2.1
(i) Describe and explain the results shown in Fig. 2.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
55/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(ii) The investigation was repeated in the light with the same species of tree in an
environment where the humidity was higher.
Draw a line on Fig. 2.1 to predict the results in the light with increased humidity. [1]
(iii) The investigation described in 2(c) was repeated (different wind speeds in both the light
and the dark).
However, the tree was not given an adequate supply of water during the investigation.
Predict the result and explain your prediction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 14]
56/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 Fig. 3.1 is a diagram of a section through a human heart.
Fig. 3.1
(a) Draw an X on the septum in Fig. 3.1. [1]
(b) Explain the reason for the difference between the thickness of the walls at B and at C in
Fig. 3.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
57/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(c) A red blood cell enters the vena cava at A in Fig. 3.1.
Explain how the red blood cell is moved from the vena cava to the aorta.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
58/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(d) An athlete measured her heart rate during a running race. She recorded it before the race,
during the race and during her recovery.
Her results are shown in Fig. 3.2.
200
180
160
140
heart rate
/ beats per 120
minute
100
80
60
40
0 5 10 15 20
time / minutes
start end
of race of race
Fig. 3.2
(i) Suggest how the athlete could monitor the activity of her heart.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the percentage change in heart rate from the maximum heart rate reached
during the race until the heart rate recorded at 18 minutes.
Give your answer to three significant figures.
Space for working.
............................................................ %
[3]
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
59/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(iii) Explain why heart rate must increase during exercise.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 16]
60/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
4 (a) Urea is a waste product.
(i) Describe how urea is formed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State the component of blood that transports urea.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State why urea must be excreted.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State the name of the blood vessel that carries blood away from the kidney.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a drawing of a nephron in the human kidney and associated blood vessels.
K
L
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
61/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
Describe how the structures labelled in Fig. 4.1 produce urine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Urea can be used as a fertiliser as it is a source of nitrogen.
Explain the importance of nitrate ions to plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) A farmer applied fertiliser to a field next to a lake.
Suggest two precautions the farmer should take when applying fertiliser to reduce the risk of
eutrophication occurring in the lake.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
62/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 (a) Describe the role of progesterone in pregnancy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a drawing of a section of a human placenta. The arrows show the direction of
blood flow.
maternal artery
from mother
to mother maternal vein
space filled
with maternal fetal capillary
blood
umbilical
arteries
from fetus
to fetus
from fetus umbilical vein
not to scale
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
63/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
Substances move across the placenta by diffusion.
(i) State the names of two useful substances that move from the blood of the mother to the
blood of the fetus.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Using the information in Fig. 5.1, suggest how the placenta is adapted for efficient
diffusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The Rhesus (Rh) factor is a protein that is found on the surface of red blood cells in some
people. If the protein is present then the individual is Rh positive.
The allele for the presence of the Rh factor is dominant and is represented by the letter D.
The recessive allele is represented by the letter d.
If a mother is Rh negative and the fetus is Rh positive there can be problems during pregnancy.
A Rh negative mother and a heterozygous Rh positive father have a child.
Complete the Punnett square and determine the probability of the child being Rh positive.
father’s gametes
mother’s gametes
probability .................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 11]
64/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows the percentage of land covered by forest in a country from 1660 until 2000.
30
28
26
24
22
percentage of
land covered 20
by forest
18
16
14
12
10
1650 1750 1850 1950 2050
year
Fig. 6.1
(i) Using the information in Fig. 6.1, state which 10-year period had the highest increase in
the percentage of land covered by forest.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Outline how human activities could cause the change in the percentage of land covered
by forest from 1660 to 1800 shown in Fig. 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
65/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(b) It is estimated that 40% of plant species are at risk of extinction.
Seed banks can store seeds from many species for a long time.
Table 6.1 shows some information about one plant species that is stored in a seed bank.
Table 6.1
mass of one seed / g percentage oil content percentage protein content

1.96 71 11
(i) Using the data shown in Table 6.1, calculate the mass of protein in one seed.
....................................................... g [1]
(ii) Suggest why many plants can easily be conserved using seed banks.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
66/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(iii) Describe why conservation projects such as seed banks are important.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
67/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
7 (a) State the name of a chemical element that is found in all proteins but not in carbohydrates or
fats.
nitrogen
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Table 7.1 shows the names of some biological molecules, enzymes and the organs that
produce the enzymes.
Complete Table 7.1.
Table 7.1
enzyme that
products of the
catalyses the
large biological breakdown of the organ that produces
breakdown of the
molecule large biological the enzyme
large biological
molecule
molecule
oil lipids pancreas
glycogen
glycogen liver
phosphorylase
maltose amylase
protein stomach
[4]
(c) State two hormones that can affect the concentration of glycogen in the liver.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 0610/43/M/J/23
68/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
*0123456789*
BIOLOGY0610/04
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) For examination from 2023
SPECIMEN PAPER 1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
69/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a photomicrograph showing a surface view of many villi in the small intestine.
villi
Fig. 1.1
(i) State the function of villi.
............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the structure of a villus.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
70/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) (i) Blood transports nutrients.
State the component of the blood that transports nutrients.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The nutrients in the blood can be used to become part of cells.
State the name of this process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Amino acids are used to make proteins.
State two examples of proteins that are found in the blood.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Explain the effect of cholera bacteria on the digestive system.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23 [Turn over
71/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Insulin is a hormone that regulates the concentration of glucose in the blood.
(a) Describe what is meant by the term hormone.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Person A and person B were monitored to see how well they could control their blood glucose
concentration.
They did not eat or drink anything other than water for eight hours before the monitoring
began. They then drank a glucose solution.
Blood samples were taken at 30-minute intervals.
The blood samples were tested for glucose concentration.
The results are shown in Fig. 2.1.
blood glucose
concentration
/ mg per 100 cm3
220
200
A
180
160
glucose
solution
140
ingested
120
100
B
80
60
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
time / minutes
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
72/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(i) Calculate the percentage increase in the blood glucose concentration in person A
between 60 and 90 minutes.
Give your answer to the nearest whole number.
..............................................................%
[3]
(ii) Using Fig. 2.1, compare the response of person A with the response of person B after
the ingestion of glucose.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Using Fig. 2.1, explain the response of person B after 90 minutes.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [4]
73/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(iv) Person A had Type 1 diabetes.
Outline the treatment of Type 1 diabetes.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
74/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a photomicrograph of human blood.
phagocyte
lymphocyte
red blood
cell
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe the differences in appearance and the functions of the three cells labelled in
Fig. 3.1.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [6]
75/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows some of the stages of blood clotting.
a blood vessel breaks
platelets collect at the

break in the blood vessel
forms a mesh at the break

in the blood vessel
Fig. 3.2
(i) Complete Fig. 3.2 by filling in the two empty boxes. [1]
(ii) State two roles of blood clotting.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
76/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(c) Haemophilia is a sex-linked blood disorder. The blood of people with haemophilia takes
longer to clot.
Fig. 3.3 is a pedigree diagram showing the inheritance of haemophilia.
Q R S T
male with normal clotting time
male with haemophilia
female with normal clotting time
Fig. 3.3
• The allele for normal clotting time is represented by XH.
• The allele for haemophilia is represented by Xh.
(i) State the genotypes of the people identified as P, Q and R in Fig. 3.3.
P .........................................................................................................................................
Q ........................................................................................................................................
R .........................................................................................................................................
[3]
77/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(ii) The couple S and T are expecting another child.
State the probability that the child will have haemophilia.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe what is meant by the term sex-linked characteristic.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
78/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 (a) Yeast can respire aerobically and anaerobically.
State the balanced chemical equation for aerobic respiration.
............................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) When yeast respires anaerobically, ethanol is produced.
Ethanol is a type of sustainable resource that can be made from a wide range of crop plants.
It can be used as a biofuel.
Table 4.1 summarises some information about crop plants that are used to make biofuel.
Table 4.1
crop plant biofuel energy yield optimum growth optimum annual

produced / GJ per ha temperature / °C rainfall range / mm
wheat ethanol 53–84 24 800–1200
corn ethanol 63–76 18 360–1000
sugar beet ethanol 110–122 18 360–1000
sugarcane ethanol 110–140 28 800–1200
oil palm oil 150–166 28 1100–2500
A country has a mean temperature range of 12 °C to 24 °C. The country has a mean annual
rainfall of 1000 mm.
Suggest and explain which crop plant would be the most suitable crop to grow to produce
biofuel in the country.
Use the information in Table 4.1 to support your choice.
crop plant ...................................................................................................................................
explanation ................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [3]
79/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(c) Describe and explain how a reduced concentration of water vapour in the air would increase
the movement of water through crop plants.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) Sugarcane is a crop plant that is usually grown from stem cuttings rather than from seeds.
Describe the advantages of using cuttings rather than seeds to reproduce crop plants.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
80/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 Fig. 5.1 shows the marine iguana, Amblyrhynchus cristatus.
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Marine iguanas are reptiles.
State two features that are used to classify animals as reptiles.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State two structures that are present in plant cells that are not present in the cells of
reptiles.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Marine iguanas feed on seaweed. Seaweed contains starch.
(i) State the names of two parts of the digestive system where starch is digested by
enzymes.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
81/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(ii) Explain why the shape of an enzyme is important for digestion.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) There are many threats to species such as the marine iguana.
Describe ways endangered plant and animal species can be conserved.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
82/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
6 Wetlands are important ecosystems. Researchers studied the feeding relationships between the
organisms in an area of coastal wetland.
Fig. 6.1 shows part of the food web that they studied.
spotted
sandpiper
stone crab
blenny
mysid shrimp
oyster pipefish
water flea
algae and
phytoplankton
Fig. 6.1
(a) Complete Table 6.1 by giving the name of one organism from the food web in Fig. 6.1 for
each row.
Table 6.1
name of organism from Fig. 6.1
producer
secondary consumer
an animal that feeds

at two trophic levels
[3]
83/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(b) The functioning of ecosystems relies on the cycling of nutrients.
Fig. 6.2 shows part of the nitrogen cycle.
nitrogen gas in
the air
C
amino acids
nitrate ions
in plants
D A
proteins proteins in dead plants ammonium ions

in plants
Fig. 6.2
(i) State the name of process A in Fig. 6.2 and give the type of organism that converts
ammonium ions to nitrate ions.
A .........................................................................................................................................
type of organism .................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Describe how the nitrate ions used in process C enter the roots of plants.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) State the name of the structure in plant cells where process D occurs.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
84/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(iv) State the process that occurs at B.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A pyramid of numbers for the wetland ecosystem showed that there were very large numbers
of organisms at the base of the pyramid and very few at the top.
Explain why.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2020 0610/04/SP/23
85/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 4 6 4 9 7 8 6 0 0 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/SG) 303960/5
86/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) (i) State the name of the gas exchange surface in humans.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two features of the gas exchange surface in humans.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of the gas exchange system in humans.
trachea
diaphragm
Fig. 1.1
(i) Draw a label line and the letter X on Fig. 1.1 to identify an external intercostal muscle. [1]
(ii) State the name of the tissue that forms C-shaped structures in the wall of the trachea
and state its function.
name .................................................................................................................................
function ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/F/M/22
87/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(iii) Describe the effects on the thorax of contraction of the diaphragm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Table 1.1 compares the composition of inspired and expired air.
Table 1.1
percentage in percentage in
gas name of the gas
inspired air expired air
A nitrogen 78 78
B 21 16
C 0.04 4
D variable saturated
(i) Complete Table 1.1 by writing the names of gases B, C and D. [3]
(ii) For gas B and gas C, explain the differences in the percentages shown in Table 1.1
between inspired and expired air.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 14]
88/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 is a photomicrograph showing the fertilisation of one human egg cell.
sperm
Fig. 2.1
Describe and explain the adaptations of the cells shown in Fig. 2.1 that enable fertilisation
and early development of the embryo to occur.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/F/M/22
89/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(b) People can use artificial insemination (AI) or in vitro fertilisation (IVF) to increase their chance
of becoming pregnant.
(i) Outline the process of artificial insemination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Outline how the process of in vitro fertilisation (IVF) differs from artificial insemination (AI).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Describe the social implications of fertility treatments.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 15]
90/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 (a) A scientist investigated the effect of temperature on the mass of leaves picked from a
tea plant, Camellia sinensis.
• Three samples of leaves were picked and the mass of each sample of leaves was
recorded.
• Each sample of leaves was kept at a different temperature for four hours.
• After four hours, the mass of each sample of leaves was measured and recorded
again.
• The scientist then calculated the final mass as a percentage of the initial mass for
each sample.
Fig. 3.1 shows the results.
100
final mass as a 90
percentage of the
initial mass 80
70
0 10 20 30 40
temperature at which the leaves were kept / °C
Fig. 3.1
(i) Explain the results shown in Fig. 3.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) State one factor, other than temperature, that would affect the loss of mass from the
leaves of a plant.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/F/M/22
91/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(b) Fig. 3.2 is a photomicrograph of the tissue that transports water and mineral ions in a plant.
Fig. 3.2
(i) State the name of the tissue shown in Fig. 3.2.

xylem vessels
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how the tissue shown in Fig. 3.2 is adapted for its functions in the plant.
it has hollow areas to transport wwater easily
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
its inner wall is built out of ligin
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
it is water proof walls
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
it.....................................................................................................................................
has large surface area [3]
92/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) Explain how mineral ions enter a plant.
minerals enter a plant through phelom , which transport minerals it is first taken up by the
...................................................................................................................................................
root hair cell then it gets transported to the phelom and pulled up to the leaves and then it
can disruptued it
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
by active transport , carreid by carrier protein
...................................................................................................................................................
agiasnt conc gradient by energy
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/F/M/22
93/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of Vibrio cholerae, the bacterium that causes cholera.
plasmid
DNA
ribosomes
capsule
cell wall
cytoplasm
flagellum
Fig. 4.1
(i) Describe two similarities and two differences between a palisade mesophyll cell and the
bacterial cell shown in Fig. 4.1.
present of cell wall
similarity 1 .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
cytoplasm
similarity 2 .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
no capsule
difference 1 ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
no flagelum
difference 2 ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
94/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(ii) Explain how the cholera bacterium causes diarrhoea.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A scientist tested the resistance of one strain of bacteria to different antibiotics.
The scientist tested solutions of five different antibiotics, A to E.
She soaked a paper disc in each antibiotic solution.
The paper discs with antibiotics were placed in a Petri dish containing bacteria on agar jelly.
Fig. 4.2 is a diagram of the appearance of the Petri dish after 48 hours. The shaded areas
show where bacteria grew. The clear areas show where bacteria did not grow.
area where
bacteria grew
A
B
clear area paper disc
where bacteria with antibiotic
did not grow
D
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/F/M/22
95/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(i) The strain of bacteria used in this investigation causes a disease.
Using the information in Fig. 4.2, explain why antibiotic E would be the most effective at
treating this disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The results in Fig. 4.2 show that this strain of bacteria is resistant to antibiotic A.
Five years ago, a similar investigation found that the clear area for antibiotic A was the
same size as antibiotic B is in Fig. 4.2.
Explain how bacteria become resistant to antibiotics.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) Describe how to minimise the risk of antibiotic B developing the same results as
antibiotic A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]
96/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 The Arabian oryx and the northern white rhinoceros are both mammals.
Fig. 5.1 is a photograph of an Arabian oryx. Fig. 5.2 is a photograph of a northern white rhinoceros.
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2
(a) Describe two pieces of evidence visible in Fig. 5.1 and Fig. 5.2 that show these animals are
mammals.
ear laps out side
1 ................................................................................................................................................
4 legs, fur
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
97/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(b) Different conservation methods are used to try to prevent species from becoming extinct.
A population of the Arabian oryx and a population of northern white rhinoceros were monitored.
Fig. 5.3 shows how the population size of each species has changed over time.
350 35
300 30
250 25
number of 200 20 number of

northern
Arabian
white
oryx
150 15 rhinoceros
100 10
50 5
0 0
1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015 2020
year
key:
Arabian oryx
northern white rhinoceros
Fig. 5.3
(i) Calculate the percentage increase in the number of Arabian oryx between 1990 and
2000.
Give your answer to three significant figures.
Space for working.
............................................................ %
[3]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/F/M/22
98/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(ii) Describe the data for the northern white rhinoceros shown in Fig. 5.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Suggest the conservation methods that were used to increase the number of Arabian oryx
between 1978 and 2000.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Explain the risks to the northern white rhinoceros species as a result of its population size.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 14]
99/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 (a) Complete Table 6.1 to show the names, functions and sites of action of the three different
digestive enzymes.
Table 6.1
name of enzyme function site of action
pepsin
trypsin
breaks down maltose to glucose
[3]
100/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(b) Enzymes are proteins.
Fig. 6.1 shows the stages involved in protein synthesis.
A – codes for a protein

DNA
stage 1
nuclear membrane
DNA
stage 2
nuclear membrane
stage 3 B
not to scale
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/F/M/22
101/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(i) State the name of the parts represented by the letters A and C in Fig. 6.1.
A ........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the events that occur during stage 2 in Fig. 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State what determines the order in which the parts labelled B are assembled.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The shape of a protein is very important for its function.
Explain the importance of shape for the function of an enzyme.
...................................................................................................................................................
the shape has a complementry substrate which will activate the procees
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/F/M/22
102/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 3 7 6 0 2 7 4 8 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (RW/CB) 302037/5
103/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Some students were studying the activity of yeast. They made a fact file, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Organism: yeast
Scientific name: Saccharomyces cerevisiae
Structure: single cells
Main cell structures: cell wall, cell membrane,

vacuole, nucleus, mitochondria, rough
endoplasmic reticulum
Main energy source: sugars
Fig. 1.1
(i) State the kingdom in which yeast is classified.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the process that occurs in mitochondria to provide energy for yeast cells.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Yeast cells make the enzyme sucrase. Sucrase catalyses the breakdown of sucrose to
glucose and fructose.
Enzymes are made of protein.
Explain how the shape of a sucrase molecule is related to its function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The students made an extract of sucrase from yeast cells.
They investigated the activity of the sucrase extract at different pH values. They determined
the rate of reaction at each pH.
They then calculated the rate of each reaction as a percentage of the fastest reaction, to give
the percentage activity of sucrase.
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
104/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
The results of this investigation are shown in Fig. 1.2.
100
90
80
70
60
percentage
activity of 50
sucrase
40
30
20
10
0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
pH
Fig. 1.2
Describe and explain the effect of pH on the activity of sucrase shown in Fig. 1.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 10]
105/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Mammals have a double circulation.
Fig. 2.1 is a diagram of a section through the heart of a mammal. The arrows show the direction of
blood flow through the heart and blood vessels.
C
A
X septum
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) State the name of the chamber of the heart with the thickest wall.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) D is a vein. State the name of this vein and describe its structure.
name .................................................................................................................................
description of structure ......................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
106/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(iii) Identify the structure labelled X in Fig. 2.1 and state its role in the heart.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
107/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) Fig. 2.2 is a diagram that shows the double circulation of a mammal. The arrows indicate the
movement of oxygen and carbon dioxide in and out of the blood.
capillaries in
the lungs
capillaries in
respiring tissues
Fig. 2.2
(i) Shade the blood vessel in Fig. 2.2 that transports blood with the highest oxygen
concentration. [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
108/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(ii) Describe the evidence shown in Fig. 2.2 that the mammal has a double circulatory
system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain the advantages of a double circulation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 13]
109/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
3 The pancreas is an organ that has roles in the digestive and hormonal systems of humans.
Fig. 3.1 shows part of the alimentary canal and some of the associated organs.
J
stomach
K
pancreas
L
pancreatic duct
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the names of organs J, K and L.
J ................................................................................................................................................
K ...............................................................................................................................................
L ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The pancreas secretes hormones into the blood and enzymes into the pancreatic duct. The
enzymes are released into the alimentary canal.
Complete Table 3.1 by stating the hormones and enzymes that are secreted by the pancreas.
Table 3.1
hormones secreted by the pancreas enzymes secreted by the pancreas
...................................................................... ......................................................................
...................................................................... ......................................................................
......................................................................
[5]
110/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) Chloride ions also move along the pancreatic duct.
CFTR proteins in the cells lining the pancreatic duct move chloride ions out of the cells into
the duct.
Fig. 3.2 is a diagram of a cell from the lining of the pancreatic duct showing the location and
activity of CFTR proteins.
inside the pancreatic duct
CFTR
protein
pancreatic Key:
duct cell chloride ion
not to scale
Fig. 3.2
Explain how CFTR proteins move chloride ions across the membrane of the cell shown in
Fig. 3.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
111/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(d) The movement of chloride ions into the pancreatic duct causes water to move from the cells
into the duct to help the flow of liquid in the duct.
Explain how water moves from the cell shown in Fig. 3.2 into the pancreatic duct.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
112/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(e) If CFTR proteins do not move chloride ions, the liquid in the pancreatic duct becomes very
sticky and the duct can become blocked.
Blocked pancreatic ducts are one effect of cystic fibrosis, which is an inherited disease. Cystic
fibrosis is caused by a mutation of the gene that codes for the CFTR protein.
Fig. 3.3 shows the pedigree diagram of a family that has two people who have cystic fibrosis.
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
Key:
female without cystic fibrosis
male without cystic fibrosis
female with cystic fibrosis
male with cystic fibrosis
Fig. 3.3
(i) The allele that causes cystic fibrosis is a recessive allele.
Describe and explain the evidence shown in Fig. 3.3 that cystic fibrosis is caused by a
recessive allele.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
113/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Person 7 is expecting a child with a man who is heterozygous for cystic fibrosis.
Complete the genetic diagram to predict the probability of person 7 and the heterozygous
man having a child with cystic fibrosis.
Use the symbol A for the dominant allele and a for the recessive allele.
parental genotypes ................ ................
gametes +
genotypes of offspring .......................................................................................................
phenotypes of offspring .....................................................................................................
probability of having a child with cystic fibrosis .................................................................

[5]
[Total: 21]
114/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
4 Researchers investigated the effect of adding cattle manure (cattle faeces) to fields where snap
bean plants, Phaseolus vulgaris, were grown. Cattle manure contains some protein.
(a) Explain how protein in the cattle manure is converted to the type of ions that plants can
absorb.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Snap bean plants are legumes which have root nodules that contain nitrogen‑fixing bacteria.
Fig. 4.1 shows some root nodules.
root nodules
Fig. 4.1
(i) Suggest the advantage to farmers of having snap bean plants that have a large number
of root nodules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
115/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(ii) The researchers investigated the effect of adding cattle manure to fields of snap bean
plants.
• Field 1 was treated with a small quantity of cattle manure.

• Field 2 was treated with a medium quantity of cattle manure.
• Field 3 was treated with a large quantity of cattle manure.
• Field 4 was not treated with any cattle manure.
The researchers counted the number of root nodules on samples of plants from each
field when the snap beans were harvested.
The results of the investigation are shown in Fig. 4.2.
160
140
120
100
average number
of root nodules 80
per plant
60
40
20
0
1 2 3 4
field
Fig. 4.2
Calculate the percentage increase in the average number of root nodules per plant when
snap bean plants were grown with a large quantity of cattle manure (field 3) compared
with no cattle manure (field 4).
Space for working.
.............................................................%
[3]
116/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(iii) When large quantities of manure are put on fields it can lead to eutrophication of streams
and rivers. This can lead to the death of fish.
Describe how eutrophication of streams and rivers can lead to the death of fish.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 13]
5 The Mulanje cedar, Widdringtonia whytei, is the national tree of Malawi. This species of tree
grows naturally only on Mount Mulanje in Malawi. Many of the trees have been overharvested or
destroyed by wildfires, resulting in deforestation, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the genus name of the Mulanje cedar tree.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
117/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) Explain the undesirable effects of deforestation on habitats that are on mountains, such as
Mount Mulanje.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Scientists in Malawi are working to prevent the extinction of the Mulanje cedar tree in its
natural habitat.
Explain the benefits to other organisms on Mount Mulanje of conserving the Mulanje cedar
tree in its natural habitat.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) The seeds of many endangered tree species are kept in seed banks.
Suggest why it is important to collect seeds from many individual trees of each species rather
than just one tree.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
118/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 is a flow diagram showing the events that occur to form a human fetus.
organ P ovary
diploid diploid
cell cell
process Q
haploid haploid
sperm cell egg cell
process R
diploid
cell S
process T
embryo
process U
fetus
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
119/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
Complete Table 6.1 by using the information in the flow diagram to identify the cell, the organ
and the processes shown in Fig. 6.1.
Table 6.1
cell, organ or process name of the cell, organ or process
organ P
cell S
process Q produces
haploid sperm and eggs
process R produces
diploid cell S
process T occurs so that
cell S can grow into an
embryo
process U occurs so that
the embryo can gain
oxygen and nutrients
from the mother’s blood
[6]
(b) (i) State why it is important that sperm and egg cells are haploid and not diploid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the function of the jelly coat that surrounds egg cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
120/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(c) Complete the sentences with the appropriate words.
The placenta provides a large surface area for the ............................................... of oxygen
and carbon dioxide between maternal and fetal blood. Dissolved nutrients also pass across
the placenta. Examples of dissolved nutrients are: ............................................... acids,
............................................... and ............................................... .
Antibodies pass from the maternal blood giving natural ...............................................
immunity to the baby for some infections that the mother has had or has been vaccinated
against. Each different type of vaccine contains one or more ...............................................
taken from the ............................................... that causes the disease.

[7]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/M/J/22
121/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 7 9 7 2 1 3 5 0 4 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (RW/SW) 302038/4
122/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a spongy mesophyll cell from the leaf of a plant. The arrows show the net direction
of movement of carbon dioxide molecules during daylight.
A
G
B
F
0.01 mm
Fig. 1.1
(a) The scale bar in Fig. 1.1 represents 0.01 mm.
Convert 0.01 mm to micrometres.
..................................................... μm [1]
(b) Table 1.1 shows:
• the functions of some of the structures in plant cells

• some of the names of the structures where these functions occur
• some of the letters that label these structures in Fig. 1.1.
Complete Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
function structure letter in Fig. 1.1
nucleus
chloroplast
aerobic respiration
contains cell sap and stores water
[5]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
123/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Carbon dioxide is a raw material for photosynthesis.
(i) State the process by which carbon dioxide travels into the leaf from the air.
diffusion gas exchange
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the pathway taken by a molecule of carbon dioxide, from the air outside a leaf
to a spongy mesophyll cell.
...........................................................................................................................................
it enters through stomata then gets transported through the plant cells till it reaches
...........................................................................................................................................
the spongy layer
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Low concentrations of carbon dioxide in the air may restrict the rate of photosynthesis in
plants.
(i) State the term given to something present in the environment in such short supply that it
restricts life processes.
limiting factor
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one other feature of the environment that may also restrict the rate of
photosynthesis.
light intensity
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Researchers have devised a process of artificial photosynthesis. They use gold nanoparticles
as a catalyst to utilise green light to convert carbon dioxide to fuels, such as propane.
Suggest the advantages to the environment of using artificial photosynthesis on a large scale.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 13]
124/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 The kidneys filter blood, separate useful molecules from excretory wastes and control the water
content of the blood.
Fig. 2.1 is a diagram of a kidney tubule and associated blood vessels. The arrows show the
direction of blood flow.
Fig. 2.2 is a drawing of a vertical section through a cell from the lining of region 2 of the tubule.
Q
P
1
2
R
S
Fig. 2.1 Fig. 2.2
(a) (i) State the name of structure P.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Blood vessel Q has the highest blood pressure.
Suggest why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The structures labelled S on Fig. 2.2 are microvilli.
Explain the importance of the microvilli on the surface of these cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
125/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(b) Table 2.1 shows the concentrations of some substances in blood plasma and in the regions
labelled 1 and 3 on the tubule shown in Fig. 2.1.
Table 2.1
concentration / mg per cm3

substance
blood plasma region 1 region 3
protein 8000 0 0
glucose 100 100 0
salts 320 320 300
urea 30 30 2000
Outline how the kidney tubules function to produce urine from the substances in blood
plasma.
Use the information in Fig. 2.1, Fig. 2.2 and Table 2.1 to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
126/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) The kidneys are examples of organs that help the body to maintain a constant internal
environment.
(i) State the term for maintaining a constant internal environment by negative feedback.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how negative feedback controls the blood glucose concentration of a person
who has not eaten for a day.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
127/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
3 The eye is adapted for focusing on near and distant objects.
Fig. 3.1 shows the parts of the eye involved in focusing. The eye is focused on a distant object.
cornea
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State the term used to describe what happens to light as it passes from the air into the
cornea.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe and explain the changes that occur in the eye when adjusting focus from a
distant object to a near object.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
128/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) Rods and cones are the receptors in the retina of the eye.
(i) Describe the functions of rods and cones in the eye.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
129/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(ii) Fig. 3.2 is a photograph showing regions of a human retina, as viewed through the pupil
at the front of the eye.
peripheral retina
blind spot fovea
blood
vessel
Fig. 3.2
Complete Table 3.1 to show the distribution of rods and cones across the retina.
Use these words to complete the table, each word may be used once, more than once or
not at all:
many few none
Table 3.1
distribution across the retina

receptor
peripheral retina blind spot fovea
rods
cones
[3]
130/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) Colour blindness can be caused by a mutation in a gene. The gene is located on the
X chromosome.
Fig. 3.3 is a pedigree diagram of a family which has several people who are colour‑blind.
1 2
3 4
5 6
Key:
female with normal
colour vision
male with normal
colour vision
male with colour
blindness
Fig. 3.3
(i) Colour blindness is sex‑linked.
State the evidence from Fig. 3.3 that supports the idea that colour blindness is sex‑linked.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the genotype of person 5.
Use the symbols X and Y for the sex chromosomes and A for the dominant allele and a
for the recessive allele of the gene for colour blindness.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
131/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(iii) Use the information in Fig. 3.3 to complete the genetic diagram to show the probability of
person 3 and person 4 having another child with colour blindness.
person 3 person 4
parental female with normal male with normal

phenotypes colour vision colour vision
parental
genotypes ................................ ................................
gametes +
offspring
genotypes ..........................................................................................................................
offspring
phenotypes ........................................................................................................................
probability of a child having colour blindness ....................................................................

[5]
[Total: 19]
132/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of a virus.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Identify the parts of the virus labelled N and O.

protien coat
N ...............................................................................................................................................
dna rna
O ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infects and destroys lymphocytes.
The number of lymphocytes in the blood of a person infected with HIV was measured over a
period of 84 months.
800
700
600
500
number of
lymphocytes 400
per mm3 of blood
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
time after HIV infection / months
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
133/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(i) Use the information shown in Fig. 4.2 to calculate the percentage change in the number
of lymphocytes from month 10 to month 60.
Space for working.
.............................................................%
[3]
(ii) Describe the changes in the number of lymphocytes, over the 84 months following
infection with HIV, shown in Fig. 4.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Outline the consequences of the changes in the number of lymphocytes for the health of
the person infected with HIV.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
134/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(iv) Explain why antibiotics are not used to treat viral infections.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]
5 Fig. 5.1 is a diagram of the human gas exchange system.
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Identify the parts of the gas exchange system labelled X, Y and Z in Fig. 5.1.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
Z ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) State the name of the tissue that prevents the collapse of Y and Z during breathing.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
135/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(b) Breathing involves the movement of the ribs and the diaphragm.
Describe the process of inspiration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) State the name of the gas exchange surface in the lungs.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
136/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 Coral reefs are important ecosystems.
(a) Complete the sentence about ecosystems.

communtie
An ecosystem can be defined as a unit containing the ................................................. of
enviroment
organisms and their ................................................., interacting together.
[2]
Fig. 6.1 is a photograph of a coral reef.
Fig. 6.1
(b) Fig. 6.2 is part of a food web for a coral reef ecosystem which is similar to the one shown in
Fig. 6.1.
reef shark
pufferfish
fan worm blue chromis butterflyfish angelfish

fish
coral polyps sea sponge
zooplankton
phytoplankton
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
137/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(i) State the number of secondary consumers shown in Fig. 6.2.
.....................................................................................................................................
4 [1]
(ii) State the name of a species that feeds at more than one trophic level in Fig. 6.2.
reef sjark
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the number of different organisms in the shortest food chain in Fig. 6.2.
4
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State the evidence from the food web in Fig. 6.2, that phytoplankton are producers.
they are at the start of the food chain no arrows pointing at it
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) It is rare for there to be more than five trophic levels in an ecosystem.
Explain what limits the number of trophic levels in food webs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) One threat to aquatic ecosystems, such as coral reefs, is global climate change.
Discuss the threats to aquatic ecosystems, other than climate change.
...................................................................................................................................................
water pollution
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
hunting or fishing
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
golobal warmoing
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/M/J/22
138/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 9 4 8 6 9 2 8 8 4 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/CT) 303967/4
139/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Penicillin is produced by biotechnology industries.
(a) (i) State the name of the type of pathogen penicillin is used to treat.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the group of medicinal drugs that includes penicillin.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a flow diagram of some of the steps in the production of penicillin.
organism A in step 4
a test-tube
X Y Z
step 5
gas outflow
pipe
step 1 filter
step 3
nutrient
mixing tank step 8
step 6
sterilising tank penicillin
step 2 step 7
fermenter not to scale
Fig. 1.1
(i) Organism A belongs to the fungus kingdom.
State two main features of fungal cells that are used to distinguish them from the cells of
prokaryotes.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the genus name of organism A in Fig. 1.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
140/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(iii) Penicillin is produced in the fermenter shown in Fig. 1.1. A variety of nutrients, X, Y and Z,
are mixed together and added to the fermenter in step 1.
List two nutrients that need to be added to a fermenter to produce penicillin.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Explain why the nutrients are sterilised (step 2) before they are added to the fermenter
(step 3).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Explain why the fermenter has a gas outflow pipe.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(vi) Using the information in Fig. 1.1, outline the events occurring from step 4 to step 8 during
the production of penicillin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 14]
141/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Red blood cells contain the protein haemoglobin.
(a) (i) State the names of the four chemical elements that are found in all proteins.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the role of haemoglobin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a photomicrograph of some red blood cells from a person with sickle cell
anaemia.
Abnormal red blood cells occur because of a mutation in the gene for haemoglobin.
abnormal red
blood cell
Fig. 2.1
Suggest how the shape of the abnormal red blood cell shown in Fig. 2.1 will affect blood flow.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
142/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(c) The allele for the normal form of haemoglobin is HbA.
The allele for the abnormal form of haemoglobin is HbS.
Draw a genetic diagram to determine the probability of two heterozygous parents having a
child who does not have the HbS allele.
parental phenotypes ................................ x ................................
parental genotypes ................................ x ................................
gametes , x ,
............. ............. ............. .............
offspring genotypes ..................................................................................................................
probability of offspring not having the HbS allele .....................................................................

[5]
143/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(d) Fig. 2.2 and Fig. 2.3 are maps showing some of the different regions in a country. Scientists
studied the distribution of the HbS allele in the country.
Fig. 2.2 shows the estimated frequency of the allele within the population.
Fig. 2.3 shows the estimated number of babies born with sickle cell anaemia in each region.
low
estimated frequency A
of the HbS allele C
in the population
B
high
Fig. 2.2
estimated number A
low
of babies born C
medium
with sickle cell
anaemia high B
Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
144/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
The scientists made a statement:
‘There is a relationship between the frequency of the HbS allele and the number of babies
born with sickle cell anaemia in regions A, B and C.’
(i) Using the information in Fig. 2.2 and Fig. 2.3, discuss the evidence for and against this
statement for regions A, B and C only.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) Suggest how the scientists would identify the presence of the HbS allele in tissue
samples.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
145/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(e) Mutations are always inherited in single-celled organisms that reproduce asexually but are
not always inherited in organisms that reproduce sexually.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
146/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
3 Acid rain has destroyed many forests including the forest shown in Fig. 3.1.
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe how acid rain destroys forests.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
147/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(b) Explain the negative consequences to the environment of destroying forests.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Acid rain can also damage aquatic organisms such as the amphibian shown in Fig. 3.2.
Fig. 3.2
Suggest why amphibians are vulnerable to pollutants such as acid rain.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
148/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(d) Many countries have strict laws to prevent acid rain.
Describe how countries have reduced acid rain.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]
149/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of the alimentary canal.
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
150/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
Complete Table 4.1 by stating:
• the names of the organs from Fig. 4.1

• the letters of all the processes shown in the key that occur in each organ.
Key:
A – absorption
C – chemical digestion
E – egestion
I – ingestion
M – mechanical digestion
Table 4.1
number from letter or letters of all the

name of the organ
Fig. 4.1 processes that occur in the organ
[6]
151/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(b) Fig. 4.2 is a diagram of a villus. The arrow indicates the direction of blood flow.
U S
T
not to scale
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
152/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
Describe the structure of a villus and its role in the alimentary canal.
Use the letters in Fig. 4.2 to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 12]
153/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 Glasshouses are designed to maximise crop plant yield.
(a) (i) Explain why carbon dioxide enrichment is used in many glasshouses to increase crop
plant yield.
...........................................................................................................................................
carbon dioxide in the atmosphere is less and with less co2 the crop yield will be
...........................................................................................................................................
less because plants need c02, so greenhouses add more c02 to increase the rate
of crop yield
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Suggest how the carbon dioxide concentration in a glasshouse can be enriched.
...........................................................................................................................................
adding animals in the are or pumping co2 gas in the air
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Outline how carbon dioxide in a glasshouse moves into leaves.
...........................................................................................................................................
carbon .. enter the leave through stomata by diffusion
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
154/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) Additional lighting is often installed in glasshouses in countries with temperate climates.
Table 5.1 summarises some of the factors that are considered by plant growers when
choosing the type of lamps to install in a glasshouse.
Table 5.1
type of electrical energy used light intensity output

notes
lamp by the lamp / J per s / arbitrary units
• releases lots of heat
sodium 1041 1767 • best when used in
addition to sunlight
• releases very little heat
LED 423 378 • can be used as an
alternative to sunlight
• releases some heat
metal
651 817 • can be used as an
halide
alternative to sunlight
• releases some heat
fluorescent 394 374 • best when used in
addition to sunlight
(i) Calculate the percentage increase in the energy used by the metal halide lamp compared
to the energy used by the fluorescent lamp.
Space for working.
............................................................ %
[2]
(ii) State which type of lamp has the highest light intensity output per unit of electrical energy
used.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
155/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(iii) Some types of lamp release a lot of heat.
Explain the possible effects of excessive heat on the plants in a glasshouse.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
156/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a photograph of fruit attached to the branch of an orange tree, Citrus sinensis.
Fig. 6.1
State one reason why orange trees are classified as dicotyledonous plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
it has petal of multiple of 4,5 it has network of vein like leaves
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Biotechnologists use enzymes to extract juice from fruit such as oranges.
Define the term enzyme.
...................................................................................................................................................
enzyme is a protein which fasten the reaction and it has a complementary substrate
...................................................................................................................................................
so it can join together at active site and it doesn't get used up
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
157/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows the results of leaving pieces of orange fruit in an enzyme solution for different
lengths of time.
total volume
7
of juice
extracted
/ cm3 6
4
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / minutes
Fig. 6.2
(i) State the name of the enzyme used to extract juice from fruit.
pectinases
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Using the information in Fig. 6.2, state the optimum length of time for efficient extraction
of juice from oranges.
45
min
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the vitamin found in high concentrations in citrus fruit such as oranges.
c
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The genes in some plants have been changed to increase the concentration of vitamins that
these plants produce.
(i) State the name of the process of changing the genes of a plant.
modification
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
158/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
21
(ii) Discuss the possible disadvantages of people changing the genes in a plant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/M/J/22
159/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 8 9 7 7 2 4 5 1 3 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2022
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (PQ/JG) 302255/5
160/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a side view of a human skull indicating the four types of teeth and the jaws.
upper jaw
incisors
canine
premolar molars
lower jaw
Fig. 1.1
(i) State the function of human teeth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the visible outer layer of the teeth.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain the process of tooth decay in humans.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/O/N/22 [Turn over
161/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(b) Mammals can be classified according to the position and shape of their teeth.
Fig. 1.2 shows the skulls of seven mammals.
A
B
E
F
not to scale
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/O/N/22
162/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(i) Use the key to identify each species shown in Fig. 1.2.
Write the letter of each species (A to G) in the correct box in the key.
Key
1 (a) two or more different types of teeth go to 2
(b) fewer than two different types of teeth go to 3
2 (a) have wide gap between front and back teeth in both jaws go to 4
(b) have no wide gap between front and back teeth in both jaws go to 6
3 (a) all teeth of similar shape Orcinus orca
Myrmecophaga
(b) no teeth on either jaw
tridactyla
4 (a) no incisors in upper jaw Cervus elephus
(b) incisors in both upper and lower jaw go to 5
5 (a) incisors on lower jaw longer than incisors on upper jaw Macropus rufus
(b) incisors on upper and lower jaw are similar in size Equus ferus
6 (a) incisors on lower jaw project forwards Lemur catta
(b) incisors on lower jaw do not project forwards Pteropus niger
[4]
(ii) Killer whales, Orcinus orca, are mammals.
State two internal features you would expect to find in a killer whale that you would not
find in a fish.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State the name of the group of animals that includes mammals and fish.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
163/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 Digestive enzymes catalyse the breakdown of large insoluble molecules.
(a) (i) Explain why it is important that large insoluble molecules are broken down by chemical
digestion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of the substance that is the solvent for most molecules that have been
digested by enzymes.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The activity of two protease enzymes, A and B, was measured at different pHs. Both enzymes
are found in the human alimentary canal.
900 140
enzyme A
enzyme B
800
120
700
100
600
500 80
enzyme A activity enzyme B activity
/ U per mg 400 / U per mg
60
300
40
200
20
100
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
pH
acid neutral alkaline
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/O/N/22
164/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
Describe and explain the roles of the two protease enzymes, A and B, in the alimentary
canal.
Use the information in Fig. 2.1 to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
(c) Maltase is a digestive enzyme that acts in the small intestine.
State the exact location of maltase in the small intestine.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
165/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows some apparatus that was used to investigate water loss from a leafy shoot.
oil layer
burette
water
leafy
shoot
jar cut end
water
balance
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the name of the process by which leafy shoots lose water.
transpiratuiion
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Before the leafy shoot is inserted into the jar shown in Fig. 3.1, it must be recut under
water.
Suggest why the end of the leafy shoot was cut under water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the purpose of the oil layer on top of the water in the burette.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Using the information in Fig. 3.1, describe one method that can be used to determine
how much water is lost from the leafy shoot.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
166/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(b) The apparatus shown in Fig. 3.1 was used to investigate the effect of temperature on the rate
of water loss in a species of plant. The results are shown in Fig. 3.2.
0.60
0.50
0.40
rate of water
loss from leaves 0.30
/ g per m2 per s
0.20
0.10
0.00
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45
temperature / °C
Fig. 3.2
(i) Using the information in Fig. 3.2, calculate how much water would be lost from 1 m2 of
leaves in 12 hours if the plants were kept at 35 °C. Include the unit.
................................................................
[3]
(ii) Using the information in Fig. 3.2, describe and explain the effect of increasing temperature
on the rate of water loss in this species of plant.
...........................................................................................................................................
when temp increases the rate of transpirartion increaeses
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
when the temp of plant increases the water needs to cool down so it loses water
...........................................................................................................................................
through transpiration out of stomata
...........................................................................................................................................
so the excessive water loss causes wilting
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
increas the kintic enrgy increases temp
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
stomata opens wider
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/O/N/22
167/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(c) The apparatus shown in Fig. 3.1 can also be used to investigate the effects of changing
humidity on water loss in plants.
(i) Suggest why the mass of water in the apparatus does not change when the leafy shoot
is kept at 100% relative humidity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Even at extremely low relative humidities the leafy shoot did not wilt.
Explain why the leafy shoot shown in Fig. 3.1 did not wilt.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The investigation on the effect of temperature was done at a relative humidity of 20%.
The investigation was repeated at a relative humidity of 80% and all other conditions
were kept the same.
Predict how the water loss will differ from the trend shown in Fig. 3.2.
Sketch your prediction on Fig. 3.2.
[1]
[Total: 16]
168/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 Chromosomes are made of DNA.
(a) Describe the structure of a DNA molecule.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DNA is made up of molecules called nucleotides. Each nucleotide contains a
...................................................................................................................................................
phosphate group, a sugar group and a nitrogen base. The four types of nitrogen
bases are adenine (A), thymine (T), guanine (G) and cytosine (C).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) (i) Outline how antibiotic resistance develops in a population of bacteria.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Scientists use differences in antibiotic-resistance genes to distinguish between different

strains of the bacterium, methicillin-resistant S. aureus (MRSA).
Suggest why scientists use differences in base sequences to classify the strains of MRSA
rather than using other methods.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/O/N/22
169/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(iii) Explain why scientists are concerned that some strains of bacteria, such as S. aureus,
have become resistant to antibiotics.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) Describe how the use of antibiotics can be managed to reduce the development of
resistant strains of bacteria.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why MRSA is unlikely to be transmitted from a mother to her unborn fetus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Many species of bacteria do not cause disease. Bacteria are very important in many biological
processes.
State the names of three natural processes involving bacteria that are important to
ecosystems.
respiration
1 ................................................................................................................................................
sensitivity
2 ................................................................................................................................................
reproduction
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 16]
170/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 Fires release carbon dioxide into the atmosphere.
(a) (i) State one other natural process that releases carbon dioxide into the atmosphere.
...........................................................................................................................................
human respiration
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Carbon dioxide is a greenhouse gas.
State the name of one other greenhouse gas.

methane
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Data scientists used satellite images to analyse the occurrence of fires globally, during a
14-year period. They tracked all fires that were larger than 0.21 km2 and therefore visible from
space.
Table 5.1 summarises some of their data, categorising the fires by location. The locations
include natural ecosystems and land that is managed by people. The expansion rate is the
speed at which each fire becomes larger.
Table 5.1
estimated average
estimated average
estimated total expansion rate
location of fire duration of fires
number of fires of fires
/ days
/ km2 per day
natural boreal forest 197 124 0.6 5.4
natural temperate forest 178 909 0.4 4.1

natural savannah
9 809 719 0.7 4.6
(grassland with few trees)
managed land being
909 826 0.3 3.8
deforested
managed agricultural land 1 631 918 0.3 3.4
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/O/N/22
171/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(i) Using the information in Table 5.1, compare the data for the two managed locations with
the data for the three natural locations.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Describe how the data in Table 5.1 could be used to estimate the total area that was
burnt during the 14-year period, for each location.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Burning large areas of forest is a cause of habitat destruction.
Describe the possible consequences of habitat destruction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]
172/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows part of the human gas exchange system.
B
H
F
E
D C
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/O/N/22
173/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(i) Table 6.1 shows the names of some parts of the human gas exchange system, their
functions and the letters in Fig. 6.1 that identify the parts.
Complete Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
function name of the structure letter in Fig. 6.1
hairs in the nose A
prevents collapse of the airway
contracts to decrease the pressure in the thorax F
diaphragm
protects the lungs from mechanical damage
contains cilia to move mucus out of the airway
site of gas exchange alveoli
[7]
(ii) Describe and explain how the alveoli are adapted for gas exchange.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
174/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(b) (i) Explain the differences in composition between inspired and expired air.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Physical activity changes the concentration of carbon dioxide in the body.
State where this change is detected and how the body responds to the change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State the name of a solution that can be used to test for the presence of carbon dioxide
gas.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2022 0610/41/O/N/22
175/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 9 7 2 5 2 6 0 0 1 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (RW/SW) 303222/4
176/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 Phytoplankton consist of many species of single‑celled and many‑celled algae.
(a) Algae are classified in the Protoctist kingdom. All algae contain one or more chloroplasts.
State the name of another kingdom that contains organisms which have chloroplasts.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
A student investigated the species composition of the phytoplankton in a lake.
Fig. 1.1 shows some of the phytoplankton collected by the student.
Fig. 1.1
(b) The actual length of alga X is 0.19 mm.
Convert the actual length of alga X to micrometres.
..................................................... μm [1]
177/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) The student made careful drawings of seven types of alga found in the samples of lake water.
The drawings are shown in Fig. 1.2.
A B
C D
E F
not to scale
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/O/N/22
178/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
Use the key to identify each of the species A to G. Write the letter of each species in the
correct box beside the key.
1 alga has four spine‑like go to 2

extensions
alga does not have four go to 3
spine‑like extensions
2 alga has spine‑like extensions Scenedesmus communis
that are all the same length
alga has spine‑like extensions Ceratium hirundinella
that are different lengths
3 alga has a round shape Micrasterias radiosa
alga does not have a round go to 4

shape
4 alga narrows towards the ends go to 5
alga does not narrow towards go to 6

the ends
5 algal cell is semi‑circular in Closterium dianae
shape
algal cell is not semi‑circular in Navicula radiosa
shape
6 alga is branched Chaetophora incrassata
alga is not branched Zygnema sp.
[5]
(d) Phytoplankton are photosynthetic organisms.
Describe the importance of phytoplankton in the food web of lake ecosystems.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
179/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 Fig. 2.1 is a diagram of the human alimentary canal and associated organs.
7
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.1
(a) Table 2.1 shows enzymes, the organs that secrete these enzymes, their substrates and
products.
Complete Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
number
organ that secretes identifying
enzyme substrate product or products
the enzyme the organ
on Fig. 2.1
amylase 1
3 protein
lipase 4
maltase
[4]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/O/N/22
180/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(b) Explain the role of hydrochloric acid in the alimentary canal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) State a function of the region of the alimentary canal labelled 6 in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Describe how food eaten by humans is reduced to smaller pieces and explain how this makes
chemical digestion more efficient.
You may refer to Fig. 2.1 in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 14]
181/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Aphids are insects that feed on phloem sap by inserting their mouthparts into phloem tissue.
Fig. 3.1 shows an aphid feeding on phloem tissue in a leaf.
mouthparts
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State two features visible in Fig. 3.1 that identify this animal as an insect.
it has 3 pairs of legs
1 ........................................................................................................................................
it has pair of antenne 3 segmenrts
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Aphids can transmit viral pathogens when they feed on a plant.
Suggest how a severe infestation of aphids on crop plants can be avoided.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The aphid shown in Fig. 3.1 is feeding on phloem tissue in a leaf.
State the names of two tissues in the leaf that the mouthparts of the aphid pass through
to reach the phloem.
mesophyll
1 ........................................................................................................................................
plaside
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/O/N/22
182/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(b) Aphids have been used to investigate the translocation of sucrose in phloem tissue. While
they are feeding on phloem sap aphids excrete a sucrose‑rich fluid known as honeydew.
In an investigation, two groups of four aphids were placed at intervals along the stem of a
young willow plant, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
damp cotton
group A group B wool
glass chamber filled with Petri dishes for collecting honeydew Petri dish
carbon dioxide gas with water
containing 14C
Fig. 3.2
The leaves were enclosed in an airtight glass chamber. A special form of carbon dioxide gas
that contained radioactive carbon‑14 (14C) was supplied to the leaves for a short period of
time.
Samples of honeydew were collected at intervals from the groups of aphids. The time taken
for sucrose containing 14C to travel the distance between group A and group B was recorded.
The investigation was repeated twice using a fresh stem and different groups of aphids for
each trial. The results are shown in Table 3.1.
(i) Complete Table 3.1 by calculating the rate of movement of 14C in trial 3.
Table 3.1
time taken for 14C

distance between
to travel between rate of movement of
trial group A and group B 14C / mm per hour
group A and group B
on the stem / mm
/ minutes
1 650 120 325
2 340 75 272
3 630 150
[1]
183/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(ii) Outline how 14C in carbon dioxide gas becomes incorporated into the sucrose molecules
that are translocated in the phloem.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Sucrose travels from the stem to other parts of the plant known as sinks, where it is used.
(i) State two parts of a plant that are sinks for sucrose.
DNA is made up of molecules called nucleotides. Each nucleotide contains
1 ........................................................................................................................................
a phosphate group, a sugar group and a nitrogen base. The four types of
nitrogen bases are adenine (A), thymine (T), guanine (G) and cytosine (C).
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Sucrose is used in the cells of the sinks in a plant.
Describe the uses of sucrose by sinks.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/O/N/22
184/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is a flow chart showing some of the processes that occur in a biofuels power plant.
the giant reed plant,

crop waste forestry waste Arundo donax,
is grown for biomass
pretreatment
of biomass
complex carbohydrates
released from biomass
breakdown by enzymes
release of sugars, including glucose
fermentation by yeast
ethanol
biofuel
Fig. 4.1
(i) The fermentation stage shown in Fig. 4.1 requires yeast.
Complete the balanced chemical equation to show how ethanol is produced by yeast
respiration.
....................................... ....................................... + .......................................

[2]
(ii) Using the information in Fig. 4.1, suggest the environmental advantages of using ethanol
as a fuel.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
185/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(iii) Farmers grow giant reed plants as monocultures.
Describe the disadvantages of growing giant reed plants to provide biomass for the
production of biofuels.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) One problem with using biomass in the process shown in Fig. 4.1 is that the breakdown stage
produces a sugar called xylose and ethanoic acid. Yeast cannot use xylose, and ethanoic
acid is toxic to yeast.
Scientists genetically engineered a type of yeast that can use xylose and ethanoic acid.
Fig. 4.2 shows the results of one of the trial experiments done by the scientists using their
new genetically engineered yeast.
Key:
concentration of xylose
concentration of ethanoic acid
concentration of ethanol
100 2.5
80 2.0
60 1.5
concentration of concentration
xylose or ethanol of ethanoic acid
/ g per dm3 / g per dm3
40 1.0
20 0.5
0 0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
time / hours
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/O/N/22
186/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(i) Describe the results shown in Fig. 4.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The experiment was done at 30 °C.
The scientists repeated the experiment at 20 °C.
Predict the results that you would expect for the concentration of ethanol.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
187/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
5 Fig. 5.1 shows Mackinlay’s cuckoo‑dove, Macropygia mackinlayi, which is found on most of the
islands in the south‑west of the Pacific Ocean.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Karkar Island is one island where Mackinlay’s cuckoo‑dove is found. This species is part of
many communities that are adapted to the different habitats on the island.
(i) Define the term community.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the passage with the most appropriate word or phrase.
Adaptation is sometimes defined as the process resulting from .....................................
..................................... , by which populations become more suited to their
..................................... over many generations.

[2]
188/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(b) The highest point on Karkar Island is 1800 m above sea level.
In 1969, a researcher surveyed the bird species on Karkar Island. He recorded the vertical
distribution of the birds between sea level and 1600 m.
In 2013, other researchers repeated the survey.
Fig. 5.2 shows the ranges of four species, as recorded in the two surveys. The vertical lines
represent the range of heights where the birds were seen on the island.
1800
1600 Key:
1400 1969 2013
height 1200
above sea
1000
level / m
800
600
400
200
sea level 0
A B C D
Meyer’s Mackinlay’s island thrush island leaf
goshawk cuckoo-dove warbler
bird species
Fig. 5.2
(i) Compare the range in 1969 with the range in 2013 for each of the bird species shown in
Fig. 5.2.
A ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
D ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/O/N/22
189/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(ii) Using the information in Fig. 5.2, suggest reasons for the change in the range of the
island thrush (C) on Karkar Island.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Small oceanic islands are often inhabited by species of birds that are found nowhere else.
Many of these species have decreasing populations and are often endangered.
Explain the risks to these species of birds that have decreasing populations.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 13]
190/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows diagrams of the circulatory systems of a fish and a mammal.
The arrows show the direction of blood flow through the circulatory systems.
P
fish
gills
liver and muscle
intestine tissue
R
Q
mammal head and arms
lungs
X S
V
liver
alimentary
canal
kidneys
T
lower body
and legs
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the names of the structures labelled Q, T, W and X.
Q .......................................................................................................................................
T ........................................................................................................................................
W .......................................................................................................................................
X ........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/O/N/22
191/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(ii) State the name of structure V on Fig. 6.1 and describe its function.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Fig. 6.1 shows that fish and mammals have different types of circulation.
State why the fish circulation is called a single circulation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Explain the advantages of the double circulation of the mammal.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The blood vessels that supply the heart muscle can become blocked.
(i) State the name of the blood vessels that supply the heart muscle.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one way in which blockages in these blood vessels can be treated.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
192/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(c) Substances move between blood and tissues at various sites in the circulatory system of
mammals.
(i) Oxygen is absorbed into the blood as it passes through the lungs.
State the structures in the lungs where oxygen passes into the blood from the air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the site of filtration of blood in the kidneys.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the process in which products of digestion move into cells and are
used to become part of the cells.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State the name of the process in which excess amino acids are broken down in liver
cells to produce ammonia.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) State the name of the organ that releases oestrogen into the blood.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2022 0610/42/O/N/22
193/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 9 1 0 9 2 7 0 9 4 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (PQ/CGW) 302493/6
194/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram showing parts of two organ systems that are active when a person
sneezes.
O
L
view of part of the gas exchange system view of part of the nervous system
not to scale
Fig. 1.1
(i) Sneezing is an automatic action that occurs in response to a stimulus in the nose.
State the name of this type of automatic action.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
195/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(ii) Table 1.1 shows the names and functions of some of the parts of the human body that
are involved when a person sneezes, and the letters in Fig. 1.1 that identify these parts.
Complete Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
function name of structure letter in Fig. 1.1
cell that transmits an impulse from the

receptor to the central nervous system
diaphragm
contains cilia to move mucus out of the airway
[5]
196/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(b) Fig. 1.2 is a diagram of a cell from the human nervous system.
Fig. 1.2
(i) On Fig. 1.2, label two visible cell structures. [2]
(ii) Draw an X on the cell in Fig. 1.2 to show where a receptor molecule for a neurotransmitter
would be found. [1]
(iii) Explain how the cell in Fig. 1.2 is adapted for transmitting impulses.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe how nervous communication differs from hormonal communication.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
197/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 (a) Digestive enzymes are secreted into the alimentary canal.
(i) As well as enzymes, other substances that are important for digestion are also secreted
into the alimentary canal.
State the names of two of these other substances.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Table 2.1 summarises some facts about the enzymes that are secreted into the alimentary
canal.
Complete Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
products of
organ where the organ when the
name of the enzyme digestion involving this
enzyme is secreted enzyme acts
enzyme
salivary glands
pepsin
pancreas fatty acids and glycerol
epithelial lining of the

small intestine
small intestine
[4]
198/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) The activity of the enzyme pepsin was measured at different temperatures.
3000
2500
2000
enzyme activity
1500
/ U per mg protein
1000
500
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
temperature / °C
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
199/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
Describe and explain the effect of temperature on the activity of pepsin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
(c) Lactase is another digestive enzyme, which is produced by human babies.
(i) Explain why lactase is important for the nutrition of young babies.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Most people stop producing lactase when they become adults. If they drink milk, this
may give them diarrhoea.
Describe the symptoms of diarrhoea.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
200/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(iii) Cholera can also cause diarrhoea.
Explain how the cholera bacterium causes diarrhoea.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
201/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the estimated growth of the global human population between the 1860s and
2010s.
It also shows the estimated number of people that were affected by famines between these dates.
22
20
18
16 8
14 7
estimated
number of 12 6
people affected
by famines 10 5
/ million estimated
global human
8 4 population
/ billion
6 3
4 2
2 1
0 0
18 0s
18 0s
18 0s
19 0s
19 0s
19 0s
19 0s
19 0s
19 0s
19 0s
19 0s
19 0s
19 0s
20 0s
20 0s
s
10
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
18
time / decade
1 billion = 1 000 000 000
Key:
estimated number of people affected by famines
estimated global human population
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State the final size of the estimated global human population shown in the 2010s in
Fig. 3.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
202/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(ii) Using the information in Fig. 3.1, calculate the percentage of the estimated global human
population that was affected by famine during the 1860s.
Give your answer to one significant figure.
............................................................ %
[2]
(b) An increase in the size of the human population can cause famine.
(i) Describe other factors that could have caused famines since the 1970s.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Chemical fertilisers have helped farmers to increase food production.
Discuss the negative impact on the natural environment of using chemicals, other than
fertilisers, in modern farming methods.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
203/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(iii) Crops are often grown as monocultures.
State what is meant by a monoculture.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Scientists are developing crop plants that can produce antigens so that people gain
immunity to different diseases such as hepatitis B.
State the process which can be used to develop crop plants that can produce proteins
from other species.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
204/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a dandelion plant, Taraxacum officinale, in a field. The flower stalk is called a
scape.
scape
Fig. 4.1
(i) The scape of a dandelion responds to sunlight by growing upwards.
State the name of this growth response.

sensitivity
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The scapes of dandelions keep the plant upright without the need for structures such as
bones.
Explain how cells in plant scapes and stems keep plants upright.
...........................................................................................................................................
support from stem
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
attraction from sun
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
205/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(b) Fig. 4.2 is part of a cross-section through the scape of a dandelion.
Fig. 4.2
Draw a line and add a label on Fig. 4.2 to identify one area of xylem tissue. [1]
(c) Describe the function of phloem tissue.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
206/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(d) A dandelion scape was cut into long strips for an osmosis investigation.
Immediately after the scape was cut, the pieces of scape bent outwards, as shown in Fig. 4.3.
scape cut
into long strips
inner part of scape

that can absorb or lose water
outer part of scape that

cannot absorb or lose water
Fig. 4.3
Key:
A B inner sur
outer sur
C D
not to sca
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
207/988
that can absorb or lose water
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
outer part of scape that
cannot absorb
Strips or lose water
of dandelion scape were placed in four dishes, A, B, C and D, for 30 minutes.
Each dish contained a different concentration of salt solution.
Fig. 4.4 shows the appearance of the four strips of scape after 30 minutes.
Key:
A B inner surface of scape
outer surface of scape
C D
not to scale
Fig. 4.4
Using the information in Fig. 4.3 and Fig. 4.4, deduce and explain which strip of scape was in
the most concentrated salt solution.
strip of scape .............................................................................................................................
explanation ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]
208/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
5 (a) Researchers investigated water pollution in the centre of a lake for 11 days.
Fig. 5.1 shows researchers collecting samples of aquatic organisms from the lake with a net
which was placed at a specified water depth.
Fig. 5.1
Each day, the researchers collected 5 dm3 of water from the lake. Fish and other large
organisms were released back into the lake. The researchers extracted the chlorophyll from
all the microorganisms that were collected in the sample of lake water.
They determined the concentration of chlorophyll by measuring the mass of chlorophyll

extracted from each dm3 of lake water.
Fig. 5.2 shows a researcher lowering a Secchi disc on a long string into a lake from a boat.
A Secchi disc is a plastic disc which is divided into black and white sections. It is used to
measure the transparency of water in lakes, rivers and oceans.
The researcher recorded the maximum water depth at which the Secchi disc was still visible.
Secchi disc
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
209/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
The results of the investigation are shown in Fig. 5.3.
6 1.0
5 1.5
4 2.0
maximum water
concentration depth at which
of chlorophyll 3 2.5
the Secchi disc
/ mg per dm3 is visible / m
2 3.0
1 3.5
0 4.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
day
Key:
concentration of chlorophyll
maximum water depth at which the Secchi disc is visible
Fig. 5.3
(i) State the type of microorganism that contains chlorophyll.

Algae
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The researchers collected 5 dm3 of water from the lake each day. Using this information
and the information in Fig. 5.3, calculate the total mass of chlorophyll in the sample on
day 1.
Include the appropriate units with your answer.
................................................................
[2]
(iii) Suggest why the researchers determined the concentration of chlorophyll rather than
counting the number of microorganisms in the sample.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Using the information in Fig. 5.3, identify the day when the water was the most
transparent.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
210/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(v) Explain why the transparency of the water is important for organisms that contain
chlorophyll.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Heavy rainfall in nearby fields caused ions from fertilisers to wash into the lake on day 1
of the investigation.
State which ions can cause an increase in the number of organisms that contain
chlorophyll in the lake.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Many of the organisms that contain chlorophyll died on day 2 of the investigation.
Explain the consequences of the death of these organisms to the lake ecosystem.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
211/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
21
(c) The researchers monitored the water in the lake for pollution.
Outline how sewage should be treated so that the water it contains is safe to put into the lake.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 16]
212/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
22
6 Plants can be classified according to the position and shape of the structures in their flowers.
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows sections of flowers from six different plant species.
A B
C D
E F
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
213/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
23
(i) Use the key to identify each species. Write the letter of each species (A to F) in the
correct box in the key.
key
1(a) two petals visible go to 2
(b) three petals visible go to 4
2(a) one stigma per flower go to 3
(b) more than one stigma per flower Pyrus communis
3(a) stigma higher than anther Prunus domestica
(b) stigma at same level or lower than anther Prunus salicina
4(a) two ovules visible go to 5
(b) more than two ovules visible Punica granatum
5(a) anther smaller than carpel Prunus amygdalus
(b) anther larger than carpel Olea europaea

[4]
(ii) The large petals of the flowers shown in Fig. 6.1 indicate that they are pollinated by
insects.
List four other structural adaptations of insect-pollinated flowers.

colourful
1 ........................................................................................................................................
nice scent
2 ........................................................................................................................................
nectar
3 ........................................................................................................................................
4 ........................................................................................................................................
sticky stigma
[4]
(b) Flowering plants are distinguished from ferns because they all produce flowers.
State one other morphological feature that can be used to distinguish flowering plants from
ferns.
pollen
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The fruit of a pear tree, Pyrus communis, is often used to make juice.
State what protein biotechnologists will use to increase the volume of juice produced from
pear fruit.
pectin
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2022 0610/43/O/N/22
214/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 7 8 0 1 4 8 1 2 4 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (NF/AR) 202933/3
215/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram showing the position of some organs in the human body.
Fig. 1.1
Some of the organs shown in Fig. 1.1 are endocrine glands.
Table 1.1 shows the names of some of the endocrine glands, their identifying letters and the
hormones that they produce.
Complete Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
name of endocrine gland letter in Fig. 1.1 hormone produced
insulin
testes
[3]
216/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows two graphs representing:
• the relative blood concentrations of two hormones, A and B, released by the ovaries
during the menstrual cycle
• the thickness of the lining of the uterus.
relative blood
concentration A B
of the
hormones
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
days
thickness
of the lining
of the uterus
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
days
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
217/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(i) Describe the roles in the menstrual cycle of hormone A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State the day in Fig. 1.2 when ovulation is most likely to occur.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the days in Fig. 1.2 when the lining of the uterus is lost from the body.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
218/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) The female contraceptive pill is a chemical method of birth control, which is available in many
countries.
(i) Describe the social implications of the increased availability of the female contraceptive
pill.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The hormones in the female contraceptive pill can enter rivers.
Describe the negative impacts of female contraceptive hormones entering rivers and
contaminating drinking water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) State two barrier methods of contraception.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
219/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 is a diagram of a prokaryotic cell.
not to scale
Fig. 2.1
(i) State one visible feature in Fig. 2.1 that identifies this cell as a prokaryotic cell.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one cell structure that is present in the cells of all organisms.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Prokaryotes, Animals and Plants are three of the five kingdoms of organisms.
State the names of the two other kingdoms.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Fig. 2.2 shows part of the nitrogen cycle.
nitrogen in
atmosphere
proteins in proteins in
animals plants
animal waste B C
dead
organisms
A
nitrate ions
in soil
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
220/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(i) Describe processes A, B and C in Fig. 2.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [6]
(ii) State the name of the process that plants use to absorb nitrate ions.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
221/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
3 (a) The activity of the heart can be monitored using different methods.
Fig. 3.1 shows two ECG traces. One trace was recorded when the person was at rest and the
second trace was recorded during exercise.
The length of time taken for one heart beat is indicated in Fig. 3.1 on the ECG trace recorded
at rest.
one heart beat
at rest
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
time / s
during
exercise
0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
time / s
Fig. 3.1
(i) Estimate the resting heart rate of the person from their ECG trace in Fig. 3.1.
Space for working.
.................................... beats per minute

[2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
222/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(ii) Explain why the ECG trace recorded during exercise differs from the ECG trace recorded
at rest.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) Suggest one other way of monitoring the activity of the heart.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) If exercise is very intense an oxygen debt is formed.
(i) Complete the sentence.
An oxygen debt results in a build-up of ................................................ in the
................................................ during vigorous exercise.

[2]
(ii) Outline how the body removes an oxygen debt.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 13]
223/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 (a) A leaf can be described as an organ.
Define the term organ.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 is a photomicrograph of a cross section of part of a leaf.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Identify the tissue labelled A in Fig. 4.1.

upper epidermis
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify the structure labelled C in Fig. 4.1.

vesicular bundle
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
224/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(iii) Describe how the tissue labelled B is adapted to maximise photosynthesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
it has adapted to have more chlorophyll and it has larger surface are ti get
...........................................................................................................................................
as much sunlight as possible
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) (i) State two substances that are transported only in the phloem.
animo acid and surcose
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why some parts of a plant can act as both a source and a sink.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
225/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(d) The effect of carbon dioxide concentration on the rate of oxygen production in an aquatic
plant was measured.
• A lamp was used to keep the light intensity constant.

• The oxygen gas released by the plant was collected in a gas syringe.
• The plant was placed in water that was kept constant at 20 °C.
(i) The rate of oxygen production was assumed to be the same as the rate of photosynthesis.
Suggest why the rate of oxygen production was not the same as the rate of
photosynthesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0.30
0.25
rate of
oxygen 0.20
production
/ cm3 per m2
per s
0.15
0.10
0.05
0.00
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
concentration of carbon dioxide / μmol per dm3
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
226/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(ii) Explain the results shown in Fig. 4.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) The investigation was repeated with the same type of aquatic plant at 10 °C.
Draw a line on Fig. 4.2 to predict the results at 10 °C. [2]
[Total: 16]
227/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 (a) Measles is a transmissible disease.
The percentage of the population that were vaccinated against measles in a country was
determined.
The number of confirmed cases of measles in the country was also recorded.
Fig. 5.1 shows the data that were collected between 1975 and 2010.
160 000
100 140 000
90 120 000
80 100 000
number of
percentage
cases of
of the
measles
population 70 80 000
vaccinated
against
measles
60 60 000
50 40 000
40 20 000
30 0
1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010
year
Key:
percentage of population vaccinated
number of cases of measles
Fig 5.1
(i) Calculate the percentage change in the number of cases of measles between 1980 and
1990.
Space for working.
.............................................................%
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
228/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(ii) Describe the data shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) Explain how vaccination protects people against a transmissible disease such as
measles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) The human body has several defences against pathogens.
(i) State two of the body’s chemical barriers to pathogens.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
229/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(ii) Describe the process of blood clotting.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
230/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a food web.
hawks
snakes
rabbits grasshoppers mice
grass corn
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the number of trophic levels in the food web in Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of one organism that feeds at both the third and fourth trophic levels
from Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the type of energy that is transferred between trophic levels.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The total biomass of the snakes is much less than the total biomass of the mice in the food
web shown in Fig. 6.1.
Explain why the total biomass of the snakes is less than the total biomass of the mice.
Use the term energy in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
231/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(c) Food shortages that result in famine can be caused by many factors.
Describe how drought can contribute to famine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/F/M/21
232/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 7 5 4 4 5 0 6 9 8 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/CB) 202934/5
233/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Baker’s yeast, Saccharomyces cerevisiae, is a single-celled organism that is classified in the
kingdom Fungi.
Fig. 1.1 is a drawing of a section through a yeast cell.
G B
F
C
1 μm
Fig. 1.1
(i) State one other kingdom that contains organisms that all have structure A.
plant cell
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Table 1.1 shows some cell functions.
Complete Table 1.1 by naming the cell structure responsible for each cell function and
give the letter that identifies each cell structure in Fig. 1.1.
Table 1.1
cell function cell structure letter from Fig. 1.1
storage of genes G nucleas
aerobic respiration E mitocondria

amino acids are assembled to
F
make protein ribosme
[3]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
234/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) A student made a drawing of one Escherichia coli bacterium. Fig. 1.2 shows the student’s
drawing.
Fig. 1.2
The actual length of the bacterial cell is 2 μm.
(i) Convert the actual length of the cell to millimetres.
................................................... mm [1]
(ii) State the other information that the student needs in order to calculate the magnification
of the drawing in Fig. 1.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe the similarities and differences between the structure of the yeast cell and the
structure of the bacterial cell.
Use the information in Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2 in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
bacterial cell has a capsule but ryeast cell doesnt
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
they both have celll wall
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
235/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(d) Some bacteria are involved in the nitrogen cycle.
nitrogen (N2)
1
3 3
ammonium ions nitrite ions nitrate ions

(NH4+) (NO2–) (NO3–)
amino acids
2
proteins
Fig. 1.3
State the processes that are represented by 1, 2 and 3 on Fig. 1.3.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
236/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 Large quantities of plastic waste are polluting the oceans.
(a) A survey published in March 2018 showed the increase in plastic waste in the Pacific Ocean.
One area of the Pacific Ocean is known as the Great Pacific Garbage Patch (GPGP).
Data were collected from areas inside and outside the GPGP between 1965 and 2015 to
estimate the quantity of plastic waste.
1.4
1.2
1.0
estimated
quantity of
0.8
plastic waste
/ kg per km2
of ocean 0.6
surface
0.4
0.2
0.0
1965 – 1974 1975 – 1984 1985 – 1994 1995 – 2004 2005 – 2014 2015
years
key:
inside GPGP
outside GPGP
Fig. 2.1
Describe the results of the survey shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
237/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) The green turtle, Chelonia mydas, is a species of marine animal that is harmed by plastic
waste.
Fig. 2.2 shows a green turtle swimming past a plastic bag in the Pacific Ocean.
Fig. 2.2
(i) Turtles are classified as reptiles.
State one feature shown by all reptiles that is not found in amphibians.
scales on skin
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Outline the dangers of non-biodegradable plastic waste to marine animals, such as
green turtles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
238/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(iii) Suggest ways to reduce the quantity of plastic waste.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
239/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Bacteria are used in many biotechnological processes.
(a) Explain why bacteria are useful in biotechnology.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Insulin is one of many human proteins that are made by genetically engineered bacteria.
Some people cannot produce insulin because their immune system has destroyed the cells
that make insulin.
(i) State the organ that contains the cells that have been destroyed.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the disease caused by the destruction of these cells.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the function of insulin in the body.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Genetically engineered bacteria that are used to make insulin were grown in a fermenter for
five days.
Samples were taken from the fermenter every six hours and the number of bacteria in 1.0 mm3
of the nutrient solution were counted.
Changes in the numbers of living bacteria in the samples taken from the fermenter are shown
in Fig. 3.1.
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
240/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
1 S
Q R
.................................
.................................
.................................
P
.................................
2 ..........................................................................
Fig. 3.1
(i) Complete Fig. 3.1 by adding labels for the axes at 1 and 2 . [1]
(ii) State the names of the stages of population growth of the bacteria labelled P to S.
P ........................................................................................................................................
Q .......................................................................................................................................
R ........................................................................................................................................
S ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Explain, with reference to Fig. 3.1, why the bacteria did not grow in the fermenter for
longer than five days.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
241/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(d) Mineral salts are important in the human diet. One of the most important is iron.
Explain:
• the importance of iron in the human diet
• the effects of an iron deficiency.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Fig. 3.2 shows a field of cassava, Manihot esculenta, which is a crop plant grown in parts of
Africa and Asia.
Fig. 3.2
The plants store starch in their roots, which form a large part of the diet for many people.
Cassava does not provide many vitamins or mineral ions.
Genetic engineers have modified cassava to increase its iron content. They have done this
by incorporating a gene for a membrane protein from the plant Arabidopsis thaliana.
(i) State the name of the enzyme that is used to cut out the gene from the DNA of
A. thaliana.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
242/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(ii) Describe how the gene from A. thaliana and the DNA from cassava form recombinant
DNA.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Scientists who develop genetically engineered varieties of crop plants often breed them
for several generations before releasing them for farmers to use.
Suggest why the scientists do this.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 20]
243/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 Two identical potted plants were used to investigate plant responses.
Plant A was placed on a clinostat that continually rotated. Plant B was not rotated.
Both plants were then placed on their sides and kept in the dark.
Fig. 4.1 shows the two plants at the start of the experiment and after seven days.
at the start
box to exclude light
after seven days
plant A plant B
Fig. 4.1
(a) State the name of the response shown by the shoot of plant B.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain the reason for constantly rotating plant A.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) (i) State the name of the plant hormone that causes the response of the shoot of plant B.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
244/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Explain how the plant hormone causes the response of plant B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) Seeds germinate in the soil. The seedlings that grow from seeds show the same response as
shown by plant B in Fig. 4.1.
Explain the advantages of this response to the survival of seedlings and mature plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
245/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the female reproductive system.
Fig. 5.1
Label Fig. 5.1 using the letters listed to show the position of the organs that are identified by
their functions.
The first one (P) has been completed for you.
P site of secretion of mucus
Q site of fertilisation
R site of implantation
S site of oestrogen secretion
T site where sperm are deposited during sexual intercourse

[4]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a section through an egg cell at the time of ovulation.
jelly coat cytoplasm with stores

of protein and fat
nucleus
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
246/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(i) Explain why the egg cell contains stores of protein and fat.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Describe the function of the jelly coat.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fertilisation results in the formation of a zygote.
Describe how an embryo is formed from a zygote.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 13]
247/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 (a) Antibodies are proteins that are produced by lymphocytes. Antitoxins are antibodies which
neutralise the toxins released by some bacteria.
The transmissible disease diphtheria is caused by a bacterium that releases a toxin that can
cause serious damage to the body.
A person is suspected of having caught diphtheria.
At a clinic, the person is given an injection of antitoxin antibodies that provide protection
against the diphtheria toxin. She is also given an injection of the vaccine for diphtheria.
A few weeks later she is given a second injection of the diphtheria vaccine.
Fig. 6.1 shows the changes in concentration of the antitoxin antibodies and the antibodies
produced in response to the vaccine.
injection of antitoxin antibodies
key:
concentration
antitoxin antibodies
of antibodies
in the blood second antibodies produced in
injection of response to vaccination
vaccine
first injection
of vaccine
time
Fig. 6.1
(i) Explain the advantage of giving the person an injection of antitoxin antibodies.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
248/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(ii) Explain how the two injections of the vaccine result in better protection against diphtheria
than the injection of antitoxin antibodies.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Explain how antibodies protect the body against pathogens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Antibodies can travel through the body in the lymphatic system.
State two functions of the lymphatic system other than defence against disease.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/M/J/21
249/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 2 6 0 5 8 1 3 5 8 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (KN/FC) 202969/5
250/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Complete the sentence about the nervous system.
The brain and spinal cord form the ............................................... nervous system and the
nerves coming into and out of the spinal cord are part of the ...............................................
nervous system. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows part of a human eye and three neurones that conduct electrical impulses
between the eye and the brain. These neurones are involved in the pupil reflex.
J
A B
H
C
not to scale
Fig. 1.1
(i) State the type of neurone identified as A in Fig. 1.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
251/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(ii) Table 1.1 shows the names of some parts of the eye, their functions and the letters in
Fig. 1.1 that identify the parts of the eye.
Complete Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
part of the eye function letter in Fig. 1.1
suspensory ligament G
contracts in response to a bright light
cornea
contains a high density of cones for colour

vision
[4]
(c) (i) The eye can adjust how light is refracted through it in order to focus on a near object.
State one process that uses energy when focusing on a near object.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Mitochondria require oxygen to release energy. Oxygen is transported to cells in the eye
by red blood cells.
State the name of the molecule in red blood cells that carries oxygen.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain how oxygen in the capillaries reaches the cells in the eye.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
252/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(d) Eyelashes and eyelids are mechanical barriers that help to prevent particles and pathogens
entering the eye.
(i) Give two other mechanical barriers that defend the body against pathogens.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the name of the white blood cells that digest pathogens.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Conjunctivitis can be caused by pathogens and affects the tissues lining the eyelids and
covering the sclera. People with conjunctivitis that is caused by a pathogen can develop
active immunity.
Explain why the shape of specific parts of a pathogen is important in the development of
active immunity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) Most insects and some crustaceans have compound eyes.
State the name of the group that contains insects and crustaceans.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
253/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 The classification of giant pandas, Ailuropoda melanoleuca, is debated by many scientists.
Fig. 2.1 shows a giant panda eating bamboo plants.
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2 shows a red panda, Ailurus fulgens, and a polar bear, Ursus maritimus.
red panda eating bamboo plants polar bear eating fish

Fig. 2.2
(a) State one dietary component that is more likely to be found in bamboo plants than in fish.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) State two features, visible in Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2, that identify the three animals as all
belonging to the same vertebrate group.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
254/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(ii) DNA can also be used to classify species.
Molecular biologists compared the DNA base sequences of eight species from the same
vertebrate group. They used the differences to draw a classification diagram.
Fig. 2.3 shows the classification diagram for these eight species. The shorter the
horizontal distance from two species to the branching point that they share, the more
similar their DNA sequences are and the more closely the two species are related.
The scale on Fig. 2.3 shows the time at which the molecular biologists estimate that
each branching point occurred.
red panda
ferret
giant panda
polar bear
wolf
tiger
human
mouse
100 80 60 40 20 0
million years ago
Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
255/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
Morphology can also be used to classify species. Some scientists think that morphology
suggests that the giant panda is more closely related to the red panda than it is to the
polar bear.
Discuss the evidence for and against the giant panda being more closely related to
the red panda than it is to the polar bear. Use the information in Fig. 2.1, Fig. 2.2 and
Fig. 2.3 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(iii) State one other type of evidence that is used to classify species.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
256/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows some of the events that occur in the menstrual cycle.
A follicle is fully developed
B gamete is released into the oviduct
C lining of the uterus is removed from the body
D lining of the uterus reaches a maximum thickness
E lining of the uterus gets thicker
Fig. 3.1
(i) Put the events shown in Fig. 3.1 into the correct sequence.
One has been done for you.
B
[1]
(ii) State the name of the hormone that stimulates event A to occur.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Event C means that menstruating females lose blood regularly.
Two females of the same age have different dietary needs because one has started
menstruating and the other has not started menstruating.
Suggest why the dietary needs of the two females are different.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
257/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(b) During pregnancy menstruation does not occur.
Fig. 3.2 shows some of the organs of a pregnant woman, viewed from the side.
fetus
V
Q
U
T R
Fig. 3.2
Describe what happens between ovulation and the formation of a fetus.
Use the letters in Fig. 3.2 to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 10]
258/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
4 (a) Climate change is one reason why a plant species could become endangered.
(i) State other reasons why a plant species could become endangered.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Describe how human actions are causing climate change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
259/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(b) Seed banks are used to conserve endangered plant species.
Fig. 4.1 shows some of the steps involved in managing a seed bank.
seeds are collected from

many populations of
each species
seeds are checked using

X-rays
seeds are stored at low

temperatures in the
seed bank
a small sample of seeds

is germinated
Fig. 4.1
(i) Explain why seeds from one species are collected from many populations to store in a
seed bank.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
260/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(ii) Seeds are X-rayed before they are stored to check that they contain an embryo.
State one possible consequence of using ionising radiation on seeds.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Seeds stored at low temperatures have very low respiration rates.
Explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) One purpose of seed banks is to reintroduce plant species into their natural environment.
A survey was done to find out why some reintroduction programmes are not successful.
Fig. 4.2 shows the results of the survey.
40
35
30
percentage of 25
species that
were not 20
successfully
reintroduced 15
10
0
reason wrong changing seeds did seedlings too few wrong
unknown habitat habitat not too young individuals season
germinate
reasons why reintroductions failed
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
261/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(i) Some of the seeds in the reintroduction programmes did not germinate.
State the conditions that are necessary for seeds to germinate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Some reintroduction programmes failed because the seedlings were too young. Young
seedlings only have a few small roots.
Explain why it would be important to reintroduce plants with many large roots.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) The low number of individuals also caused some reintroduction programmes to fail.
State the name of the phase in a population growth curve where the number of individuals
is very low.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 21]
262/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 Fig. 5.1 shows some of the stages in the reproduction of the bacterium Escherichia coli.
loop of DNA
original bacterial cell
bacterial cell expands to a critical length

and a copy of DNA is synthesised
daughter cells are formed
daughter cells grow
Fig. 5.1
(a) Complete the sentences about the cells in Fig. 5.1.
The DNA is in the form of a double ............................................... . The DNA is copied so
that the number of loops of DNA after cell division is ............................................... in each
daughter cell. The daughter cells are genetically ............................................... to the original
cell.
[3]
(b) Students used a microscope and time-lapse photography to observe E. coli cells reproducing.
They used the series of photographs to identify which cells were dividing.
They measured the lengths of the dividing cells and put their data into two groups:
• cell lengths immediately before cell division
• cell lengths immediately after cell division.
Fig. 5.2 shows their results.
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
263/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
key: 100
immediately after division
90
immediately before division
80
70
60
number
of 50
cells
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
cell length / μm
Fig. 5.2
(i) Use the information in Fig. 5.2 to state the most frequent cell length of the E. coli cells
immediately after cell division.
Give your answer in millimetres.
......................................................... mm
[2]
(ii) Some students concluded that the cells must be at least 6 µm in length before cell
division can occur.
Describe the evidence against the students’ conclusion. Use the information in Fig. 5.2
to support your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
264/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(c) Bacteria are useful in genetic engineering because they contain plasmids.
(i) Describe how a plasmid is cut so that a new gene can be inserted into the plasmid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) List two reasons, other than the presence of plasmids, that make bacteria and
single-celled fungi useful to biotechnology industries.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
265/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 (a) Some students set up the apparatus shown in Fig. 6.1 to compare transpiration in two sets of
leaves.
Set A was kept in a transparent bag and set B was left in the open air.
All other conditions were kept constant.
The mass of the leaves in each set was measured at the start of the investigation and after
five hours.
string line paper clip
clamp stand
transparent bag
set A
set B
Fig. 6.1
(i) Predict the results for this investigation.
Explain the reason for your prediction.
prediction ...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
266/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(ii) Explain how transpiration occurred in the leaves shown in Fig. 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The students needed two additional pieces of apparatus to take measurements so that
they could calculate the rate of transpiration from their results.
State the two additional pieces of apparatus the students needed to take the
measurements.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the positions of the different tissues in part of a dicotyledonous leaf.
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
267/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
Identify the tissues described in Table 6.1 by:

• drawing label lines with the corresponding letter on Fig. 6.2 and
• stating the name of each tissue in Table 6.1.
The label, line and name of the tissue for letter P has been completed for you on Fig. 6.2 and
in Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
letter description name of the tissue
a protective transparent layer that allows light

P upper epidermis
to reach the inner tissues
Q conducts water from the stem
R contains many interconnected air spaces
S transports sucrose and amino acids
traps the most light energy to synthesise

T
carbohydrates
[4]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/M/J/21
268/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 6 0 5 4 1 7 5 1 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/SG) 203218/4
269/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) (i) The main component of milk is a liquid that is an important solvent in the body.
State the name of this solvent.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Table 1.1 shows some of the nutrients found in human milk, the elements that make up
the nutrients, the enzymes that digest them and the products of digestion.
Complete Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
nutrient elements enzyme products of digestion
protein
fat
lactose (milk galactose and glucose

C, H, O
sugar) (simple sugars)
[4]
(b) Milk also contains vitamins and mineral salts.
(i) Explain why vitamin D is important for the nutrition of children.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
270/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(ii) Explain why iron is important in the diet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Rubella and kwashiorkor are two diseases that affect children.
Rubella is a transmissible disease and kwashiorkor is a non-transmissible disease.
(i) Define the term transmissible disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why women should be vaccinated against rubella before they reach reproductive
age.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
271/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(iii) Outline the causes of kwashiorkor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 18]
2 Insulin is a protein made by cells in the pancreas.
Fig. 2.1 shows how insulin is made in a pancreatic cell.
DNA
amino acids
nucleus
amino acids assembled

to form insulin
A
B not to scale
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) State the name of molecule A in Fig. 2.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of structure B in Fig. 2.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
272/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(iii) Explain the role of molecule A in protein synthesis, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Insulin is secreted from cells in the pancreas when the concentration of glucose in the blood
increases.
Outline the role of insulin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) State the names of two substances, other than insulin, that are secreted by the pancreas.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
273/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 Scientists measured the rate of photosynthesis in the leaves of a sunflower plant, Helianthus
annuus.
The scientists used the apparatus shown in Fig. 3.1 to measure the rate of photosynthesis.
direction of air flow
air flow regulator chamber 1 chamber 2 chamber 3
temperature 20 °C
CO2 360 ppm
CO2 400 ppm timer

00:00
Fig. 3.1
(a) The apparatus in Fig. 3.1 maintains a constant temperature and a constant humidity.
(i) Explain why temperature has an effect on the rate of photosynthesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
274/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(ii) Explain why the rate of photosynthesis will decrease if the humidity in the apparatus
becomes very low.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The apparatus was left for 15 minutes.
Explain how the scientists would use the readings for the concentration of carbon dioxide
in chambers 1 and 3 to calculate the rate of photosynthesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
275/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) The scientists carried out another investigation using the same apparatus at different
temperatures.
They measured the rate of uptake of carbon dioxide in the light and then they measured the
rate of release of carbon dioxide in the dark.
160
140
CO2 uptake
120 in the light
rate of carbon 100

dioxide uptake
and release 80
/ μg per hour
per cm2 of leaf
60
CO2 release
40
in the dark
20
0
15 20 25 30 35 40
temperature / °C
Fig. 3.2
(i) Use the information in Fig. 3.2 to complete Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
temperature rate of uptake of carbon dioxide in rate of release of carbon dioxide in

/ °C the light / μg per hour per cm2 of leaf the dark / μg per hour per cm2 of leaf
20
35 90 45
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
276/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(ii) The scientists determined that photosynthesis in the leaves at 35 °C used carbon dioxide
at a rate of 135 μg per hour per cm2 of leaf. Fig. 3.2 shows that the rate of carbon dioxide
uptake at 35 °C was 90 μg per hour per cm2 of leaf.
Explain why the rate at which carbon dioxide is used in photosynthesis is greater than
the rate of carbon dioxide uptake.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why the results in Table 3.1 are expressed as ‘per cm2 of leaf’ rather than ‘per
leaf’.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
277/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(c) Some crops are grown in controlled environments. Glasshouses are an example of a
controlled environment. Fig. 3.3 shows a glasshouse where lettuces are growing.
Fig. 3.3
Discuss the advantages of growing crops in glasshouses.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 20]
278/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 There are three species of rhinoceros in Asia. Fig. 4.1 shows an Indian rhinoceros, Rhinoceros
unicornis, in a national park being observed by tourists who are riding on an elephant.
Fig. 4.1
The International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN) collects data on animal species and
places them into categories based on estimated numbers.
Table 4.1 summarises the conservation status of the three species of rhinoceros, as available in
2020.
Table 4.1
approximate approximate
species location number in number in IUCN category
the wild captivity
Indian rhinoceros national parks
Rhinoceros in south Nepal 3588 160 vulnerable
unicornis and north India
Javan rhinoceros one national
Rhinoceros park in Java, 72 0 critically endangered
sondaicus Indonesia
Sumatran national parks
rhinoceros in Sumatra
<80 7 critically endangered
Dicerorhinus and Borneo in
sumatrensis Indonesia
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
279/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(a) Outline the reasons why large mammals, such as some species of rhinoceros, are
endangered.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) In 2013, Cincinnati Zoo in the USA announced that they were hoping to breed together
rhinoceros that were brother and sister as part of their captive breeding programme.
(i) Discuss the problems that using such closely related animals might have for the
conservation of rhinoceros.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
280/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(ii) Captive breeding programmes often use artificial insemination.
Outline the process of artificial insemination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
281/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
5 (a) Table 5.1 shows four functions of the human gas exchange system.
Complete Table 5.1 by identifying the part of the human gas exchange system that carries out
each function.
Table 5.1
part of the human gas exchange

function
system
contracts to decrease air pressure in the

lungs
allows air to flow between the larynx and

the lungs
contracts to lower the ribs in forced

expiration
site of gas exchange
[4]
282/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(b) Scientists investigated the effect of increasing carbon dioxide concentration in the air on
the rate and depth of breathing. The people who took part in the investigation were healthy
volunteers.
The people breathed atmospheric air containing 0.04% carbon dioxide for five minutes.
They then breathed air containing 2% carbon dioxide for five minutes and then returned to
breathing atmospheric air for a further five minutes.
0.04% CO2 2% CO2 0.04% CO2
70
60
50
40
percentage 30
change in rate
and depth of
breathing 20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
–10
–20
time / minutes
key:
rate of breathing
depth of breathing
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
283/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
Describe the effects of changing the carbon dioxide concentration of the air on the rate and
depth of breathing, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Complete the sentences by writing the appropriate word or phrase in the spaces provided.
During physical activity the carbon dioxide concentration in the blood increases. The
reason for this is an increase in the rate of ............................................... that occurs in the
............................................... in muscle cells.
The increase in the concentration of carbon dioxide in the blood is detected by the
............................................... , which increases the rate and depth of breathing so that carbon
dioxide can be ............................................... from the body. This is important because carbon
dioxide is a ............................................... substance and can cause harm if it accumulates.

[5]
[Total: 13]
284/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 There are four blood groups in the ABO system in humans: A, B, AB and O.
The gene that determines blood group has three alleles: IA, IB and Io.
(a) Parents with the genotypes IAIo and IBIo are planning to have more children.
Complete the genetic diagram to determine the probability that the next child will have blood
group O.
parental blood groups A B
parental genotypes IAIo IBIo
Punnett square
phenotypes of
the children ...............................................................................................................................
probability that the child will have blood group O .....................................................................

[4]
(b) Explain why the ABO blood group system is an example of co-dominance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
285/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(c) Fig. 6.1 shows the percentages of the global population with the four different blood groups in
the ABO system.
45
40
35
30
percentage 25
of the global
population
20
15
10
0
A B AB O
blood group
Fig. 6.1
With reference to Fig. 6.1, explain why the ABO blood group system is an example of
discontinuous variation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/M/J/21
286/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 1 4 7 8 1 8 2 3 7 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/JG) 202999/5
287/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Fish, mammals and birds are all groups of vertebrates.
(i) State the names of the two other main groups of vertebrates.
................................................................... and .......................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete Table 1.1 to compare the features of fish, mammals and birds.
Table 1.1
feature fish mammals birds
organ involved in gas

gills lungs
exchange
circulatory system double
body covering fur
presence of external ears

no
(pinnae)
[3]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
288/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a micrograph of part of some fish gills.
magnification ×110
Fig. 1.1
Fish gills are adapted for gas exchange by diffusion.
(i) Define the term diffusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest one adaptation, visible in Fig. 1.1, that shows that fish gills are efficient structures
for gas exchange by diffusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
289/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) Some pollutants decrease the concentration of dissolved oxygen in rivers. This can result in
the death of fish.
(i) State one type of pollutant that can result in a decrease in the concentration of dissolved
oxygen in rivers.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Researchers investigated the effect of the concentration of dissolved oxygen in water on
gas diffusion distance in tissues. The thickness of fish gills was used to determine the
gas diffusion distance.
The researchers changed the concentration of dissolved oxygen by bubbling different

concentrations of oxygen into water. The temperature of the water was kept constant at
15 °C.
Their results are shown in Fig. 1.2.
3.5
3.0
2.5
gas diffusion 2.0

distance / μm
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
dissolved oxygen concentration / mg per dm3
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
290/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
Fig. 1.3 shows the relationship between the concentration of dissolved oxygen and water
temperature.
12
11
10
dissolved
oxygen
9
concentration
/ mg per dm3
8
6
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
temperature / °C
Fig. 1.3
Complete steps 1 to 3 to determine the effect on gas diffusion distance of increasing the
temperature of the water from 15 °C to 25 °C.
Step 1
Find the concentration of dissolved oxygen from Fig. 1.3 at:
15 °C: ................................. mg per dm3 25 °C: ................................. mg per dm3
Step 2
Use the values from step 1 to find the gas diffusion distances from Fig. 1.2:
................................. µm ................................. µm
Step 3
Calculate the difference in the values from step 2.
................................. µm
[3]
[Total: 11]
291/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 (a) Two tomato plants that produce red fruit were bred together.
This cross produced 71 offspring plants with red fruit and 26 offspring plants with yellow fruit.
Complete the genetic diagram to show this cross.
Select a suitable letter to represent the alleles and decide which allele will need a capital
letter and which allele will need a lower case letter.
letter representing the allele for red fruit ...................................................................................
letter representing the allele for yellow fruit ..............................................................................
parental phenotypes red fruit × red fruit
parental genotypes .................................. × ..................................
gametes , × ,
............. ............. ............. .............
offspring genotypes ........................................................................................................
expected phenotype ratio ...................... red fruit : ...................... yellow fruit
actual phenotype ratio 71 red fruit : 26 yellow fruit

[6]
(b) Researchers carried out some experiments on tomato plants that were homozygous for fruit
colour.
State how the researchers could be sure that the fruit came from homozygous plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
292/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(c) The researchers analysed two pigments, chlorophyll and lycopene, in homozygous red
tomato fruit and homozygous yellow tomato fruit. Chlorophyll is found in unripe tomato fruit.
(i) Describe the function of chlorophyll.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of one mineral required for the synthesis of chlorophyll.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The researchers analysed the concentration of the pigments in tomato fruits:
• before they were ready to eat (unripe)
• when they were ready to eat (ripe).
The results of the analysis are shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
chlorophyll concentration lycopene concentration

/ mg per g of tomato fruit / mg per g of tomato fruit
unripe red fruit 10.0 0.0
ripe red fruit 1.2 105.7
unripe yellow fruit 6.2 0.0
ripe yellow fruit 0.4 0.7
Use the information in Table 2.1 to compare the changes in pigments in red fruit and
yellow fruit as they ripen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
293/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(d) A gene is responsible for the production of lycopene in fruits. Geneticists have recently
produced genetically modified pink pineapples using the gene associated with the production
of lycopene.
(i) Genes are found at specific locations on an important biological molecule.
State the name of this biological molecule.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the disadvantages of genetically modifying crops.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
294/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
3 Some washing powders contain enzymes.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a box of biological washing powder containing enzymes.
Wonder washing
powder
Biological washing powder
removes stains made from oil, egg, juice,
grass and many more.
Directions:
• add 1–2 scoops to main wash
• works best at 30 °C but do not use above 50 °C
Ingredients:
• soap
• enzymes
Fig. 3.1
(i) Eggs contain protein.
Describe how the biological washing powder removes egg stains.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
295/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(ii) Explain why the manufacturer states that the washing powder works best at 30 °C and
should not be used above 50 °C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Scientists used enzymes and bile in the early development of biological washing powders.
Outline the roles of bile in the body.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
296/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Cholera is a transmissible disease.
(a) State the name of the type of pathogen that causes cholera.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A study was designed to test the effectiveness of a cholera vaccine in an area where
outbreaks of cholera occur frequently.
The doctors gave some people in this area the new vaccine.
(i) Suggest what the cholera vaccine must contain to be effective.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the people were not protected from cholera immediately after receiving the
vaccine.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The doctors ensured that the people who received the new vaccine had not had cholera
before.
Suggest why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
297/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(iv) There was an outbreak of cholera in the area two months after the new vaccine was
given.
The people who had symptoms of cholera were monitored in hospital for two days.
Some of the infected people had received the new vaccine and others had not received
the vaccine.
100
90
80 Key:
vaccinated
70
not vaccinated
60
percentage
of people in
hospital with 50
the symptom
40
30
20
10
0
pathogen present diarrhoea high body
in faeces temperature
factors monitored in hospital
Fig. 4.1
Using the information in Fig. 4.1, discuss how effective the vaccine was at preventing the
symptoms of cholera.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
298/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(c) (i) Explain how cholera causes diarrhoea.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Describe how diarrhoea is treated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 14]
299/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 The circulatory system is comprised of the heart, blood vessels and the blood.
(a) Explain how the structures of the heart ensure that blood flows in one direction.
Include the names of these structures in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a diagram of some blood vessels associated with the skin.
J
Key:
indicates the
direction of
blood flow
P K
N M
not to scale
Fig. 5.1
Table 5.1 shows the functions of some blood vessels.
Complete Table 5.1 by:

• naming the type of blood vessel
• stating the letter of the type of blood vessel from Fig. 5.1.
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
300/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
Table 5.1
function type of blood vessel letter on Fig. 5.1
regulates blood flow by constricting

and dilating
collects blood from a network of the

narrowest blood vessels
withstands the highest blood

pressure
allows the transfer of substances to

and from tissue fluid
transports blood towards the heart
redirects blood flow deeper under the

surface of the skin
[6]
(c) State the name of the blood vessels that deliver blood to the:
kidneys .....................................................................................................................................
heart muscle .............................................................................................................................

[2]
(d) Describe how blockages in the vessels that deliver blood to the heart muscle can be treated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 16]
301/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 Many crop plants are grown as monocultures.
Fig. 6.1 shows the destruction of a monoculture of maize as a result of drought.
Fig. 6.1
(a) Describe the negative impacts to an ecosystem of large-scale monocultures, such as the one
shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
302/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) The fruits of maize are produced on structures called cobs. Each cob has many fruits.
Fig. 6.2 shows how the maize cobs have changed over thousands of years as a result of
selective breeding.
fruit
length of
maize cob maize cob
time
Fig. 6.2
State two desirable features, visible in Fig. 6.2, that have been selected from the more
ancient varieties of maize.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
303/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(c) The process of selective breeding involves a series of steps, as shown in Fig. 6.3.
Step 1 select two plants with desirable features
Step 2 transfer pollen from the flower of one plant to a

flower on the second plant
Step 3 use bags to cover the flowers that are pollinated
Step 4 collect the seeds, germinate them and wait for

the plants to grow
Step 5 select the plants from step 4 that have the

desirable features
Step 6 continue step 2 to step 5 for many generations
Fig. 6.3
(i) Explain why the flowers are covered with bags in step 3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the seeds in step 4 need oxygen to germinate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
304/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(iii) Explain why some of the plants in step 5 may show features not visible in the parent
plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Suggest why selective breeding should continue for many generations (step 6).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(v) State how new features, which did not exist in ancient varieties of a crop plant, could
appear.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2021 0610/41/O/N/21
305/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 6 6 0 8 4 5 5 8 2 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (KN/CGW) 203280/4
306/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows several villi from the ileum, which is part of the small intestine.
(a) State the name of one other part of the small intestine.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
area enlarged
in Fig. 1.2
lacteal
goblet cells
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 shows the tip of a villus in more detail.
goblet cell
microvilli
epithelial cells
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
307/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) The epithelial cells of the villi absorb nutrients by diffusion and active transport.
(i) Describe how active transport differs from diffusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain the importance of the microvilli shown in Fig. 1.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Goblet cells provide protection for the epithelial cells that line the intestine.
(i) State the name of the protective substance produced by goblet cells.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why a protective substance is necessary in the intestines.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Fig. 1.1 shows a lacteal in the centre of each villus.
Describe the roles of lacteals.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
308/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(e) Complete Table 1.1 by identifying the level of organisation of each structure.
Choose your answers from the list. Each word or phrase may be used once, more than once
or not at all.
cell cell structure organ organ system organism tissue
Table 1.1
structure level of organisation
gall bladder
endoplasmic reticulum
intestinal epithelium
ileum
[4]
(f) Many fungi are decomposers that feed on dead plants. The fungi secrete enzymes to digest
large molecules.
Students made an extract from a species of fungus. The extract contained digestive enzymes.
The students carried out an investigation to find out if amylase and pectinase were present in
the fungal extract.
They made agar plates by filling Petri dishes with agar jelly containing either starch or pectin.
They cut four holes of the same size in the agar jelly in each Petri dish.
The holes in each Petri dish contained the same volume of:
A – 1% amylase solution
B – 1% pectinase solution
C – distilled water
D – fungal extract.
The Petri dishes were kept at 27 °C for four days. After this time a dye was poured into each
dish to stain the areas where starch and pectin remained.
Fig. 1.3 shows drawings of the stained agar in the Petri dishes. The clear zones indicate the
areas where no starch or pectin remained.
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
309/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
Petri dish containing starch Petri dish containing pectin

in agar jelly in agar jelly
A B A B
Key:
stained area
D clear zone
D C C
hole in agar jelly
Fig. 1.3
(i) State what conclusions can be made about the enzymes in the fungal extract and give
evidence from Fig. 1.3 to support your conclusions.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) The investigation was repeated but at 5 °C instead of at 27 °C.
Predict the effect of the lower temperature on the results.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 21]
310/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 (a) A scientist investigated sexual reproduction in flowering plants.
Fig. 2.1 shows the procedure for crossing two plants of the same species.
paint brush used

anthers are removed to pick up pollen
from flower 1 from flower 2
pollen transferred
stigma ready to to the stigma of
receive pollen flower 1
bag placed
around flower 1
and tied tightly
seeds develop in flower 1

after fertilisation
Fig. 2.1
The scientist collected the seeds and germinated them. The leaves and flowers of the offspring
plants showed phenotypic variation as they were not all identical to the parent plants.
The scientist then investigated the chromosomes of all the offspring plants and found that
they had exactly the same number of chromosomes as the parent plants.
(i) Define the term chromosome.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
311/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(ii) Suggest why the scientist placed a bag around flower 1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain how sexual reproduction results in the variation that the scientist discovered in
the offspring plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) The chromosome number of the offspring plants is the same as the chromosome number
of the parent plants in this investigation.
Explain how the chromosome number is maintained from one generation to the next.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
312/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) The plant Camellia japonica has flowers that can be white, red or a mixture of these two
colours. When red-flowered plants are crossed with white-flowered plants, all the offspring
plants have flowers with petals that are a mixture of red and white, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2
• The gene for petal colour in C. japonica is given the symbol P.

• The allele for white petals is given the symbol PW.
• The allele for red petals is given the symbol PR.
(i) Table 2.1 shows the phenotypes of three different pairs of parent plants.
Complete Table 2.1 by giving all the possible genotypes of the offspring plants that could
be produced by these parent plants.
Space for working.
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
313/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
Table 2.1
phenotype of female all the possible genotypes of offspring

phenotype of male parent
parent plants produced by this cross
red petals red petals
white petals red petals
petals that are both red petals that are both red
and white and white
[3]
(ii) State the type of inheritance that is shown by petal colour in C. japonica.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
314/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the changes in the concentrations of the hormones FSH and LH during a menstrual
cycle.
45 Key:
= LH
40
= FSH
35
30
concentration 25
of hormone
/ arbitrary units 20
15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
days in the menstrual cycle
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Suggest the target organ for FSH.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State how FSH reaches its target organ.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe the relationship shown by the two hormones in Fig. 3.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
315/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(b) Describe the roles of FSH and LH in the menstrual cycle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Describe the changes that occur in the lining of the uterus during one menstrual cycle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Oral contraceptives are a method of birth control taken by women.
Outline how the hormones in contraceptives act as a method of birth control.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 14]
316/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 Involuntary actions occur because nerve impulses travel along the components of reflex arcs.
An example of an involuntary action is the rapid movement of a hand after unexpectedly touching
a very hot object.
Fig. 4.1 shows the structures that are involved in the movement of the hand.
U X
V
hot object Y
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
317/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(a) Table 4.1 shows the functions of some of the structures shown in Fig. 4.1, the names of the
structures and the letter from Fig. 4.1 that identifies each structure.
Complete Table 4.1.

Table 4.1
function name letter on Fig. 4.1
conducts impulses to central nervous

system (CNS)
conducts impulses to an effector
conducts impulses only within the

CNS
receptor
[5]
318/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the structure of the synapse at W on Fig. 4.1.
Fig. 4.2
Describe how an impulse travels across the synapse shown in Fig. 4.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) State one example of a reflex action that occurs in the eye.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
319/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 (a) State two factors that affect the volume of urine produced in the human body.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Nitrogen is an important element for organisms.
In a livestock farm, waste from animals contains protein. This waste is often spread on
farmland as a fertiliser.
Describe how the nitrogen in protein is recycled in the soil into a form that plants can absorb
and use.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
320/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(c) Waste from livestock farms often pollutes water courses, such as streams and rivers, leading
to a reduction in biodiversity.
Explain how the pollution of water courses by animal waste leads to a reduction in biodiversity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 13]
321/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 Enzymes are catalysts.
(a) Define the term catalyst.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows diagrams of three enzymes and eight different substrates.
W
1
3
V
P
U Q
2 R
T S
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the letter of the substrate that will be broken down by enzyme 1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of enzyme structure, the reason for your choice in 6(b)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
322/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(c) Table 6.1 lists some enzymes and the reactions that they catalyse.
Complete Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
enzyme reaction
maltase breakdown of maltose to ...............................
............................... breakdown of proteins to amino acids
lipase breakdown of fats to ............................... and ...............................
............................... breakdown of lactose to simpler sugars
............................... insertion of a short length of DNA into a plasmid
restriction enzyme .......................................................................................................
[6]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021 0610/42/O/N/21
323/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 9 5 6 9 4 5 6 1 7 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK) 308227/5 R
324/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Enzymes are used in genetic engineering.
(a) Define the term enzyme.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The process of genetic engineering often starts with the steps shown in Fig. 1.1.
upper DNA strand
G A A T T C
step 1 lower DNA strand
step 2 enzyme 1
A A T T C
G
step 3
Fig. 1.1
(i) State the sequence of bases on the lower strand of the DNA molecule in step 1.
upper DNA strand G A A T T C
lower DNA strand
[1]
(ii) State the name of enzyme 1 in step 2 of Fig. 1.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
325/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(iii) Describe the effect of enzyme 1 on the DNA molecule in step 3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Explain how enzyme 1 in Fig. 1.1 is specific to the exact sequence of DNA bases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
326/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) Another enzyme, enzyme 2, is used later in the process of genetic engineering.
Fig. 1.2 is a diagram showing the action of enzyme 2.
plasmid DNA
strands
upper DNA strand

of the gene
lower DNA strand
step 6 of the gene
step 7 enzyme 2
step 8
Fig. 1.2
(i) Some organisms naturally contain DNA in the form of a plasmid.
State the name of the type of organism that naturally contains plasmids.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of enzyme 2 in step 7 of Fig. 1.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the molecule formed in step 8.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
327/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(d) Sketch a graph to describe how the activity of the enzymes used in genetic engineering would
change if the reaction occurred at a range of temperatures from very cold to very hot.
Label the axes with appropriate titles.
Do not use units or a numbered scale.
[3]
[Total: 14]
328/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 Fig. 2.1 is a photomicrograph of the end of a plant root.
length / mm
root tip 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2 shows the results of a study on the rate of uptake of nitrate ions at different points along
the root shown in Fig. 2.1.
30
25
20
rate of nitrate ion

uptake 15
2
/ pmol per cm per s
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
distance from root tip / mm
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
329/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(a) (i) Describe the rate of uptake of nitrate ions along the root.
Use the information in Fig. 2.1 and Fig. 2.2 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) Explain how nitrate ions move from the soil into roots.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) Explain why the uptake of ions, such as nitrate, is important for the uptake of water in
roots.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
330/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(iv) Explain why plants need nitrate ions, other than for the uptake of water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(v) Describe how nitrate ions are formed in the soil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
331/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(b) (i) Fig. 2.3 shows some of the events that occur when high concentrations of nitrate ions
flow into lakes.
A a decrease in the concentration of dissolved oxygen
B a decrease in the population of consumers
C a decrease in the population of producers
D a decrease in light intensity at the bottom of the lake
E an increase in the population of decomposers
F an increase in the population of producers
Fig. 2.3
Put the events shown in Fig. 2.3 into the correct sequence.
[2]
(ii) State the name of the process summarised in Fig. 2.3.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 19]
332/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
3 A researcher investigated genetic variation in fruit flies, Drosophila melanogaster.
The bodies of fruit flies can be black or yellow. A yellow body colour is a recessive feature in fruit
flies.
(a) Two heterozygous fruit flies with black bodies were bred together.
Predict the phenotypes of the offspring and the phenotypic ratio for this cross.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) In another fruit fly breeding experiment, researchers counted 124 offspring with black bodies
and 121 offspring with yellow bodies.
Draw a genetic diagram to explain the results of this cross. Use the letter B to represent the
allele for black body colour and the letter b to represent the allele for yellow body colour.
parental phenotypes .................................. × ..................................
gametes , × ,
............. ............. ............. .............
offspring genotypes ..................................................................................................................
expected offspring phenotype ratio ...................... black : ...................... yellow
actual offspring phenotype ratio 124 black : 121 yellow

[5]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
333/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(c) The crab, Cerberusa caeca, lives in dark caves and has no coloured pigment.
Fig. 3.1 is a photograph of C. caeca.
Fig. 3.1
(i) C. caeca and D. melanogaster are both arthropods.
State one feature present in all arthropods but not present in vertebrates.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) C. caeca is a crustacean and D. melanogaster is an insect.
State one morphological feature of C. caeca that distinguishes it as a crustacean and

not as an insect.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
334/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(d) The ancestors of C. caeca had pigmented bodies.
The lack of a coloured pigment in C. caeca is called albinism and was caused by a mutation
many thousands of years ago.
(i) Explain the mechanism that has resulted in the allele for albinism becoming common in
recent generations in populations of C. caeca.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State two factors that can cause mutations.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
335/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
4 HIV is a pathogen that can cause AIDS.
(a) Describe how HIV is transmitted from one person to another.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) All viruses contain genetic material. HIV contains genetic material called RNA.
State one other feature common to all viruses.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Describe the function of lymphocytes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State how infection with HIV affects the lymphocytes if untreated.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
336/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(d) Doctors wanted to determine whether dietary supplements could help people infected
with HIV.
They randomly put volunteers with HIV into two groups:

• a treatment group, who received HIV medication and additional vitamin and mineral
supplements
• a control group, who received HIV medication but no additional supplements.
The details of the two groups are outlined in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
treatment group control group

total number of volunteers 18 22
average age / years 45.6 46.6
average mass / kg 82.3 82.5
The dietary supplements were given to the treatment group twice a day for three months. The
nutrients in the supplements included:
• vitamin C
• vitamin D
• calcium
• iron
• other minerals and vitamins.
(i) Explain why vitamin C and iron are important in the human diet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
337/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
Table 4.2 shows some of the results from the study.
Table 4.2
treatment group control group

after three after three
at the start at the start
months months
average number of
357 422 461 461
lymphocytes / cells per μg of blood
average number of copies of HIV
4291 897 2648 5935
RNA per cm3 of blood
(ii) Use the data for the treatment group, shown in Table 4.2, to calculate the percentage
decrease in the average number of copies of HIV RNA per cm3 of blood.
Space for working.
.............................................................%
[2]
(iii) Evaluate the effect of the dietary supplements on the lymphocytes.
Use the information in Table 4.2 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 16]
338/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 Fig. 5.1 shows people fishing on a large scale and a small scale.
large-scale fishing small-scale fishing
Fig. 5.1
All types of fishing can have a negative impact on fish stocks.
(a) Discuss how governments can regulate fishing to maintain fish stocks.
Use the word sustainable in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
339/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the location of a chemical factory near a river.
site 1
direction of
water flow
site 2
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.3 shows the sex ratio of the fish, Catostomus commersonii, in the river at site 1 and
site 2. Intersex fish have both female and male reproductive organs.
Key:
female
site 1
intersex
male
site 2
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
percentage of fish
Fig. 5.3
State and explain what type of chemical the factory could be releasing into the river that
would cause the effects shown in Fig. 5.3.
type of chemical ........................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State how sex is inherited in humans.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
340/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 The heart pumps blood around the body.
(a) Explain why the heart is an organ.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Complete the sentences:
The ............................................... system includes the heart and blood vessels. Deoxygenated
blood from the body is transported to the heart in the ............................................... .
During a heart beat the ventricles contract. The right ventricle pumps deoxygenated blood to
the lungs. The right ventricle has a ............................................... muscular wall than the left
ventricle.
Gas exchange in the lungs occurs by ............................................... . Oxygenated blood
travels back to the heart where it enters the ............................................... of the heart.
The two sides of the heart are separated by the ............................................... . This
structure prevents the mixing of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood. Oxygenated blood is
then delivered to the rest of the body. Blood is supplied to the muscle of the heart in the
............................................... .
[7]
(c) Many people monitor their heart rate by counting their pulse.
State one other method of monitoring heart rate.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0610/43/O/N/21
341/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 0 7 6 1 6 8 2 5 0 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (JC/CT) 180480/4
342/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of the human gas exchange system.
Fig. 1.1
(i) Identify the structures labelled A, B and C in Fig. 1.1.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain how the structures in the gas exchange system cause inspiration.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
343/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) A person who does not smoke can be exposed to tobacco smoke from other people smoking.
Researchers studied the effect of exposure to tobacco smoke on the development of lung
cancer in three groups of women who did not smoke:
• group 1 – no exposure to tobacco smoke

• group 2 – low level exposure to tobacco smoke
• group 3 – high level exposure to tobacco smoke.
Their results are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
number of women percentage of

number of women
group who died from women who died
studied
lung cancer from lung cancer
1 21 895 32 0.15
2 44 184 86
3 25 461 56 0.22
(i) Calculate the percentage of women in group 2 who died from lung cancer.
Write your answer, to two significant figures, in Table 1.1.
[2]
(ii) Many countries have laws that ban smoking in public buildings.
Discuss the evidence from Table 1.1 that supports these laws.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
344/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(iii) Smoking has been found to increase the risk of developing diseases other than cancer.
State two other diseases that can be caused by smoking.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
345/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows the transfer of materials between blood and tissues.
lymphatic
fluid A
vessel
fluid B
arteriole venule
Key:
flow of blood
transfer of materials
Fig. 2.1
(i) Complete Table 2.1 by:
• stating the names of the fluids

• writing yes if the fluid contains red blood cells or no if the fluid does not contain
red blood cells.
Table 2.1
letter on contains red

name of the fluid
Fig. 2.1 blood cells
[2]
(ii) State the name of the process by which oxygen is transferred from fluid B to the cells.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why cells need oxygen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
346/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) Describe the functions of arterioles in the skin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Describe the functions of lymph nodes in the lymphatic system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Lacteals are part of the lymphatic system.
(i) State where in the body lacteals are found.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the role of lacteals.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
347/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
3 (a) One of the characteristics of living organisms is sensitivity.
Define the term sensitivity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State the names of two sense organs.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[1]
348/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) Scientists investigated the effect of adrenaline on blood glucose concentration in rats.
The rats were put into two groups:
• group A was given an injection of adrenaline

• group B was given an injection that did not contain adrenaline.
The blood glucose concentrations of the rats in both groups were monitored for three hours
after the injections.
The rats did not eat for 12 hours before the investigation or while they were being monitored.
5.0
time of
injection
4.5
blood glucose
concentration
/ mmol per dm3
4.0
3.5
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
monitoring time / hours
Key:
group A (adrenaline)
group B (no adrenaline)
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
349/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(i) Suggest why group B was given an injection that did not contain adrenaline.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe and explain the results shown in Fig. 3.1 for group A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(d) Another group of rats was given an injection that did not contain adrenaline.
These rats were given food after 2 hours of monitoring.
Predict the changes to blood glucose concentration in this group of rats.
Sketch a line to show your prediction on the graph in Fig. 3.1. [2]
(e) Describe two effects of adrenaline on the body, other than a change in blood glucose
concentration.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 14]
350/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
4 (a) Describe the similarities and differences between marasmus and kwashiorkor.
similarities .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
differences ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Researchers at a hospital recorded the total number of children admitted to the hospital
A common reason for children being admitted to this hospital was severe diarrhoea.
Table 4.1 shows this information.
Table 4.1
total number of
year children admitted to
the hospital
1984 1386
1986 1604
1988 1955
1990 2054
1992 1726
1994 1143
1996 1422
1998 1419
2000 1580
2002 1161
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
351/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(i) Calculate the percentage decrease in the total number of children admitted to the hospital
Space for working.
............................................................ %
[3]
(ii) Health workers in the communities near the hospital were trained in the prevention and
treatment of diarrhoea. This affected the total number of children being admitted to the
hospital.
Suggest the year in which the training took place.
Give a reason for your answer.
year ...................................................................................................................................
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) The health workers provided advice to the community on ways of preventing the spread
of the pathogens that cause diarrhoea.
Suggest the advice that was given to the community.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
352/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 (a) Mitosis is a type of nuclear division.
Fig. 5.1 is a series of photomicrographs showing a cell dividing by mitosis.
before mitosis 0 minutes 34 minutes
40 minutes 45 minutes 55 minutes
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the change that has occurred to the mass of DNA immediately before mitosis in
Fig. 5.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Estimate the time when the chromosomes shown in Fig. 5.1 begin to separate.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
353/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(b) Meiosis is another type of nuclear division.
Describe how the nuclei in cells produced by meiosis differ from the nuclei in cells produced
by mitosis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Stem cells divide by mitosis during the growth of an embryo.
Describe the role of stem cells in the growth of an embryo.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
354/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(d) An embryo develops into a fetus.
Outline the processes of labour and birth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
355/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
6 (a) Atlantic cod, Gadhus morhua, is a type of fish that is an important resource for commercial
fishing.
Fig. 6.1 shows the estimated mass of Atlantic cod over 40 years.
6
mass of
Atlantic 5
cod
/ million 4
tonnes
3
0
1970 1975 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010
year
Fig. 6.1
(i) In 1970, the mass of Atlantic cod was 8 000 000 tonnes.
State one year when the mass of Atlantic cod was half this value.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the years when there was a continuous increase in the mass of Atlantic cod for at
least five years.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest reasons for the trend shown between 1990 and 1995.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
356/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(iv) Explain how fish stocks can be conserved by restocking.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Fish have adaptive features that enable them to live successfully in their environment.
Fig. 6.2 is a photograph of a great white shark, Carcharodon carcharias.
Great white sharks are efficient predators and have very good eyesight to see in poor light
conditions underwater.
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
357/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(i) Describe two features, other than eyesight, visible in Fig. 6.2 that suggest that great
white sharks are efficient predators.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe how the ancestors of the great white shark developed adaptive features such
as good eyesight.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/F/M/20
358/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 8 8 3 9 1 5 6 0 7 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 180481/3
359/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 The gas exchange system is one of the organ systems of the human body.
Fig. 1.1 shows parts of the gas exchange system during breathing in and breathing out.
breathing in breathing out
intercostal
muscles
vertebrae
sternum
diaphragm
Fig. 1.1
(a) Complete Table 1.1 to show:
• the functions of the diaphragm and the intercostal muscles during breathing in and
breathing out
• the pressure changes in the thorax.
Use these words:
contract
relax
increases
decreases.
Table 1.1
intercostal muscles pressure change

diaphragm
internal external in the thorax
breathing in
breathing out
[4]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
360/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
Fig. 1.2 shows part of the gas exchange surface of a human.
movement of air
magnification ×350
Fig. 1.2
(b) State two features of the gas exchange surface that are visible in Fig. 1.2.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The cells labelled X on Fig. 1.2 form a tissue.
(i) Define the term tissue.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
361/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(ii) Cartilage is another tissue found in the gas exchange system.
State the functions of cartilage in the gas exchange system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
2 Biological washing powders contain enzymes that break down food stains.
(a) Complete Table 2.1 by naming the enzymes that break down three substances in food stains
and by stating the product or products.
Table 2.1
substance enzyme product(s)
starch
fat
protein
[3]
Some students compared how effective biological and non-biological washing powders are at
removing stains at temperatures between 10 °C and 60 °C.
• Pieces of stained cloth were washed using two different washing powders.
• The degree of stain removal was measured by using a light meter to record the
percentage of light reflected from the cloth.
• A light meter gave a value of 100% when the cloth was completely clean.
• Any stain left on the cloth reduced the percentage of light reflected.
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
362/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
The results of the students’ investigation are shown in Fig. 2.1.
110
100
90
percentage
of light 80
reflected
after 70
washing
60
50
40
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
temperature of washing / °C
Key:
non-biological washing powder
biological washing powder
Fig. 2.1
(b) Compare the effectiveness of the two washing powders at removing stains.
Use the information in Fig. 2.1 in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
363/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) The students suggested that the enzymes in the biological washing powder were denatured
at high temperatures.
Explain why enzyme molecules do not function when they are denatured.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Forensic scientists often try to find DNA on items of stained clothing. The DNA can be used to
identify individual people.
Suggest why DNA can be used to identify individual people.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
3 (a) Dialysis tubing is an artificial membrane, which is similar to the lining of the intestine.
A student investigated the diffusion of glucose through dialysis tubing by using the apparatus
shown in Fig. 3.1.
rubber band
to secure the
dialysis tubing
glucose solution
water outside
the dialysis tubing
dialysis tubing
knot at the end of

the dialysis tubing
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
364/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
The student took samples of the water outside the dialysis tubing at 5 minute intervals and
tested the samples with Benedict’s solution.
The results are shown in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
results of the Benedict’s tests on the

time / minutes
water outside the dialysis tubing
0 blue
5 green
10 yellow
15 red
(i) Describe and explain the results shown in Table 3.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The student repeated the investigation with a higher concentration of glucose in the
dialysis tubing.
Predict the results that the student would observe.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
365/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows a drawing of a cell from the lining of the small intestine. The lumen is the
space inside the intestine where food is digested.
lumen of the intestine
not to scale
Fig. 3.2
State the names of the three labelled structures in Fig. 3.2 and describe the role of each
structure in the intestinal cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
366/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(c) The cholera bacterium can survive in the small intestine and the large intestine. The bacterium
releases a toxin that interacts with receptors on the surface of cells.
Fig. 3.3 shows the effect of the toxin. The arrows indicate the direction of movement.
lumen of the intestine

bacterium
Key:
toxin
ion X
not to scale
Fig. 3.3
The toxin stimulates the secretion of ion X out of the intestinal cell.
(i) State the name of ion X.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the effects on the body of the secretion of ion X into the lumen of the intestine.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 15]
367/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Johnson grass, Sorghum halepense, is wind-pollinated.
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows some Johnson grass flowers.
Fig. 4.1
(i) State the genus of Johnson grass.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe two features visible in Fig. 4.1 that show that Johnson grass flowers are
adapted for wind-pollination.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
368/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a section through a carpel shortly after pollination.
B
A
Fig. 4.2
(i) State the names of the parts of the carpel labelled C, D and E.
C ........................................................................................................................................
D ........................................................................................................................................
E ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Complete the sentences:
Pollen grains are formed in anthers. During their formation the number of chromosomes
in the nuclei is halved by the process of .............................................. . This means the
male nucleus A in the pollen tube is described as a .............................................. nucleus.
When nucleus A .............................................. with nucleus B, the chromosome number
doubles to form a .............................................. nucleus. The name of this process is
.............................................. . Then the .............................................. divides by the
process of .............................................. to form an embryo.

[7]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
369/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(c) Discuss the advantages of sexual reproduction to a wild population of flowering plants such
as Johnson grass.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(d) Sexual reproduction requires energy.
State three uses of energy in organisms other than in reproduction.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 21]
370/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 Ciliates are classified in the kingdom Protoctist. Bacteria are classified in the kingdom Prokaryote.
(a) State two structural features that distinguish the cells of a protoctist from a prokaryote.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows five species of ciliate that are found in sewage treatment works.
cilia
rows of
cilia
A Chilodonella B Didinium
cilia
fused
together
C Euplotes D Paramecium E Vorticella
not to scale
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
371/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
Fig. 5.2 is a dichotomous key to identify the ciliates shown in Fig. 5.1.
START
yes
1 has a ring of cilia at yes 2 organism B
one end of the no
organism organism E
no
3 has star-like yes

structures inside the organism D
organism
no
4 yes
organism A
no
organism C
Fig. 5.2
Complete the key in Fig. 5.2 by writing suitable statements:
• for box 2 to distinguish species B and E

• for box 4 to distinguish species A and C.
text for box 2 .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
text for box 4 .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
372/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(c) Didinium is a predatory ciliate. A video recording was made of one Didinium feeding on a
Paramecium. Fig. 5.3 shows a sequence of still photographs taken from the video.
Didinium
Paramecium
Fig. 5.3
Complete the table by putting a tick (✓) by each characteristic of life that can be seen in the
still photographs from the video in Fig. 5.3.
excretion nutrition
growth reproduction
movement respiration
[1]
(d) Fig. 5.4 is a food web for some of the microorganisms in a sewage treatment works.
Didinium
rotifers Paramecium nematodes
Vorticella
photosynthetic bacteria decomposer

bacteria
Fig. 5.4
(i) Construct one food chain with three trophic levels that use energy derived from the
breakdown of sewage. Do not draw the organisms.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
373/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(ii) The water that passed out of the sewage works was often cloudy with suspended matter.
Scientists discovered that ciliates reduce the cloudiness of water during sewage
treatment.
Suggest how the ciliates reduce the cloudiness of the water using the information in
Fig. 5.4.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain how sewage treatment reduces the spread of disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iv) Nitrifying bacteria are found in sewage works.
Explain the importance of nitrifying bacteria in the nitrogen cycle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 14]
374/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 Colour blindness is a characteristic that is inherited. Colour blindness is more common in males
than in females.
Fig. 6.1 is a pedigree diagram showing the inheritance of colour blindness in a family.
Key:
male with normal
colour vision
male with colour
blindness
1 2
female with normal
colour vision
3 4
5 6 7 8
Fig. 6.1
(a) Define the term inheritance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Using the symbols B and b, state the genotypes of individual 5 and individual 8 in the
pedigree diagram.
5 ........................................................................................................................................
8 ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
375/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(ii) Individual 3 is a carrier of colour blindness because she has one copy of the allele for
colour blindness but has normal colour vision.
Describe the evidence from Fig. 6.1 that shows that individual 3 is a carrier.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) There was no history of colour blindness in the parents and grandparents of individuals 1
and 2.
Suggest how colour blindness first occurred in the family in Fig. 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/M/J/20
376/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 7 0 3 9 2 5 1 3 2 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (JC/CT) 180482/4
377/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Homeostasis is the maintenance of a constant internal environment.
(a) Human skin is involved in the maintenance of a constant internal body temperature.
(i) Skin is an organ.
State why the skin is an organ.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the organ that coordinates the control of body temperature.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Fig. 1.1 shows a diagram of a section through human skin.
A
F
Fig. 1.1
(iii) State the names of structures A, B and C in Fig. 1.1.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
378/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(iv) Structure D is a shunt vessel and E is an arteriole.
Describe how these blood vessels are involved in maintaining a constant internal body
temperature in a cold environment.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Energy is used to maintain body temperature.
State three other uses of energy in humans.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 11]
379/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Pregnancy can occur after the fusion of a male gamete and a female gamete.
(a) State the name of the ball of cells that implants into the uterus after fertilisation.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) There are many changes that occur in a fetus during pregnancy.
Compare the development of a fetus in the early stages of pregnancy to its development in
the late stages of pregnancy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Describe the functions of amniotic fluid and the amniotic sac.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) The umbilical artery is found in the umbilical cord. This artery transports blood away from the
heart of the fetus.
The umbilical artery is unusual because it transports deoxygenated blood.
(i) State the name of one other artery in the mother that transports deoxygenated blood.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
380/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(ii) State one excretory product that is transported from the fetus to the placenta.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the process that allows substances to move down a concentration
gradient across the placenta.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
381/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(e) One of the functions of the placenta is to provide a barrier to toxins and pathogens.
A study was done on donated afterbirths. The afterbirth is a placenta with part of the umbilical
cord attached.
The purpose of the study was to find the maximum size of particles that can pass through the
placenta and enter the umbilical cord.
The researchers inserted beads with a diameter of 0.5 µm into blood vessels in the placenta.
Three hours later they recorded the percentage of beads found in the blood in the placenta
and in the umbilical cord.
They then repeated the tests using beads with diameters of 0.8 µm, 2.4 µm, 5.0 µm and
8.0 µm.
Their results are shown in Fig. 2.1.

100
80
percentage of 60
beads found in
the blood after
3 hours
40
20
0
0.5 μm 0.8 μm 2.4 μm 5.0 μm 8.0 μm
bead size
Key:
umbilical cord
placenta
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
382/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(i) Convert the diameter of the 5.0 µm beads into millimetres (mm).
Space for working.
................................................... mm [1]
(ii) One million beads with a diameter of 2.4 µm were injected into the placenta.
Calculate the number of these beads in the umbilical cord after 3 hours.
Space for working.
..................................................... beads
[2]
(iii) Table 2.1 shows a range of substances and their diameters.
Table 2.1
toxins and pathogens diameter / µm

nicotine 2.0 × 10–2
drug X 3.0 × 10–2
rubella virus 5.0 × 10–2
Vibrio cholerae 8.0 × 10–1
Trypanosoma brucei 1.8 × 101
State the names of all the toxins and pathogens listed in Table 2.1 that could pass
through the placenta and enter the umbilical cord.
Use the data in Fig. 2.1 to make your choice.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
383/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(f) Fig. 2.2 shows the junction between two neurones with drug X absent and two neurones with
drug X present, immediately after a painful stimulus.
B
Key:
electrical signal
C neurotransmitter
drug X
D
relay neurone
drug X absent drug X present
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the names of A, B, C and D in Fig. 2.2.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
D ........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(ii) Describe and explain how drug X affects the function of the relay neurone shown in
Fig. 2.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
384/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(g) Drug X can be injected into the body. This is one way that HIV can be transmitted.
Describe two other ways that HIV can be transmitted.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 23]
385/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
3 Cheetahs, Acinonyx jubatus, are carnivores found in the dry grasslands and woodlands of
southern Africa. Cheetahs hunt for food during the day. They eat deer and antelope.
The cheetah is the fastest mammal on land but can only run at high speed (sprint) over a short
distance. Its hunting strategy is to creep up on prey and then sprint to catch them.
Fig. 3.1 is a photograph of a cheetah in its natural habitat.
Fig. 3.1
(a) Suggest how these adaptive features enable cheetahs to survive in their natural environment.
fur colouring ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
streamlined body shape ...........................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
386/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(b) The king cheetah is a rare variety of A. jubatus that has inherited striped fur markings.
Fig. 3.2 shows a cheetah with spots and a king cheetah.
cheetah with spots king cheetah
Fig. 3.2
(i) Define the term inheritance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
387/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
Fig. 3.3 shows a pedigree diagram of a population of cheetahs.
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
?
Key:
female king cheetah female cheetah with spots
male king cheetah male cheetah with spots
Fig. 3.3
(ii) Deduce the genotype of cheetah 11.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Predict the probability of cheetah 14 being a king cheetah.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Describe how a breeder could determine the genotype of cheetah 17.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
388/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(v) When the king cheetah was first discovered it was thought that it was a new species.
Pedigree diagrams of cheetahs proved it was not a new species.
Suggest one type of evidence, other than pedigree diagrams, that can be used to
determine how closely related organisms are.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Cheetahs are at risk of becoming endangered.
(i) Suggest why the cheetah is at risk of becoming endangered.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Describe how species like the cheetah can be conserved.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
389/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
4 Some crop farmers use herbicides on their fields.
Fig. 4.1 shows a farmer spraying a rice crop with herbicides.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Herbicides kill weeds.
Explain why farmers use herbicides.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
390/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(b) Fields of crop plants were sprayed with two herbicides. A farmer measured the concentration
of the two herbicides, A and B, in a lake near the fields.
The water in the lake was sampled at intervals for two weeks.
0.20
0.16
0.12
concentration
of herbicides in
the lake water
samples / mg per kg
0.08
0.04
0.00
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
time / days
herbicides Key:
sprayed on herbicide A
the fields herbicide B
Fig. 4.2
(i) Compare the concentrations of herbicide A and herbicide B in the lake.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
391/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(ii) Suggest how herbicides damage ecosystems in a lake.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) Herbicide A is a synthetic plant hormone called 2,4-D that selectively kills dicotyledonous
plants only.
(i) State two features that distinguish leaves of dicotyledonous plants from leaves of
monocotyledonous plants.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the name of a natural plant hormone that stimulates cell elongation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Herbicide B is a chemical that prevents the uptake of magnesium ions.
Suggest how herbicide B kills plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 15]
392/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
5 The Galápagos Islands are a group of small islands in the Pacific Ocean.
In 1839 Charles Darwin published a book that described differences in a family of birds called
finches.
Each species of Galápagos finch had:
• a different diet
• a different beak shape, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
Geospiza conirostris Geospiza scandens
Geospiza magnirostris Geospiza fortis
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the genus name for the Galápagos finches shown in Fig. 5.1.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
393/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(b) Galápagos finches share a common ancestor.
Suggest how Galápagos finches have evolved different shaped beaks.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 6]
394/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 is a diagram showing some parts of a plant. The circle shows a magnified cross-section
of part of the stem.
C
M D
E
L
F
K G
not to scale
Fig. 6.1
(i) Table 6.1 contains statements about the functions of some of the structures in Fig. 6.1.
Complete the table by:
• stating the name of the structure

• identifying the letter that labels that structure.
Table 6.1
function name of structure letter from Fig. 6.1
provides support to the stem
protects flower bud
produces glucose
produces pollen
delivers male nuclei to the site of fertilisation
[5]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
395/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
21
(ii) State one letter from Fig. 6.1 that identifies a structure that contains a haploid nucleus.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the process that describes the transport of sucrose in a plant.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State one letter from Fig. 6.1 that is a structure that is an example of a source for sucrose
transport.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In addition to sucrose, amino acids are also transported in plants.
(i) State the name of a mineral ion that becomes part of an amino acid.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the structures inside cells that assemble amino acids into proteins.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the group of molecules that are made of proteins and act as catalysts.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/M/J/20
396/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 7 9 1 8 2 5 5 2 6 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 180793/3
397/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) State three uses of energy in the human body.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows part of the digestive system of a human.
diaphragm
B
L
K
C
H
G
D
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
398/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
Complete Table 1.1. One row has been done for you.
Table 1.1
pushes food to the stomach oesophagus A
assimilation of amino acids to produce

plasma proteins
storage of bile
secretion of insulin
absorption of fatty acids and glycerol
secretion of pepsin
digestion of starch
[6]
(c) Describe the role of the liver in the recovery from oxygen debt after strenuous exercise.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Alcohol is a drug.
Define the term drug.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
399/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(e) (i) State two immediate effects of excessive alcohol on the body.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State two long-term effects of excessive alcohol on the body.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) Pregnant women are advised not to drink alcohol as it may have harmful effects on the fetus.
(i) Outline these harmful effects.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State two harmful substances other than alcohol that can cross the placenta.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
400/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows the human population of a country between 1910 and 2020.
140
120
100
number of
people 80
/ million
60
40
20
0
1900 1920 1940 1960 1980 2000 2020
year
Fig. 2.1
(i) Calculate the percentage increase in the population of the country between 1940 and
2020.
Space for working.
.............................................................%
[3]
(ii) Describe the factors that could cause the change in the population size between 1940
and 2020, shown in Fig. 2.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
401/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) Some countries have invested in biofuels such as ethanol, biomass and biodiesel.
(i) Describe how ethanol can be made by microorganisms.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Some countries use large areas of land to grow maize plants. This crop plant can be
used to produce biofuels.
Discuss the negative impact on the environment of growing large-scale monocultures

of crop plants such as maize.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
402/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 The American writer Ernest Hemingway lived on the island of Key West in Florida, USA in the
1930s. During this time he was given a male cat by a sea captain.
The cat had more toes than usual. This inherited condition is called polydactyly. The allele for
polydactyly is dominant.
(a) Define the term inheritance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 is part of a pedigree diagram for Hemingway’s cats.
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16
Key:
17
female cat with normal female cat with
number of toes polydactyly
male cat with normal male cat with

number of toes polydactyly
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
403/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(i) State the genotypes of cats 5, 6 and 14 in the pedigree diagram in Fig. 3.1.
Use the letters T and t.
cat 5 ..................................................................................................................................
cat 6 ..................................................................................................................................
cat 14 ................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain why none of the offspring of cats 3 and 4 have inherited polydactyly.
Use the information in Fig. 3.1 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
404/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) Scientists published the results of an investigation into the DNA of cats with and without
polydactyly. They compared the base sequence from a particular region of DNA that controls
the development of the limbs.
Table 3.1 shows the base sequences.
Table 3.1
cats without polydactyly AGA CAC AGA AAT GAG

Hemingway’s cats with polydactyly AGA CAC GGA AAT GAG
cats with polydactyly from Oregon and Missouri in the USA AGA CAC GGA AAT GAG
cats with polydactyly from the UK AGA CAC AGT AAT GAG
(i) Describe how the base sequences of the cats with polydactyly differ from the base
sequence of cats without polydactyly.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of the process by which base sequences in DNA are changed.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The base sequences in Table 3.1 provide evidence that indicates which country the male
cat given to Hemingway in the 1930s came from.
Suggest which country this cat came from and give a reason for your choice.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
405/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(d) Fig. 3.2 shows part of a DNA molecule from a chromosome of a cat.
Complete Fig. 3.2 by writing the letters for the base sequence of the other strand of the DNA
molecule.
T ..........
A ..........
A ..........
T ..........
G ..........
C ..........
G ..........
T ..........
G ..........
Fig. 3.2
[1]
(e) Explain why polydactyly is an example of discontinuous variation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 13]
406/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 Xerophytes grow in habitats with low rainfall and soils that often have high concentrations of salts.
Fig. 4.1 shows the xerophyte Yucca treculeana growing on salt flats.
Y. treculeana
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) Explain how xerophytes, such as Y. treculeana, are adapted to absorb sufficient water in
the conditions in which they live.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
407/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Explain how xerophytes are adapted to reduce water loss to the atmosphere.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Xerophytes often have many defence mechanisms that reduce or prevent herbivores
eating them.
Suggest how xerophytes protect themselves against herbivores.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Forest ecosystems can be affected by acid rain.
Describe how the production of acid rain and its effects on forest ecosystems can be reduced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 13]
408/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
5 Bacteria are classified in the Prokaryote kingdom.
(a) State two features of animal and plant cells that are not found in prokaryotes.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
409/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(b) Methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) is a type of bacterium that is resistant to

some antibiotics.
Fig. 5.1 shows how a population of bacteria may develop antibiotic resistance and how the
antibiotic resistance can be passed from one strain of bacterium to another.
population of pathogenic bacteria A in

patient 1
treatment with antibiotic Z started

patient 1 in the middle of treatment
with antibiotic Z

patient 1 when treatment with
antibiotic Z was stopped
transmission of bacteria A to patient 2
bacteria A and B in patient 2
not to scale
Key:
bacterium of strain A bacterium of strain B
resistant to antibiotic Z resistant to antibiotic Z
bacterium of strain A bacterium of strain B
not resistant to antibiotic Z not resistant to antibiotic Z
dying bacterium of strain A plasmid
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
410/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
Explain how resistance to an antibiotic develops in a population of bacteria and spreads in

the human population.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
(c) Explain how the development of resistant bacteria, such as MRSA, can be minimised.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 11]
411/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 In many parts of the world dairy cattle are kept in large barns and reared intensively, as shown in
Fig. 6.1.
Fig. 6.1
(a) Food for cattle that are reared intensively includes cereals, such as maize and barley.
Ecologists have calculated that it is more energy efficient to grow crops for human consumption
than for food for livestock.
Explain why intensive rearing of livestock is not an efficient use of crops.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
412/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(b) The urine and faeces from cattle kept in barns is removed and treated in the same way as
human sewage to avoid polluting the aquatic environment.
Outline the effects of untreated waste from cattle on the aquatic environment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Intensive livestock production could be one way of preventing famine.
Describe the causes of famine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/M/J/20
413/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 3 1 0 5 8 2 8 9 5 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (JC/CT) 187653/6
414/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Water is an essential molecule for life.
(a) Complete the statements.
Water moves into and out of cells by ............................................... .
Water is known as a ............................................... because it can dissolve solutes.

[2]
(b) A leaf cell was put into a solution. The water potential of the solution was lower than the water
potential of the contents of the cell.
Fig. 1.1 is a sketch of the cell after three hours in the solution.
nucleus
Fig. 1.1
The leaf cell was transferred into pure water.
Sketch the expected appearance of the cell after it had been in the pure water for three
hours.
Draw one arrow on your sketch to show the direction of water movement.
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/O/N/20
415/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) A plant was not watered for one week.
Fig. 1.2 shows a series of photographs of the plant during the week.
day 0 day 3 day 7
Fig. 1.2
Explain how the lack of water has affected the support of the leaves of the plant shown in
Fig. 1.2.
Use the term turgor pressure in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
416/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Pathogens cause disease.
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows some cells that are part of the human immune system. These cells are
responding to one type of pathogen.
R
T
Fig. 2.1
Explain how the immune system responds to an invasion of pathogens.
Use the letters in Fig. 2.1 in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/O/N/20
417/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(b) A vaccine was introduced in 1942 for a particular disease.
Fig. 2.2 shows the effect of introducing the vaccine on the number of cases of the disease in
one country.
250
vaccine
introduced
200
150
number of cases
of disease
per million people
100
50
0
1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980
year
Fig. 2.2
In 1946 the government of the country concluded that the vaccine was successful.
Discuss the evidence, shown in Fig. 2.2, for and against this conclusion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 10]
418/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 All living organisms excrete waste products.
(a) Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of Naegleria fowleri, a single-celled protoctist that lives in watery
environments.
magnification ×4000
Fig. 3.1
(i) State a feature of N. fowleri, visible in Fig. 3.1, that distinguishes it from prokaryotes.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name and function of structure A.
structure ............................................................................................................................
function ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Suggest how N. fowleri excretes carbon dioxide.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/O/N/20
419/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(b) Urea is a toxin that is excreted by the kidneys in humans.
Describe how and where in the body urea is formed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
420/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) Fig. 3.2 shows part of the human excretory system and associated blood vessels.
The arrows indicate the direction of blood flow.
H
not to scale
Fig. 3.2
(i) Draw a label line and the letter X on Fig. 3.2 to show the location of the cortex in one of
the kidneys. [1]
(ii) Table 3.1 contains statements about the labelled structures in Fig. 3.2.
• stating the name of the structure

• identifying the letter that labels that structure.
Table 3.1
description name of structure letter from Fig. 3.2
organ that stores urine
tube that carries urine out of the

kidney
blood vessel with the lowest
concentration of urea
blood vessel with the lowest
concentration of carbon dioxide
tube that carries urine out of the
body
[5]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/O/N/20
421/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(d) Doctors wanted to investigate the effect of exercise on the excretion of salts.
They collected urine from people before and after running a long distance on a hot day.
The results of their investigation are shown in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2
before running after running
average volume of urine / cm3 1156.0 569.0
average concentration of sodium in

85.6 78.2
urine / mmol per dm3
(i) Suggest why there is a difference in the volume of urine produced before running
compared with after running.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the percentage decrease in the average sodium concentration after running
compared with before running.
Give your answer to one significant figure.
Space for working.
............................................................ %
[3]
422/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(iii) Describe how the kidney tubules enable the excretion of salts.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) Large plasma proteins are usually prevented from entering the urine.
State the name of one protein found in blood plasma.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 22]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/O/N/20
423/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a bee with pollen on its legs.
Fig. 4.1
Bees are insects that pollinate some flowering plants. They are attracted to the flowers by
their colour, scent and nectar.
(i) Describe other ways in which flowers and pollen grains are adapted for insect pollination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State where pollen is produced in a flower.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the process that produces haploid pollen nuclei.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Explain why it is important that the pollen nuclei are haploid.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
424/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(b) (i) Describe how the pollen that is carried by an insect to another flower results in the
formation of a plant embryo.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) Describe the advantages of cross-pollination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Some people are concerned that genetically modified plants might cross-pollinate with wild
varieties of plants.
(i) Suggest how farmers could prevent cross-pollination between genetically modified plants
and wild varieties of plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two advantages of genetically modified crops.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/O/N/20
425/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 Milk is a source of some of the nutrients that are part of a balanced diet.
(a) Calcium and protein are two nutrients found in milk.
Describe the importance of calcium and protein in the diet.
calcium .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
protein .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Lactose is found in cows’ milk. Some people do not have the enzyme to digest lactose.
State the names of two organs, associated with the alimentary canal, that produce enzymes.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
426/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a flow diagram for the production of lactose-free milk.
Step 1 collect cows’ milk from farm
diagram of Step 4
Step 2 heat milk to a high temperature
for 15 seconds
milk
Step 3 allow milk to cool to 20°C
beads
containing
Step 4 pour milk into a container of enzyme
beads containing enzymes
Step 5 collect lactose-free milk
lactose-free milk
Step 6 store lactose-free milk at 2°C in
sterile bottles
Fig. 5.1
(i) Explain how heating the milk in step 2 in Fig. 5.1 ensures the hygienic preparation of
lactose-free milk.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the milk must be cooled in step 3 before it makes contact with the enzymes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State the name of the enzyme used to make lactose-free milk in step 4.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/O/N/20
427/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(iv) Suggest why the enzymes are kept in the beads in step 4 rather than mixed as an
enzyme solution with the milk.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Milk is produced by mammals.
(i) Explain the advantages to newborn mammals of breast milk.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Explain why breast-feeding mothers are advised to drink plenty of water and avoid
excessive alcohol consumption.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 17]
428/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 Sensitivity is one of the characteristics of all living organisms.
(a) Define the term sensitivity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The eye is an example of a sense organ.
(i) Define the term sense organ.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Adrenaline is a hormone that is released in ‘fight or flight’ situations. It causes a change
in the eye.
Complete Table 6.1 by stating the parts of the eye that change when adrenaline is
released into the blood.
Table 6.1
action part of the eye
muscle that relaxes
muscle that contracts
widens
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0610/41/O/N/20
429/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 5 4 7 9 8 8 2 3 2 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (JC/CT) 187679/5
430/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Sensitivity is one of the characteristics of life. The eye is one of the major sense organs of
vertebrates.
(i) Define the term sensitivity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Define the term sense organ.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Accommodation (focusing) is one of the functions of the eye.
Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of an eye that is focusing on a distant object.
retina
ciliary muscle
suspensory ligaments
Fig. 1.1
(i) State the name of the part of the retina labelled X.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
431/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
Fig. 1.2 is an incomplete diagram of an eye that is focusing on a near object.
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Complete Fig. 1.2 by drawing the shape of the lens and the light rays from the object to
the retina. [3]
(iii) Describe the roles of the ciliary muscles and suspensory ligaments in focusing on a
distant object, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
432/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) The eye also controls the amount of light that enters the pupil.
Fig. 1.3 shows an eye in low light and in bright light.
eye in low light eye in bright light
Fig. 1.3
Describe the changes that occur in the eye when the light becomes bright, as shown in
Fig. 1.3.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) The change shown in Fig. 1.3 occurs automatically without thought.
State the name given to this type of action.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
433/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 Fig. 2.1 is a vertical section of a human molar tooth and surrounding structures.
B
C
Fig. 2.1
(a) State the names of the parts labelled A to D on Fig. 2.1.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
C ...............................................................................................................................................
D ...............................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Describe and explain the function of molar teeth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
434/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) Fig. 2.2 is an X-ray of decay in a molar tooth.
decayed molar tooth
Fig. 2.2
Explain how tooth decay occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
435/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
3 Fig. 3.1 is a food web for a forested area in Central America.
great horned owl
jaguar
bobcat
long-tailed weasel nine-banded armadillo

hooded skunk
red harvester ants termites

collared peccary
lowland tapir
muhly grass Peruvian feather

grass
Fig. 3.1
(a) Complete Table 3.1 using information from Fig. 3.1.
Table 3.1
trophic level description example from Fig. 3.1
herbivore
producer
feeds on tertiary consumers
secondary consumer
[4]
436/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the flow of energy through a food chain. The size of each box represents the
energy available in each trophic level, numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
solar
energy
respiration trophic level 1
trophic
level 2
respiration trophic
level 3
Z respiration
trophic
level 4
Fig. 3.2
(i) State the term given to the group of organisms represented by Z in Fig. 3.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, with reference to Fig. 3.2, why food chains usually have fewer than five trophic
levels.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
437/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(c) Intensive livestock production can be damaging to natural ecosystems.
Fig. 3.3 shows intensive farming of chickens.
Fig. 3.3
(i) Describe the negative impact on an ecosystem of the intensive production of livestock,
such as chickens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
438/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(ii) Forests are cleared for farmland. Deforestation can lead to a loss of soil (soil erosion).
Explain the effects of soil erosion on ecosystems.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
439/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 (a) Yeast cells have many structures in common with a plant cell.
Fig. 4.1 is a drawing of a yeast cell.
A B
cell wall
Fig. 4.1
(i) State the names of the cell structures labelled A and D on Fig. 4.1.
A ........................................................................................................................................
D ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the functions of the cell structures labelled B and C on Fig. 4.1.
B ........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State the name of one structure that is found in plant cells but is absent in yeast cells.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
440/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(b) Yeast is used in the production of ethanol to manufacture a type of biofuel.
Fig. 4.2 is a flow chart of the process.
maize plants
extraction of starch from

maize
enzyme S
maltose
enzyme T
glucose
process U in anaerobic
conditions
ethanol carbon dioxide
Fig. 4.2
(i) State the names of enzymes S and T.
S ........................................................................................................................................
T ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Yeast is used in process U. Complete the balanced chemical equation for anaerobic
respiration in yeast.
................................. ...........C2H5OH + ..................

[2]
(iii) Suggest the advantages of using biofuels instead of fossil fuels.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
441/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(iv) Carbon dioxide may be collected from process U and sold for use in glasshouses.
Explain why carbon dioxide is used in glasshouses.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 16]
442/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 (a) The activities of the ovaries and the uterus are regulated by the hormones FSH, LH, oestrogen
and progesterone during the menstrual cycle.
Complete Table 5.1 to show the sites of production and the roles of these four hormones.
Table 5.1
target
hormone site of production role
organ
FSH pituitary gland ovary
LH pituitary gland ovary
oestrogen uterus stimulates growth of the lining of the uterus
progesterone uterus
[5]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
443/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows the changes in the lining of the uterus of a human female.
thickness of
the lining of
the uterus
0 7 14 21 28 7 14
day of menstrual cycle
Fig. 5.1
Describe the changes in the lining of the uterus between days 0 and 28 of the menstrual
cycle.
between days 0 and 7 ..............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
between days 7 and 28 ............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
444/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(c) Some people are infertile.
Artificial insemination (AI) and in vitro fertilisation (IVF) are two methods of fertility treatment.
These two methods are outlined in Fig. 5.2.
artificial insemination
collection of
sperm
washed
sperm
in vitro fertilisation
collection of
eggs
collection of
sperm
washed
sperm
eggs and sperm mixed together
embryo
transfer of growth of embryos in freezing of

embryos culture dish spare embryos
not to scale
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
445/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
Describe the similarities and differences between the two processes of fertility treatment
shown in Fig. 5.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 14]
446/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of DNA.
Key:
base pair
base A
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State the letter of the base that pairs with A.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the letters of the other bases in DNA.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Outline the roles of DNA in a cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
447/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows a plant tissue in which cells are dividing by mitosis.
J
H
Fig. 6.2
(i) Cell H in Fig. 6.2 is about to divide by mitosis.
State what happens to the chromosomes in cell H before mitosis takes place and state
why it is necessary.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Cell K is about to divide into two cells.
State the structures that will form between the nuclei so that the cell divides into two
cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
448/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(iii) Cell J in Fig. 6.2 is an example of a diploid cell.
State what is meant by the term diploid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0610/42/O/N/20
449/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 4 2 8 9 9 0 7 7 1 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (JC/CT) 188259/4
450/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Plants are sensitive to light.
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows a sequence of diagrams for two young plant seedlings. The seedlings were
first grown in pots with light from all directions and then placed into boxes.
• Seedling A was placed in a box with light entering from one side only.
• Seedling B was placed in a box with no light.
seedling
soil
water
A A
B B
Fig. 1.1
Complete Fig. 1.1 by drawing seedling A and seedling B, in the boxes, to show the expected
direction of their growth after one week. [2]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/O/N/20
451/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) Plants are also sensitive to gravity.
(i) Define the term sensitivity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain the role of plant hormones in gravitropism.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) Gravitropism enables plants to survive in their environment.
Explain how gravitropism enables a plant to survive.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
452/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) Reflexes in animals are also an example of sensitivity.
(i) Describe how reflexes in animals differ from sensitivity in plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The pupil reflex is an example of a reflex that occurs in the eye. The eye is a sense
organ.
Define the term sense organ.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/O/N/20
453/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 (a) A person ate a meal containing starch and fat.
Fig. 2.1 shows some events that occurred after ingesting this meal.
P absorption of nutrients in the villi
Q assimilation of fatty acids in the liver
R breakdown of large food particles by the teeth
S movement of small food particles through the oesophagus
T secretion of amylase from the salivary glands
Fig. 2.1
Put the events in Fig. 2.1 into the correct sequence. One has been done for you.
R
[2]
(b) The stomach lining contains cells that secrete proteins.
(i) State the names of two cell structures that are involved in making or secreting proteins.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the name of one component of gastric juice and describe its functions.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
454/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(iii) There are goblet cells in many parts of the alimentary canal.
State the substance that goblet cells secrete.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Emulsification of fats occurs in the alimentary canal.
(i) Describe the process of emulsification of fats.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of the organ in the alimentary canal where fats are emulsified.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the structure in the villi where digested fats are absorbed.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 is part of a food web in a rainforest.
anaconda
jaguar
iguana frog
monkey grasshopper fruit bat
coconut tree banana plant
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/O/N/20
455/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(i) Complete Fig. 3.2 using the information in Fig. 3.1.
The first one has been done for you.
the number of different producers 2
the number of different secondary consumers
the number of different trophic levels in the food web
how many different trophic levels monkeys feed at
Fig. 3.2
[3]
(ii) Sometimes anacondas are able to kill and eat jaguars.
Using the information in Fig. 3.1, state the name of the highest possible trophic level of
an anaconda that eats a jaguar.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the population of anacondas is always smaller than the population of fruit
bats in the food web shown in Fig. 3.1.
Use the concept of energy flow in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
456/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) (i) A giant rat was discovered in a natural rainforest on Vangunu Island. Scientists wanted
to determine if it was a new species.
Explain how scientists can use tissue samples to classify this rat.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Giant rats eat coconuts.
Coconuts are grown as a monoculture for human consumption.
Suggest how monocultures of crop plants can result in the extinction of some animals.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/O/N/20
457/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
4 Yeast is an example of a single-celled fungus.
(a) The population of yeast can be estimated by using a light microscope to view a small sample
of yeast cells in a modified microscope slide.
There is a square chamber, with a specific volume, cut into the microscope slide and a grid to
make it easier to count the number of cells.
Fig. 4.1 shows a diagram of the modified microscope slide. It also shows part of a light
microscope with the modified microscope slide filled to the top with a sample of yeast cells.
grid
chamber
Fig. 4.1
The length of the sides of each small square in the grid in the modified microscope slide is
200 μm. The depth of the chamber is 100 μm. There is a total of 25 small squares in the grid.
Each small square in the grid has an average of 52 yeast cells.
Calculate the concentration of yeast cells per mm3.
Space for working.
......................................... cells per mm3

[3]
458/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(b) A small sample of yeast cells and 19 g per dm3 of sugar were added to a fermenter. The
population size of live yeast cells and the concentration of the sugar in the fermenter were
calculated every day for 10 days.
The results are shown in Fig. 4.2 and Fig. 4.3.
20
20
18
18
16
16
14
concentration 12
14
of sugar
/concentration
g per dm3 12
10
of sugar
/ g per dm3 10
8
8
6
6
4
4
2
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0 time / days
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig. 4.2time / days
population size
of live yeast cells
population size
of live yeast cells
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / days
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / days
Fig. 4.3
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/O/N/20
459/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(i) Draw an X on Fig. 4.3 to indicate the position of the lag phase. [1]
(ii) Complete the line on Fig. 4.3 to show the expected change in the population size of live
yeast cells from day 3 to day 10. [2]
(iii) Describe and explain the changes in the concentration of sugar in the fermenter over the
10-day period.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(c) Explain why it is important that there is a tube in the fermenter that allows gases to escape.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 13]
460/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a photomicrograph of a sperm cell reaching an egg cell.
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Complete the sentence:
A nucleus containing a single set of unpaired chromosomes in a sperm is called a
............................................... nucleus. [1]
(ii) State where, in the female reproductive system, the event shown in Fig. 5.1 occurs.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe what happens from the event shown in Fig. 5.1 until an embryo is formed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/O/N/20
461/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(b) Some people use fertility drugs and in vitro fertilisation (IVF) to have children.
Outline the use of fertility drugs and the process of IVF.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 12]
462/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
6 (a) Researchers investigated four different insecticides to determine how effective they were at
removing three different species of insects, A, B and C, from crop plants.
They tested different concentrations of each insecticide to find the minimum dosage required
to remove 95% of each insect population in two hours.
Each insecticide had the same cost per gram.
Table 6.1
minimum dosage required

species of / mg per dm3
insect
insecticide 1 insecticide 2 insecticide 3 insecticide 4
A 3 51 5 58
B 31 27 2 75
C 10 2 3 65
(i) Use the information in Table 6.1 to decide which one of the four different insecticides and
which dosage would be the best choice for removing insects A, B and C from a field of
crop plants.
Explain your choices.
insecticide ............................................... dosage .............................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/O/N/20
463/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(ii) Discuss factors, other than dosage, that should be considered to prevent the insecticide
damaging the environment.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i) Describe the advantages to farmers of using insecticides.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Farmers also use other chemicals on their crop plants.
State the names of chemicals, other than insecticides, that are used by farmers on crop
plants and explain their benefits.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
464/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(c) Insecticides are often made from chemicals that occur naturally in plants. Tobacco plants are
one example of this.
(i) Suggest why having a natural insecticide is an adaptive feature of plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe why people find it difficult to stop smoking tobacco.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State the names of two diseases that can be caused by smoking tobacco.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) State the name of the component of tobacco that can damage alveoli.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2020 0610/43/O/N/20
465/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge IGCSE®
* 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/04
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) For examination from 2020
SPECIMEN PAPER
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.

Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 16 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
466/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 The dominant grass species in an African grassland ecosystem are star grass and red oat grass.
•• Star grass is eaten by antelope species, such as topi and Thomson’s gazelle.
•• Smaller animals such as mice and grasshoppers feed on red oat grass.
•• Topi and Thomson’s gazelle are eaten by predators such as cheetahs, lions and serval cats.
•• Grasshoppers and mice are eaten by serval cats and tawny eagles.
•• Vultures feed on dead mammals.
Fig. 1.1 shows part of the food web for this ecosystem.
.................................
lions serval cats tawny eagles

.................................
Thomson’s
topi grasshoppers
gazelle .................................
star grass red oat grass
Fig. 1.1
(a) Complete the food web by writing the names of the correct organisms in the boxes in Fig. 1.1.
[3]
(b) Name the trophic level of the following species.
star grass ................................................................................................................................
topi .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) State the principal source of energy for the food web shown in Fig. 1.1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what happens to energy when it leaves a food web.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
467/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(d) Explain why there are no more than four trophic levels in the food web shown in Fig. 1.1.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Fish such as salmon can be reared intensively in fish farms. They are fed on high protein food
made from animals. When eating this food, the fish are feeding as secondary consumers.
Describe the disadvantages of intensive farming, such as salmon farming, for producing
human food.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 13]
468/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a person sitting in a room. A thermometer shows the temperature of the room.
50
40
30
°C
20
10
Fig. 2.1
(a) Give three uses of energy in the body of the person in Fig. 2.1.
1 ............................................................................................................................................
2 ............................................................................................................................................
3 ...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i) Name the process carried out by the person in Fig. 2.1 that releases energy.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the balanced chemical equation that describes this process.
........................................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) The person leaves the room and runs very fast for 200 m. When the person stops running, his
breathing rate and his heart rate remain high for several minutes.
Explain why the person’s breathing rate and heart rate remain high.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
469/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(d) The run results in changes in the skin involving the blood vessels and the sweat glands.
Describe what happens to the blood vessels and sweat glands during the run.
Explain why these changes happen.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 14]
470/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 (a) Define the term sensitivity.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Fig. 3.1 shows the reflex arc involved in a simple reflex action.
spinal nerve
spinal cord
Fig 3.1
(b) On Fig. 3.1 use label lines to identify and name the three types of neurone shown. [3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
471/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(c) A reflex is an involuntary action.

Explain what is meant by the term involuntary action.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Define the term synapse.
............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how impulses are transmitted across a synapse.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) When a body senses danger, more adrenaline is secreted from the adrenal glands.
Describe two ways in which the hormone adrenaline affects the body in preparation for action.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................... [2]
(f) State one difference between nervous and hormonal control systems.
............................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]
472/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
4 The four o’clock plant, Mirabilis jalapa, can have flowers of three different colours as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
yellow
flower
red flower orange flower
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student crossed some red-flowered plants with some yellow-flowered plants (cross 1).
She collected the seeds and grew them. All of the plants that grew from these seeds had
orange flowers.
Complete the genetic diagram to explain the result of cross 1.
parental phenotypes red flowers × yellow flowers
parental genotypes RR × YY
gametes .............. + ..............
offspring genotype ........................
offspring phenotype ........................
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
473/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(b) The student then carried out three further crosses as shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
genotypes of offspring
cross 2 offspring of cross 1 × offspring of cross 1
cross 3 offspring of cross 1 × red-flowered plant
cross 4 offspring of cross 1 × yellow-flowered plant
Complete the table by writing in the genotypes of the offspring of crosses 2, 3 and 4, using
the same symbols as in the genetic diagram in (a).
You may use the space below for any working.
[3]
(c) Flower colour in M. jalapa is not an example of the inheritance of dominant and recessive
alleles.
Explain how the results of the crosses show that these alleles for flower colour are not dominant
or recessive.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
474/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(d) The flowers from M. jalapa were cross-pollinated.
Explain the difference between self-pollination and cross-pollination.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Some plant species are self-pollinated.

Discuss the long-term effects of self-pollination on the evolution of these plant species.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
475/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 Penicillin is an antibiotic produced by the fungus Penicillium chrysogenum.
Fig. 5.1 shows the process used to produce penicillin.
waste
gases
cooling water out
water jacket
fungus and
acid or alkali
nutrients
pH monitor
temperature
monitor
filtration
grid
stirring
paddles residue
sterile air
filtrate
containing
penicillin
cooling water in
fermenter filter
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
476/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(a) Explain why there is a water jacket around the fermenter and why acids or alkalis are added
to the fermenter.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
477/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the mass of fungus and the yield of penicillin during the fermentation process.
50 10
45 9
40 8
35 penicillin 7
30 6
yield of
mass of
penicillin
fungus 25 5
/ arbitrary
/ g per dm3
units
20 4
fungus
15 3
10 2
5 1
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / hours
nutrients added
Fig. 5.2
(i) State the time interval over which the fungus grew at its maximum rate.
.................................................. hours [1]
(ii) As the fungus grows in the fermenter, the nuclei in the fungal hyphae divide.
State the type of nuclear division that occurs during the growth of the fungus in the
fermenter.
........................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
478/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(iii) Explain why the growth of the fungus slows down and stops.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Penicillin is not needed for the growth of P. chrysogenum.

(i) State the evidence from Fig. 5.2 that shows that penicillin is not needed for this growth.
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The people in charge of the penicillin production emptied the fermenter after 160 hours.
Use the information in Fig. 5.2 to suggest why they did not allow the fermentation to
continue for longer.
............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
479/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(d) Downstream processing refers to all the processes that occur to the contents of the fermenter
after it is emptied. This involves making penicillin into a form that can be used as a medicine.
Suggest why downstream processing is necessary.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Explain why antibiotics, such as penicillin, affect bacteria but not viruses.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
480/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a villus from the small intestine of a mammal and an enlarged view of a cell from
region A.
microvilli
A
mitochondria
magnification ×110 magnification ×2600
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name regions A, B and C.
A ...........................................................................................................................................
B ...........................................................................................................................................
C ..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Explain why the cells from region A have many microvilli and many mitochondria.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0610/04/SP/20
481/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge Assessment International Education

Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
* 7 8 6 9 8 4 1 0 1 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.

This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (ST/SG) 165036/2
482/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 The kidney is one of the main excretory organs of the body.
(a) Define the term excretion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) One of the roles of the kidney is to filter the blood.
Fig. 1.1 shows a section of a kidney.
Fig. 1.1
State the name of the parts labelled A, B and C on Fig. 1.1.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
C ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/F/M/19
483/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Table 1.1 shows the concentrations of four solutes:
• in the blood in the renal artery

• in the fluid in the kidney tubule
• in the urine.
Table 1.1
solute concentration / g dm–3

solute blood in the fluid in the
urine
renal artery kidney tubule
glucose 0.9 0.9 0.0
protein 83.0 0.0 0.0
salts 8.0 8.0 16.5
urea 0.2 0.2 20.0
(i) Calculate the percentage increase in the concentration of urea between the blood in the
renal artery and the urine.
Show your working.
............................................................ %
[2]
(ii) Describe the results for the concentration of salts shown in Table 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State the reason for the difference in the concentration of protein between the blood in
the renal artery and the fluid in the kidney tubule.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
484/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(iv) State the reason for the difference in the concentration of glucose between the fluid in
the kidney tubule and the urine.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Dialysis is a treatment used for people with kidney failure.
Some people with kidney failure are given a kidney transplant.
State the advantages of having a kidney transplant instead of dialysis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/F/M/19
485/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows some flowers of a snapdragon plant, Antirrhinum majus.
Snapdragons are insect-pollinated plants.
Fig. 2.1
(i) State one feature visible in Fig. 2.1 that suggests these flowers are insect-pollinated.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State how self-pollination differs from cross-pollination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest why self-pollination might be advantageous to a population of plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
486/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) Petal colour in the flowers of snapdragon plants shows co-dominance.
The gene for petal colour has two co-dominant alleles:
• CR for red petals

• CW for white petals
Table 2.1 shows the genotypes and phenotypes of snapdragon plants with different petal
colours.
Table 2.1
genotype phenotype
C RC R red
CWCW white
C RC W pink
(i) Explain the term co-dominance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/F/M/19
487/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(ii) A botanist crossed two snapdragon plants with pink flowers.
Complete the genetic diagram to show the ratio of expected phenotypes in the offspring.
parental phenotypes pink flower × pink flower
parental genotypes CRCW × CRCW
gametes ........... ........... ........... ...........
offspring genotypes .................... .................... .................... ....................
offspring phenotypes .................... .................... .................... ....................
phenotypic ratio .................................................................................................................

[4]
(iii) The botanist wanted to produce a generation of snapdragons that all had pink flowers.
State the phenotypes of the parent plants that the botanist would need to cross.
Explain your answer.
parent phenotypes ............................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
488/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Reflexes are simple responses that protect the body.
(a) The letters A to G show the components involved in a reflex action.
A stimulus
B motor neurone
C sensory neurone
D receptor cell
E response
F relay neurone
G effector
Put the letters into the correct sequence involved in a reflex action. Two have been done for
you.
A E
[1]
(b) Impulses travel along neurones.
Describe how impulses pass from one neurone to another neurone across a synapse.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/F/M/19
489/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(c) Drugs such as heroin affect the nervous system. When users stop taking heroin they may
experience withdrawal symptoms.
(i) Outline the short-term effects of heroin on the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State two withdrawal symptoms that heroin users may experience.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest why heroin abuse may increase criminal activity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
490/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
4 Pollution is the harm done to the environment by the release of substances from human activities.
Table 4.1 shows the names of some pollutants, their sources and their effects on the environment.
Table 4.1
pollutant source effect on environment
acid rain
enhanced greenhouse
carbon dioxide
effect
enhanced greenhouse
cattle and rice farming
effect
fertilisers crop farming eutrophication
(a) Complete Table 4.1. [4]
(b) When fertiliser is applied to fields, it can lead to eutrophication in lakes and rivers.
(i) Describe and explain what happens in lakes when eutrophication occurs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [6]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/F/M/19
491/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(ii) Suggest ways in which a farmer could reduce the chances of eutrophication occurring
when applying fertiliser to crops.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 12]
492/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 Scientists investigated the effect of cuticle thickness on water loss from the leaves of the balsam
fir tree, Abies balsamea.
The leaves were divided into three groups:
A – thick cuticle
B – medium cuticle
C – thin cuticle
Samples of leaves from each group were weighed. The leaves were placed on a tray in dry air at
20 °C. The samples of leaves were reweighed, at intervals, over 15 hours.
The scientists calculated the mass of each sample of leaves as a percentage of the initial mass.
100
95
mass of the 90
leaves as a
percentage
of the initial
mass 85
80 B
75
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
time / hours
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/F/M/19
493/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(a) (i) Describe and explain the results shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) The investigation was repeated on a day when the air humidity was higher.
Suggest and explain the effect that this would have on the results.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The leaves of pine trees show xerophytic features. Stems and roots also show xerophytic
adaptations.
State one adaptation of the stem and one adaptation of the root in xerophytes.
stem ..........................................................................................................................................
root ...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
494/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) Water is one of the raw materials needed for the production of sugars in photosynthesis.
(i) State the name of the other raw material needed for photosynthesis.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State three ways a plant uses the sugars produced in photosynthesis.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
3 ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 14]
6 Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of the virus that causes measles.
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State the name of the parts of the virus shown in Fig. 6.1 labelled X and Y.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Bacteria belong to the Prokaryote kingdom.
State two ways in which the structure of bacteria differs from the structure of viruses.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/F/M/19
495/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(b) Viruses and some bacteria are pathogenic. Diseases caused by pathogens are transmissible.
(i) State two ways that a pathogen can be transmitted indirectly.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The body has barriers to defend itself against pathogens.
State two mechanical barriers of the body.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Some white blood cells produce antibodies as part of the body’s defence against pathogens.
Describe the role of antibodies in defence of the body.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) The immunity gained after infection by a pathogen is active immunity.
Explain how active immunity differs from passive immunity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/F/M/19
496/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 5 9 1 3 2 7 4 2 5 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/CT) 162740/4
497/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 All commercial breeds of sheep belong to the species Ovis aries.
(a) Define the term species.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
The Merino is a breed of sheep that is farmed mainly for its wool. The wool is very thick and is
made of lots of very thin hairs.
Fig. 1.1 shows a female Merino sheep with her newborn lamb.
Fig. 1.1
(b) The presence of hair is a feature that is only found in mammals.
State two other features that distinguish mammals from all other vertebrates.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
498/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) Merino sheep in South Africa have high quality wool with very thin hairs.
Breeders in New Zealand have used selective breeding programmes to improve the wool of
their sheep to match the quality of South African wool.
Describe the steps that breeders would take to breed sheep that have wool with very thin
hairs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(d) Explain how natural selection differs from selective breeding.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/M/J/19
499/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 The rate of photosynthesis of terrestrial plants can be determined by measuring the uptake of
carbon dioxide.
(a) Explain why plants take up carbon dioxide during photosynthesis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The rate of photosynthesis of parts of individual leaves can be measured using a hand-held
device as shown in Fig. 2.1.
transparent chamber
Fig. 2.1
This apparatus allows air to flow through the transparent chamber that encloses part of the
leaf. The apparatus measures the carbon dioxide concentration of the air entering and leaving
the chamber.
Explain how the results from the apparatus can be used to calculate the rate of photosynthesis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
500/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) A student used the apparatus shown in Fig. 2.1 to investigate the effect of temperature on the
rate of photosynthesis of the leaves of Chinese plantain, Plantago asiatica, at two different
concentrations of carbon dioxide, A and B.
Fig. 2.2 shows the results of the investigation.
40
35
B
1000 ppm CO2
30
25
rate of photosynthesis
/ μmol per m2 per s A
370 ppm CO2
20
15
10
0
10 20 30 40
temperature of leaves / °C
Fig. 2.2
(i) State one environmental factor that should have been kept constant in this investigation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/M/J/19
501/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(ii) Describe the effect of temperature on the rate of photosynthesis when carbon dioxide
concentration A was supplied.
Use the data from Fig. 2.2 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Calculate the percentage increase in the rate of photosynthesis at 30 °C when the carbon
dioxide concentration was increased from A to B as shown in Fig. 2.2.
Show your working and give your answer to the nearest whole number.
............................................................ %
[2]
(iv) Explain the effect of increasing temperature on the rate of photosynthesis for carbon
dioxide concentration B.
Use the term limiting factor in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
502/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(v) The student concluded that carbon dioxide concentration is the factor limiting the rate of
photosynthesis between 30 °C and 35 °C for the results shown for A in Fig. 2.2.
State the evidence for this conclusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/M/J/19
503/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(d) A similar investigation was carried out on Arizona honeysweet, Tidestromia oblongifolia, that
grows in Death Valley in California where the highest temperatures may be greater than
45 °C.
40
35
30
25
/ μmol per m2 per s 20
15
10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
temperature of leaves / °C
Fig. 2.3
Predict and explain what would happen to the rate of photosynthesis if the investigation is
continued at temperatures higher than 45 °C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 16]
504/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
3 (a) Complete the five sentences about the eye and the nervous system.
Structures in the eye change the shape of the lens so that the eye can focus on near and
distant objects. This is called .............................................. .
The radial and circular muscles in the iris of the eye are a pair of ..............................................
muscles that work against each other.
Muscles in the eye are controlled by the nervous system. The ..............................................
nervous system contains only sensory and motor neurones.
The .............................................. nerve from the eye contains sensory neurones that conduct
impulses to the .............................................. .

[5]
(b) Transmission of impulses relies on the flow of ions through the cell membranes of neurones
down their concentration gradients. Active transport is responsible for maintaining the
concentration gradients of ions across the membranes of neurones.
Explain how ions are moved across membranes by active transport.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
505/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(c) Fig. 3.1 shows the junction between two neurones.
presynaptic neurone
enzyme that
breaks down
neurotransmitter
molecules B
postsynaptic neurone
Fig. 3.1
Many drugs interfere with the action of neurotransmitters at the junctions between neurones.
Two drugs that influence the transmission of impulses between neurones are atropine and
eserine. The actions of these drugs are shown in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
drug action at junctions between neurones
atropine blocks receptor molecules for neurotransmitters
eserine blocks the enzyme that breaks down neurotransmitters
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/M/J/19
506/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
Explain the effects of these two drugs on the nervous system using the information in Fig. 3.1
and Table 3.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
(d) A scientific paper was published in 1997 that described the effects of anabolic steroids
on female athletes. Many of these athletes achieved great success in international sport
competitions during the 1960s and 1970s.
Discuss the arguments against the use of anabolic steroids in sport.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 17]
507/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
4 (a) Table 4.1 shows four structures associated with the human male reproductive system.
Complete Table 4.1 by identifying the level of organisation of each structure.
Choose your answers from the list.
cell cell structure organ
organ system organism tissue
Table 4.1
structure level of organisation
epithelium
nucleus
sperm
testis
[4]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows the male reproductive system.
C B
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/M/J/19
508/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
Table 4.2 shows information about the male reproductive system shown in Fig. 4.1.
Complete Table 4.2.
Table 4.2
name of structure function letter in Fig. 4.1
testis
transports sperm but not urine
tube for urine and seminal fluid

through the penis
prostate gland
contains the testes
[5]
(c) Draw an X on Fig. 4.1 on the structure where meiosis occurs. [1]
(d) Sperm and eggs each have a nucleus which is haploid.
(i) Define the term haploid nucleus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the number of chromosomes in a human haploid nucleus.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
509/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 (a) Tissue plasminogen activators (TPAs) are human proteins that are used as drugs to break
down blood clots.
TPAs break down blood clots by activating plasminogen. Plasminogen is a protein that is
always present in the blood.
When activated, plasminogen forms a protease that breaks down fibrin molecules.
(i) Plasminogen is found in the plasma.
State what is meant by the term plasma.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the products of the action of protease on the protein fibrin.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
TPAs can be produced by genetically-engineered bacteria.
Fig. 5.1 shows some of the stages involved in genetically engineering a bacterium to make a TPA.
DNA removed TPA gene

from a human A
cell
DNA removed
from a bacterial
cell
not to scale
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/M/J/19
510/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) (i) State the name of structure A in Fig. 5.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) In the flow chart, X represents the action of an enzyme on a molecule of DNA.
State the name of this enzyme.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The TPA gene is inserted into structure A.
Explain how the gene is inserted into structure A to form structure B as shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iv) Before TPA was made by genetically-engineered bacteria it was only available from
blood donated by people.
Suggest one advantage of producing TPA by genetically-engineered bacteria.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) The genetically-engineered bacteria produce mRNA that is a copy of the human TPA
gene.
Explain the role of mRNA in the bacterium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
511/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 Fig. 6.1 shows some cells from the shoot tip of an onion, Allium cepa.
cell A
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State the evidence visible in Fig. 6.1 that identifies the cells of A. cepa as plant cells.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Cell A is dividing by mitosis.
State the role of mitosis in a shoot tip.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/M/J/19
512/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(b) The area labelled M is a mitochondrion.
Explain why mitochondria have an important role in dividing cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Cells just behind a shoot tip absorb water and grow in length. A plant hormone stimulates cell
elongation and controls the response of stems to gravity.
(i) State the name of the plant hormone that stimulates cell elongation in stems.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how the response of stems to gravity is controlled.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
513/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(d) Some cells in shoot tips become leaf cells and others become cells in the stem or in flowers.
Explain why it is important that only some of the genes in cell A are expressed in these cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/M/J/19
514/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 7 7 4 2 0 4 5 0 3 7 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/CT) 162741/5
515/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Biotechnology is used in the process of bread-making.
Fig. 1.1 shows some of the steps in making bread.
flour, salt and water are put into a bowl
Step 1 mixing
organism A and an energy source are added
Step 2 mixing
dough forms
Step 3 dough left at 35 °C for 2 hours
gas bubbles form in the dough
Step 4 dough is shaped and left at room temperature
dough put into baking tins
Step 5 dough is baked for 30 minutes at 200 °C
bread is made
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the name of organism A in Fig. 1.1.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) State the name of the source of energy used by organism A.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the process that occurs at step 3 that causes gas bubbles to form in
the dough.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the gas that forms to create the gas bubbles in the dough.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
516/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Explain the reasons for the different temperatures used in step 3 and step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State the name of two products of biotechnology, other than bread, that make use of
microorganisms.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
517/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 The concentration of atmospheric carbon dioxide has increased considerably in recent years.
(a) Describe the possible causes of increased atmospheric carbon dioxide.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Soybean plants, Glycine max, were grown in two separate plots.
Each plot used a carbon dioxide enrichment system to control the atmospheric carbon dioxide
concentration.
The atmospheric carbon dioxide concentrations in the two plots were kept at:
• 370 ppm, which is similar to the current atmospheric carbon dioxide concentration
• 550 ppm, which is a possible future atmospheric carbon dioxide concentration.
When the soybean plants were fully grown, scientists calculated the average rates of
photosynthesis at regular intervals from 04:00 to 22:00 for both plots.
25
550 ppm CO2
20
average
rates of 15
photosynthesis 370 ppm CO2
/ μmol per m2 per s 10
0
04:00 06:00 08:00 10:00 12:00 14:00 16:00 18:00 20:00 22:00
time of day
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
518/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
Describe and explain the effect of carbon dioxide concentration on the average rates of
photosynthesis of the soybean plants from 04:00 to 22:00.
Use the data from Fig. 2.1 in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
519/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) The scientists also made observations of the leaf structure of the soybean plants.
Epidermis and mesophyll tissues are adapted for photosynthesis.
Complete Table 2.1 by stating two structural features of each of these tissues and explain
how each feature is an adaptation for photosynthesis.
Table 2.1
how the feature is an adaptation

tissue feature
for photosynthesis
1 ............................................... .............................................................................
.................................................. .............................................................................
.................................................. .............................................................................
epidermis
2 ............................................... .............................................................................
.................................................. .............................................................................
.................................................. .............................................................................
1 ............................................... .............................................................................
.................................................. .............................................................................
.................................................. .............................................................................
mesophyll
2 ............................................... .............................................................................
.................................................. .............................................................................
.................................................. .............................................................................
[4]
(d) When the scientists were working in the plot with a carbon dioxide concentration of 550 ppm,
their breathing rates were higher than when they worked in the other plot.
Suggest why their breathing rates were higher.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
520/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
3 Very small pieces of plastic, called microplastics, are found in many products such as soaps and
toothpaste.
Fig. 3.1 shows toothpaste that contains microplastics.
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) It is estimated that microplastics make up 5% of the mass of some toothpastes.
Each person uses approximately 2 g of toothpaste a day.
There were estimated to be 1.2 × 109 people using toothpaste that contained
microplastics in some countries in 2013.
Calculate the mass of microplastics contained in the toothpaste used on one day in 2013
for these countries.
Show your working and state appropriate units with your answer.
................................................................
[3]
(ii) State one recommendation, other than regular brushing, for the proper care of teeth.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
521/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) Lugworms live in sand on coastal beaches and are eaten by wading birds. Lugworms feed on
diatoms. Diatoms are photosynthetic protoctists that require ammonium ions as a source of
nitrogen. Beach sand contains ammonium ions.
(i) Construct a food chain for these marine organisms.
[2]
(ii) There is some evidence that microplastics affect ammonium ions. Affected ammonium
ions cannot be used by diatoms. A group of researchers thought that this could affect
lugworms living in sand polluted by microplastics.
The researchers collected 30 healthy lugworms, all with the same initial mass.
They divided them into three groups, A, B and C. Each group contained 10 lugworms.
Each group of lugworms was placed in a bucket containing the same mass of beach
sand and ammonium ions and:
A biodegradable microplastics
B non-biodegradable microplastics
C no microplastics.
The measurements that were recorded at the end of the investigation are shown in
Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
group
variable measured
A B C
ammonium ion concentration in the
19.3 47.0 27.4
bucket / µmol per dm3
average respiration rate of lugworms
5.2 9.6 5.1
/ mg oxygen per hour per g mass
volume of lugworm faeces / cm3 60.0 25.0 40.0
average lugworm mass / g 9.1 7.0 9.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
522/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
Describe and explain why the researchers concluded that non-biodegradable

microplastics are the most harmful to lugworms.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) Ammonium ions are an important part of the nitrogen cycle. They can be converted into
nitrate ions, which are used by plants and protoctists such as diatoms.
(i) State the name of the molecules that are converted into ammonium ions in the nitrogen
cycle.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the process of converting ammonium ions into nitrate ions.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain the effects of nitrate ion deficiency on plant growth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
523/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(d) Non-biodegradable plastics are also harmful to terrestrial ecosystems.
Discuss the effects of non-biodegradable plastics on terrestrial ecosystems.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
524/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Neurones are part of the nervous system. Neurones are connected to each other by synapses.
(a) (i) Describe how the structure of a neurone is related to its function.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The nervous system is made up of the central nervous system and the peripheral
nervous system.
State the names of the organs that make up the central nervous system.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Reflex actions allow the body to respond rapidly to changes in the external environment.
(i) Outline the pathway in a reflex arc in response to shining a bright light into the eye.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Doctors sometimes check the reflexes of people who are unconscious.
Suggest why reflexes occur in people who are unconscious.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
525/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(c) Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of a synapse and parts of two neurones.
G F
Fig. 4.1
(i) State the names of the labelled parts in Fig. 4.1.
E ........................................................................................................................................
F ........................................................................................................................................
G .......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Draw an arrow on Fig. 4.1 to show the direction in which the signal travels across the
synapse. [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
526/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 (a) The testes are part of the endocrine system because they produce hormones.
(i) State the name of the hormone released from the testes.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The testes are also part of the reproductive system. This means that the testes are part
of two organ systems.
Complete Fig. 5.1 by stating two other organs that also belong to two organ systems.
One has been completed for you.
organ organ system
male reproductive system
testes
endocrine system
male reproductive system
endocrine system
Fig. 5.1
[4]
527/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
Fig. 5.2 is a photomicrograph of part of a mammalian testis.
Fig. 5.2
(b) The cells labelled M in Fig. 5.2 are undergoing meiosis.
Explain why meiosis is necessary in the testes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
528/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(c) Fig. 5.3 is a photomicrograph of a section through a sperm.
Fig. 5.3
Table 5.1 shows information about the sperm shown in Fig. 5.3.
Complete Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
letter on Fig. 5.3 name of the structure function
haploid nucleus
releases energy
flagellum
[4]
529/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(d) Draw and label one human egg cell.
Include at least one labelled feature that is not found in a sperm cell.
[3]
(e) Describe what happens to a fertilised egg cell before implantation in the uterus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
530/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 Fig. 6.1 shows some of the many different varieties of potato, Solanum tuberosum, that are
cultivated across the world for food.
Fig. 6.1
All varieties of S. tuberosum are classified as the same species.
(a) Define the term species.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
531/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a method of reproduction that some potato farmers use to produce more
potato plants.
parent plant
offspring
potato tuber
plant pot
not to scale
Fig. 6.2
Describe the advantages of the type of reproduction shown in Fig. 6.2 in crop production.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Potato tubers store starch.
Explain why plants store starch.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/M/J/19
532/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 1 1 8 0 0 3 8 1 3 2 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/CT) 162742/4
533/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Bacteria are classified in the Prokaryote kingdom.
(a) State two features of animal cells that are not found in bacteria.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The bacterium Bacillus megaterium was grown in the laboratory fermenter shown in Fig. 1.1.
air lock water

sterile air
magnetic
stirrer
bacteria, source of
nitrogen and glucose
Fig. 1.1
(i) Explain why a source of nitrogen and glucose were added to the fermenter.
nitrogen .............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
glucose ..............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest why it is important to stir the contents of the fermenter continuously.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
534/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Samples were taken from the fermenter at frequent intervals and the number of live bacteria
was determined. The results are shown in Fig. 1.2.
800
C
700
600
500
number of
live bacteria D
400
/ million per
cm3 B
300
200
100
A
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / hours
Fig. 1.2
Describe and explain what happens to the number of live bacteria shown in the stages
labelled A, B, C and D in Fig. 1.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 13]
535/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 (a) State the word equation for photosynthesis.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Scientists investigated the effect of light intensity on the rate of photosynthesis in the leaves
of eucalyptus trees at two different concentrations of carbon dioxide, A and B.
/ μmol per m2 per s
50
45 B
40
35
30
25
A
20
15
10
0
0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000
light intensity / arbitrary units
Key:
A carbon dioxide concentration
140 ppm
B carbon dioxide concentration
1000 ppm
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
536/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(i) Suggest and explain why the scientists kept the temperature of the leaves at 20 °C while
they recorded results.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the percentage increase in the rate of photosynthesis at a light intensity of
1250 arbitrary units when the carbon dioxide concentration was increased from 140 ppm
to 1000 ppm.
............................................................ %
[3]
(iii) Describe the effect of increasing light intensity on the rate of photosynthesis when the
concentration of carbon dioxide was 140 ppm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
537/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(iv) Explain the effect of increasing light intensity on the rate of photosynthesis when the
concentration of carbon dioxide was 1000 ppm.
Use the term limiting factor in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
538/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Cotton, Gossypium hirsutum, is grown for the fibres that form within the fruits after fertilisation, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
Fibres from the fruits of cotton plants are used in the textile industry.
fibres
Fig. 3.1
Cotton plants have been genetically engineered to produce a protein that is toxic to the caterpillars
of several insect pests. This gives the cotton plants resistance to the pests.
The cry gene for pest resistance was isolated from the bacterium Bacillus thuringiensis and
inserted into the cells of cotton plants as shown in Fig. 3.2.
cry gene
A A
bacterial
DNA plasmid
cotton plant cell

not to scale
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
539/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(a) An enzyme cuts the cry gene from the DNA of B. thuringiensis.
(i) State the name of the enzyme that cuts DNA.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the regions labelled A on Fig. 3.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain how the DNA is inserted into the plasmid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The plasmids containing the cry gene are inserted into the cells of cotton plants.
Outline how the cells of cotton plants use the cry gene to make the toxic protein.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
540/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) Outline the advantages to farmers of growing genetically engineered cotton plants that
contain the toxic protein.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
541/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Mammals have a double circulation.
(a) State what is meant by the term double circulation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Table 4.1 shows some information about the functions of the components of blood.
Complete Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
function type of cell
production of antibodies
phagocyte
promotes blood clotting
transports oxygen
[4]
(c) Blood is transported in arteries and veins.
Complete the drawings of the cross-sections of an artery and a vein to show the differences
between these two types of blood vessel. Label the lumen in each drawing.
artery vein
[2]
542/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(d) A diagram of a mammalian heart and associated blood vessels is shown in Fig. 4.1.
A
L
J D
Fig. 4.1
(i) Sketch arrows on Fig. 4.1 to show the pathway taken by deoxygenated blood from the
heart towards the lungs. [2]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
543/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Table 4.2 contains statements about the structures visible in Fig. 4.1.
Complete Table 4.2 by:
• stating the name of each structure

• identifying the structure with the corresponding letter from Fig. 4.1.
Table 4.2
statement name of structure letter from Fig. 4.1

chamber that creates the highest
blood pressure
blood vessel containing blood with
the highest concentration of oxygen
structure that prevents blood going
from ventricle to atrium
structure that prevents backflow of
blood from artery to ventricle
chamber that receives blood from
vena cava
[5]
(e) Mammals also have a lymphatic system.
Outline the functions of the lymphatic system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 17]
544/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 Sickle-cell anaemia is an inherited disease.
Fig. 5.1 is a photomicrograph of some blood cells from a person who has sickle-cell anaemia.
a sickle-shaped red blood cell
Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain how red blood cells become sickle-shaped.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
545/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(b) Some people who have sickle-cell anaemia have parents who do not have sickle-cell
anaemia.
Explain how people with sickle-cell anaemia inherit the disease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Sickle-cell anaemia is most common in areas of the world where the infectious disease
malaria is found.
Some species of the genus Plasmodium cause malaria in humans.
(i) Define the term species.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
546/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(ii) The distribution of sickle-cell anaemia is the result of natural selection.
Explain the distribution of the sickle-cell allele in human populations.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 14]
6 Fig. 6.1 is a photomicrograph of part of a cell from the pancreas that produces enzymes that are
released into the small intestine.
×20 000
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
547/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(a) (i) Structure Q is part of the nucleus of the cell.
State one function of a nucleus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the names of the structures labelled P and R in Fig. 6.1.
P ........................................................................................................................................
R ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The structure labelled S transports enzymes to the cell membrane for release into the
pancreatic duct. These structures contain molecules of amylase, trypsin and lipase.
Complete the sentences with the most appropriate words.
Enzymes are made of protein and act as .............................................. because they increase
the rate of chemical reactions, but are not changed in those reactions. Amylase speeds up the
digestion of .............................................. to .............................................. Trypsin continues
the chemical digestion of protein begun by the enzyme .............................................. in the
stomach.
The optimum pH for pancreatic enzymes is greater than pH 7. Bile is produced
by the .............................................. and enters the small intestine, where it
.............................................. stomach acid to provide the appropriate pH. Bile also breaks
down fat by .............................................. to increase the surface area for the action of lipase.
[7]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/M/J/19
548/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 4 0 8 1 1 6 6 6 2 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/CT) 173042/4
549/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 All living organisms are placed into groups according to their features.
Myriapods are one of the main groups of arthropods.
(a) State two features of myriapods that can be used to distinguish them from other arthropods.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
Fig. 1.1 shows that there are four main groups of arthropods.
arthropods
group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4

myriapods
Fig. 1.1
(b) State the names of two of the other groups of arthropods in Fig. 1.1.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Myriapods can be classified into four classes, 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Fig. 1.2 is a dichotomous key that can be used to distinguish the four classes of myriapods.
myriapods
no eyes eyes present
hairs on most no hairs on one leg on two legs on

body segments body segments each side of each each side of each
body segment body segment
class 1 class 2 class 3 class 4
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
550/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
species J
species K
species L
species M
species N
species O
not to scale
Fig. 1.3
Complete Table 1.1 by using the key in Fig. 1.2 to classify the six myriapods in Fig. 1.3 into
the four classes.
Table 1.1
letter(s) of species from

class
Fig. 1.3 in each class
[3]
551/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(d) Fig. 1.4 is a photograph of the myriapod, Apheloria virginiensis.
5 cm
Fig. 1.4
(i) State the genus name and kingdom name for the myriapod shown in Fig. 1.4.
genus ................................................................................................................................
kingdom .............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) A. virginiensis releases the poison cyanide when it is attacked by predators.

Cyanide stops enzymes in the mitochondria from functioning.
Suggest why cells die if the mitochondria do not function.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
552/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 Phloem is used to transport sucrose and amino acids in plants. Sucrose is a carbohydrate.
(a) Describe the uses of carbohydrates and amino acids in plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a diagram of a plant. The arrows point to circles containing magnified
cross-sections of those parts of the plant.
upper surface
not to scale
Fig. 2.1
Label the position of the phloem in each of the three magnified sections in Fig. 2.1.
Use a label line and the letter P for each section. [3]
553/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) Aphids are used by investigators to discover how plants transport sucrose.
Fig. 2.2 shows an aphid with its mouthparts inserted into a plant stem to feed on the liquid in
the phloem.
5 mm
Fig. 2.2
A plant was put in a dark cupboard for several days.

Four aphids, A, B, C and D, were then placed on the plant in the dark cupboard as shown in
Fig. 2.3.
dark cupboard
aphid B
aphid C
aphid A
aphid D
Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
554/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(i) Immediately after the aphids were placed on the plant it was observed that:
• all the aphids ingested the same volume of liquid from the phloem
• aphid D ingested the highest concentration of sucrose.
Explain why aphid D ingested the highest concentration of sucrose.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Many crop farmers try to prevent insects such as aphids from damaging their plants.
Describe how modern technology is used to reduce damage to crop plants by insects.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Other insects are useful to crop farmers.
Give one example of how insects are useful to farmers.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 14]
555/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Kidneys are important for excretion.
(a) Explain the purpose of excretion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Sketch a simple diagram of a human kidney and its ureter.
Label the cortex, medulla and ureter on your diagram.
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
556/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(c) Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of a glomerulus in a kidney.
Fig. 3.1
(i) Describe the structure of a glomerulus.
You may refer to Fig. 3.1 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe the role of the glomerulus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
557/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(d) Table 3.1 shows some comparisons between a human and a mouse.
Table 3.1
feature human mouse

body mass / kg 60.0 0.025
kidney mass / g 320.0 0.310
water intake / dm3 per day 1.5 0.005
water reabsorption / dm3 per day 179.0 0.168
salt filtration rate / g per day 580.0 0.556
salt reabsorption / g per day 575.0 0.551
(i) Table 3.1 shows that salts are reabsorbed in the kidneys of both humans and mice.
Describe how salts are reabsorbed against a concentration gradient.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
558/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(ii) Scientists stated a hypothesis:
“humans and mice reabsorb salt at almost the same rate in relation to the size of
their kidneys”
Determine whether the data in Table 3.1 supports this hypothesis.
Show your working.
human mouse
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) Table 3.1 also shows that water is reabsorbed in the kidneys of both humans and mice.
State the name of the process that mammals use to reabsorb water.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Water and salt are reabsorbed in the kidneys.
State the name of one other molecule that is also reabsorbed in kidney tubules.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 18]
559/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 (a) The body has defence mechanisms to protect it from infection.
Outline the body’s defence mechanisms.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) State the name of a type of drug that can be used to treat bacterial infections.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
560/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 Fig. 5.1 shows an angiogram of a heart before and after treatment for coronary heart disease
(CHD). An angiogram is an image of the blood flow through the blood vessels of the heart.
before treatment after treatment
Fig. 5.1
(a) The arrow on Fig. 5.1 shows the position of a blockage in a blood vessel.
(i) State the name of the blocked blood vessel.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The blockage is caused by a blood clot.
Describe how a blood clot forms.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) State the name of a drug that can be used to treat coronary heart disease.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
561/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(b) Many health specialists think that the risk of coronary heart disease can be reduced by doing
regular exercise.
A long-term study of a large group of women was used to test this hypothesis.
The women were between 35 and 45 years old at the start of the study.
Every two years the same group of women were asked how much they were exercising.
After 28 years the researchers analysed their data:

• They calculated the average time spent exercising per week by each woman.
• They put the women into categories determined by how much exercise they had
done.
• For each category, they calculated the number of women who died from coronary
heart disease (CHD).
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
number of CHD
deaths per 1.2
10 000 women
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
0.0 0.1 – 2.0 2.1 – 4.0 4.1 – 10.0
exercise / hours per week
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
562/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(i) Calculate the percentage decrease in the number of CHD deaths per 10 000 women
between those who did no exercise and those who exercised for 4.1 to 10.0 hours a
week, using the data in Fig. 5.2.
number of CHD deaths per 10 000 women who did no exercise .......................
number of CHD deaths per 10 000 women who did 4.1 to 10.0 hours per week of exercise
.......................
Space for working.
........................................................... %
[3]
(ii) Health professionals wanted to use the results of this study to encourage the whole
population to take more exercise.
Discuss the arguments for and against health professionals using this study in this way.
Use the information about how the study was designed and the results in Fig. 5.2 in your
arguments.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
563/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(c) Exercise causes heart rate to increase.
Explain why exercise causes an increase in heart rate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 16]
6 Fish are an important part of a balanced diet for many people.
(a) Fish are a good source of vitamin D.
State one effect of a diet that is deficient in vitamin D.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Many fish stocks have declined.
Marine ecologists considered the three topics shown in Fig. 6.1 when they discussed the
decline of fish stocks.
reasons why fish species risks to a fish species when

become endangered population size decreases
methods for maintaining

fish stocks
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
564/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
Describe the key points for each of the three topics shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 7]
565/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
7 Fig. 7.1 shows part of the nitrogen cycle.
nitrogen in
process A atmosphere
nitrogen fixation
protein
synthesis proteins in deamination
plant and
amino acids animals and
animal waste
plants
compound X
process B
nitrate ions
in soil
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) State two ways that nitrogen fixation can occur.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the names of processes A and B in Fig. 7.1.
process A ..........................................................................................................................
process B ..........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State the name of compound X in Fig. 7.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Define the term deamination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
566/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(b) State the name of the structure in a cell where protein synthesis occurs.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State the name of an enzyme that digests proteins.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0610/41/O/N/19
567/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 1 0 7 2 4 3 2 1 9 0 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.

DC (ST/CT) 173043/4
568/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows four arthropods.
C D
not to scale
Fig. 1.1
(i) State two features, visible in Fig. 1.1, that are common to all arthropods.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
569/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(ii) Fig. 1.2 is a dichotomous key for the arthropods shown in Fig. 1.1.
Complete Fig. 1.2 by writing suitable statements in:
• box 2 to identify species B
• box 3 to separate species C and A.
START
box 1 yes
animal has more than ten pairs of legs D
no
box 2 yes
B
no
box 3
yes
A
no
Fig. 1.2
[2]
570/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(b) The Hawaiian happy-face spider, Theridion grallator, is found on several of the Hawaiian
islands. Some of the spiders have a very distinctive pattern on their bodies as shown in
Fig. 1.3.
Fig. 1.3
(i) State one feature, visible in Fig. 1.3, that identifies T. grallator as an arachnid.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Scientists think that the pattern on the bodies of the spiders is an adaptive feature.
Explain the term adaptive feature with reference to this pattern.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
571/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(c) DNA can be extracted from the webs of spiders. This DNA can be used to identify the species
of spider that made the web, and the species of prey caught in the web.
Explain how DNA extracted from spider webs can be used to identify different species.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Many species of spider are thought to be endangered.
State three reasons why animal species such as spiders become endangered.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 13]
572/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
2 Fig. 2.1 shows part of a cross-section of the stem of a young sunflower plant.
area Y
Fig. 2.1
(a) Draw a circle around one vascular bundle on Fig. 2.1.
Label the xylem in the vascular bundle with the letter X. [2]
(b) Explain how the cells in area Y are able to support the stem so that it stays upright.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
573/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) Researchers used carbon dioxide that contained a traceable source of carbon (13C) to
investigate translocation of sucrose from the leaves of bean plants, Phaseolus vulgaris.
Fig. 2.2 shows that glucose produced in photosynthesis is converted to sucrose for
translocation.
carbon dioxide glucose sucrose
Fig. 2.2
Researchers selected four plants, Q, R, S and T, which had leaves that were of similar sizes.
The leaves on the four plants were supplied with 13CO2.
After the leaves had started to make sucrose, the researchers cut away a ring of tissue in
different places as shown in Fig. 2.3. The rings of tissue that were removed from plants R, S
and T contained the phloem.
Q R S T
13CO 13CO 13CO 13CO

2 2 2 2
Key: the positions on the stems where rings of tissue containing phloem were removed.
Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
574/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
The quantities of sucrose containing 13C in the shoot tips and in the roots were determined.
Table 2.1
quantity of sucrose containing 13C / arbitrary units

plant
shoot tip root
Q 3.24 0.94
R 0.00 0.44
S 4.14 0.00
T 0.00 0.00
Describe and explain the effect of removing the phloem on the translocation of sucrose in
plants Q, R, S and T.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 10]
575/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
3 Cells in the lining of the stomach secrete gastric juice, which contains hydrochloric acid and
pepsin.
(a) (i) State two roles of hydrochloric acid in the stomach.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the function of pepsin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Define the term assimilation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) There are stem cells in the epithelial tissue that forms the lining of the stomach.
Explain why these stem cells are necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
576/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(d) The epithelial cells of the small intestine have many microvilli.
State the role of the microvilli.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
577/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(e) Lactobacillus is a type of bacterium. A study was carried out to investigate the ability of
Lactobacillus to attach to the epithelial cells that form the lining of the small intestine.
Researchers added Lactobacillus bacteria to epithelial cells that had been grown in Petri
dishes.
Every 15 minutes, the researchers estimated the average number of bacteria that were
attached to the epithelial cells in the Petri dishes.
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
average number
of bacteria
70
attached to
epithelial cells
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
time / minutes
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
578/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
Calculate the percentage increase in the average number of bacteria attached to epithelial
cells from 45 minutes to 75 minutes.
average number of bacteria at 45 minutes .................. .
average number of bacteria at 75 minutes .................. .
Space for working.
............................................................ %
[3]
[Total: 13]
579/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
4 (a) Explain how the human gas exchange system is protected against pathogens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Tuberculosis (TB) is a transmissible disease caused by a bacterial pathogen. The spread of
this disease can be controlled by vaccination.
Explain how vaccination provides a defence against transmissible diseases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) TB is a disease that can be treated with antibiotics. HIV infection cannot be treated with
antibiotics.
Explain why viral diseases cannot be treated with antibiotics.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
580/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(d) Lung cancer is a disease that is strongly linked with smoking tobacco.
Fig. 4.1 shows some data about smoking and lung cancer in country A between 1900 and
2020 (2020 data has been estimated):
• percentage of the male population that smoke tobacco

• percentage of the female population that smoke tobacco
• number of deaths in males from lung cancer per 100 000 of the male population
• number of deaths in females from lung cancer per 100 000 of the female population.
percentage of deaths from

population that lung cancer per
smoke tobacco 100 000
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
0 0
1900 1920 1940 1960 1980 2000 2020
Key: year
percentage of population that smoke tobacco deaths from lung cancer per 100 000
male female male female
Fig. 4.1
(i) Describe the differences between the percentages of males and females in country A
that smoke as shown in Fig. 4.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Fig. 4.2 shows the same smoking statistics for country B between 1950 and 2020.
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
581/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
percentage of deaths from

population that lung cancer per
smoke tobacco 100 000
100 100
90 90
80 80
70 70
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
0 0
1900 1920 1940 1960 1980 2000 2020
Key: year
percentage of population that smoke tobacco deaths from lung cancer per 100 000
male female male female
Fig. 4.2
Discuss the evidence for and against this statement:
‘The changes in the percentage of the population that smoke tobacco, and the deaths
from lung cancer per 100 000, follow the same trends in males and in females.’
Use the information for country A in Fig. 4.1 and country B in Fig. 4.2 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [6]
[Total: 19]
582/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
5 Grass plants are wind-pollinated. Fig. 5.1 shows a flower from a species of grass plant.
B
D
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Describe and explain how the features of the flower shown in Fig. 5.1 are adaptations for
wind-pollination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State one letter in Fig. 5.1 that identifies a structure where meiosis occurs.
.................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
583/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(b) Wheat has flowers similar to those in Fig. 5.1, but reproduces by self-pollination.
Explain the consequences of self-pollination for a population of plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Wheat is an important crop plant in many countries. Wheat can be infected by diseases
leading to total loss of the crop which results in famine.
Outline factors, other than plant diseases, that can cause famines.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
584/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(d) Black stem rust is a disease of wheat that is caused by a fungus.
Plant breeders used two varieties of wheat to produce a variety of wheat that is both
rust-resistant and has a high yield.
Fig. 5.2 shows the breeding programme that was used.
step 1 rust-resistant variety of × variety of wheat with a high yield

wheat with a low yield
step 2 new variety 1 × variety of wheat with a high yield
step 3 selected rust-resistant offspring × variety of wheat with a high yield
repeat step 3 for several generations
rust-resistant variety with a high yield
Fig. 5.2
(i) Suggest how plant breeders make sure that the plants that they use for step 3 are
rust-resistant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why step 3 is repeated for many generations before the new rust-resistant
variety is made available for farmers to grow.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
585/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
21
(e) Wheat plants are monocotyledons.
State one feature of monocotyledons that can be used to distinguish them from dicotyledons.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 15]
586/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
22
6 Carbon dioxide forms approximately 0.04% of the atmosphere.
Fig. 6.1 shows part of the carbon cycle.
carbon dioxide
A B
feeding death
plants animals decomposers
death
D
coal, oil, gas
Fig. 6.1
(a) Complete Table 6.1 by naming the processes labelled A to D in Fig. 6.1.
Table 6.1
letter on
name of the process in the carbon cycle
Fig. 6.1
[4]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
587/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
23
(b) Complete the sentences by writing the missing words in the spaces.
Carbon dioxide is a greenhouse gas. Greenhouse gases trap .................................................
in the atmosphere. Water vapour is the most common greenhouse gas in the atmosphere.
Another greenhouse gas is methane which is released from .................................................
and ................................................. . Carbon dioxide and methane released from human
activities over the past 200 years have contributed to the .................................................
greenhouse effect.
Other atmospheric pollutants can cause acid rain. One of these is
................................................. which is a waste gas from some power stations.
One source of pollution in both aquatic and terrestrial ecosystems is
................................................. plastics. [6]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0610/42/O/N/19
588/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 9 8 4 9 3 1 5 0 1 1 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/CT) 173044/4
589/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) The ant-mimic jumping spider, Myrmarachne formicaria, is shown in Fig. 1.1.
The common name of this species describes its behaviour. It is an arachnid that tricks its prey
because it looks like the insects that it eats.
Fig. 1.1
(i) Suggest which trophic level in a food chain M. formicaria could belong to.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the genus of the spider shown in Fig. 1.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Some keys use paired choices of features to identify species such as the ant-mimic
jumping spider.
State the name of this type of key.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/O/N/19
590/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) Spiders are classified as arachnids. Arachnids are one of the main groups of arthropods.
Fig. 1.2 shows diagrams of six arthropods, four of which are arachnids.
A B C
D E F not to scale
Fig. 1.2
(i) State two common features of all the arthropods, visible in Fig. 1.2.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State two common features of all arachnids that can be used to distinguish them from
other arthropods.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State the letters of the four arachnids shown in Fig. 1.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The features shown in Fig. 1.2 are morphological features. Many traditional methods of
classification used morphology.
State the name of one other type of feature that can also be used in classification.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
591/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Plants produce glucose in leaves and convert some of it to sucrose.
(a) (i) Explain how glucose is produced in leaves.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State the name of the process that plants use to move sucrose from a source to a sink.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Roots can be an example of a sink.
Explain why sometimes roots act as a source rather than a sink.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/O/N/19
592/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) The movement of sucrose in plants can be modelled using laboratory apparatus.
Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus used to model the movement of sucrose in a plant:
• Partially permeable bags were attached tightly to the ends of tube Q.

• The bag representing a source was filled with a coloured sucrose solution.
• The bag representing a sink was filled with water.
• The containers and tube Q and tube S were filled with water.
tube Q
bag representing a
source containing a
coloured sucrose
solution bag representing
a sink containing
partially water
permeable
membrane P partially permeable
membrane R
water
tube S
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2 shows the position of the coloured sucrose solution 30 minutes after the apparatus
was set up.
The arrows show the direction of the movement of the liquids.
movement of sucrose solution

tube Q
bag representing a
source
bag representing
a sink
partially
permeable
membrane P partially permeable
membrane R
water
tube S
movement of water
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/O/N/19
593/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(i) State the name of the tissue represented by tube Q and the name of the tissue
represented by tube S in Fig. 2.2.
Q .......................................................................................................................................
S ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain why the sucrose solution moves along tube Q in the model in Fig. 2.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) In plants the movement of sucrose is usually continuous. However, after 2 hours the
movement of sucrose in tube Q in Fig. 2.2 stopped.
Suggest why the movement of sucrose in tube Q stopped.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Amino acids are also transported through plants.
State the name of the mineral ion that is used to make amino acids.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 14]
594/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Carbohydrates are an important component of a balanced diet.
The flow chart in Fig. 3.1 shows some of the processes that happen to carbohydrates in food that
is eaten.
ingestion of large biological molecules
chemical digestion
absorption into the blood via the alimentary canal
increase in blood glucose concentration
assimilation in the liver
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/O/N/19
595/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(a) Describe what happens to carbohydrates in the human body between ingestion and
assimilation in the liver.
Use the information in Fig. 3.1 as a guide.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [8]
596/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(b) Mineral salts are another important component of a balanced diet.
State the importance of calcium ions and iron ions in a balanced diet.
calcium ions ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
iron ions ....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) Consuming too much of some mineral salts, such as sodium chloride, increases the risk of
developing coronary heart disease (CHD).
Doctors studied the effect of diet on the risk of developing CHD.
The doctors first selected volunteers who had a high salt diet.
The doctors assessed the volunteers’ overall risk of developing CHD and monitored their
blood pressure.
(i) List two factors, other than diet and blood pressure, that the doctors considered when
assessing the overall risk of the volunteers developing CHD.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The doctors used urine tests to identify volunteers who had a high salt diet.
Explain why urine tests are a good indicator of how much salt has been consumed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
597/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(d) The volunteers were divided into two groups.
The mass of salt consumed by both groups was changed every 4 weeks:
• low salt intake for 4 weeks
• medium salt intake for 4 weeks
• high salt intake for 4 weeks.
In addition, group 2 was given other changes to their diet but group 1 was not.
(i) Suggest one component of the diet of group 2, other than salt, that the doctors changed
to further reduce the risk of developing CHD.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
The systolic blood pressure of the volunteers was measured every 4 weeks.
These results are shown in Fig. 3.2.
18.0
Key:
17.5 group 1
group 2
average systolic 17.0
blood pressure
/ kPa 16.5
16.0
15.5
15.0
low medium high
salt intake
Fig. 3.2
(ii) Calculate the percentage increase in the average systolic blood pressure of the group 1
volunteers when they increased their salt intake from low to high.
low salt intake ............................... kPa
high salt intake ............................... kPa
Space for working.
.......................................................... %
[3]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/O/N/19
598/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(iii) The doctors concluded that some diets reduce the risk of CHD.
Give evidence from Fig. 3.2 to support this conclusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 23]
4 Forest ecosystems are threatened by many human activities.
(a) (i) Describe reasons why people cut down forests.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Describe how forests can be conserved.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
599/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(b) Ecologists in one country were concerned that some mammals had been affected by
deforestation.
Fig. 4.1 is a diagram showing how deforestation affected one area of forest.
Key:
forest
cleared land
original forest
many trees were cut down
small forest area
remaining forest
large forest area
Fig. 4.1
The ecologists studied eight species of mammal. They recorded how many of the small and
large areas of the remaining forest contained each of the eight species.
Two species, the black rat and the house mouse, are not usually found in this forest
ecosystem. They were introduced to the area by humans many years ago before any trees
were cut down.
The other six species are known to live in this forest ecosystem.
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/O/N/19
600/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
Table 4.1
percentage of small percentage of large

average body
species of mammal forest areas containing forest areas containing
mass / g
the species the species
house mouse* 18 46 42
brown antechinus 40 62 83
swamp rat 130 15 25
bush rat 160 85 100
black rat* 200 15 0
southern brown bandicoot 850 31 92
long-nosed potoroo 1100 8 17
long-nosed bandicoot 1300 8 25
*introduced species
(i) State which mammal in Table 4.1 showed almost no preference between small and large
areas of forest.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The ecologists made a hypothesis:
‘Larger areas of forest are better for the conservation of mammals.’
Discuss the evidence from Table 4.1 to support or reject this hypothesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 11]
601/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 Genetic engineering is an example of an important biotechnology.
(a) Complete the passage below by filling in each space with a suitable word.
DNA is a biological molecule found in the ................................................. of an animal cell.
The sequence of the ................................................. in mRNA determines the order of the
amino acids that will be assembled into a ................................................. .
When carrying out genetic engineering, sections of human DNA called
................................................. are cut using restriction enzymes. Next bacterial plasmids
are cut with the ................................................. restriction enzymes to form complementary
................................................. ends.
The cut section of human DNA is inserted into the cut plasmid and they are joined together
to form a ................................................. plasmid. These plasmids are inserted into
................................................. and replication occurs. This process is used to produce
human ................................................. that is used to treat people with diabetes.

[9]
(b) In addition to genetic engineering, enzymes are also useful in other biotechnologies.
State two examples of how enzymes are used in another biotechnology.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/O/N/19
602/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 Fig. 6.1 is a photomicrograph of a blood clot.
L
J
Fig. 6.1
(a) Describe how a blood clot forms.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
603/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(b) State the importance of blood clotting.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) There are four blood group phenotypes A, B, AB and O in humans.
(i) Define the term phenotype.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the name of the type of inheritance that is shown by blood groups.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the two possible genotypes for a person who has the phenotype blood group A.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2019 0610/43/O/N/19
604/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
Cambridge International Examinations

* 8 8 5 9 8 1 2 6 6 1 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.

This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (SC/FC) 145585/4
605/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 (a) (i) Fig. 1.1 is a branching key used to identify different species of bacteria.
Do the bacteria have flagella?
Yes No
Do the bacteria have Do the bacteria have

more than one flagellum? a spiral shape?
Yes No Yes No
Do the bacteria have flagella A B Do the bacteria form

attached at one end only? a chain?
Yes No Yes No
C D E F
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 shows six different species of bacteria.
Use the key to identify the six different species of bacteria.
Write the letters on the lines in Fig. 1.2.
..................................... ..................................... .....................................
..................................... ..................................... .....................................

[5]
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
606/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(ii) State the name of the kingdom that bacteria belong to.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State one similarity between the structure of bacteria and the structure of viruses.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Fig. 1.3 is a photomicrograph of Vibrio cholerae, the bacterium that causes cholera.
45 mm
magnification ×17 300
Fig. 1.3
(i) Write the formula that would be used to calculate the actual length of the bacterium (not
including the flagellum) in Fig. 1.3.
[1]
607/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(ii) The actual length of the bacterium shown in Fig. 1.3 is 0.0026 mm.
Convert this value to micrometres (µm).
Space for working.
..................................................... µm [1]
(d) (i) Describe and explain the effects of cholera bacteria on the gut.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(ii) Suggest one treatment for cholera.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
608/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 A study estimated the number of people with chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) in
India. Data were collected from two groups of people, those who lived in cities and those who
lived in villages.
18 Key:
city
16
village
14
12
estimated numbers
of people with 10
COPD / million
8
0
1996 2001 2006 2011 2016
year
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
609/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(a) Compare the number of people with COPD in cities with the number of people with COPD in
villages and suggest reasons for the differences.
Use the data in Fig. 2.1 to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
(b) (i) Explain how the body prevents particles in inspired air from reaching the gas exchange
surfaces.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
610/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(ii) State two ways in which the composition of inspired air differs from the composition of
expired air.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Alveoli are well-ventilated to provide efficient gas exchange.
(i) State the name of the muscles that cause the ribs to move during ventilation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) During inspiration the pressure and volume in the thorax changes.
State these changes.
pressure ............................................................................................................................
volume ...............................................................................................................................
[1]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
611/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
3 (a) Ecologists studied an area of woodland and estimated the biomass of each trophic level for
one of the food chains in the woodland.
Some students wanted to use the data to draw a pyramid of biomass for the food chain.
Table 3.1 shows the students’ table.
The students added a column to calculate the width of the bars they would need to draw.
Table 3.1
trophic level biomass / g m−2 width of bar / cm
1 producer 120 12.0
2 primary consumer 48 4.8
3 secondary consumer 16 1.6
4 tertiary consumer 2
(i) Complete Table 3.1 by calculating the missing value and writing it in the table. [1]
(ii) Using the information in Table 3.1, draw a pyramid of biomass.
Label each bar with the trophic level.
[3]
(b) A type of organism gains energy from waste organic material from all trophic levels.
State the name of this type of organism.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
612/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) (i) Outline how organisms in the first trophic level of the woodland food chain produce
biomass using energy from the Sun.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why the fourth trophic level has the least biomass in this food chain.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) The woodland is a conservation area.
Outline the possible benefits of conserving this specific area of woodland.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
613/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of the human female reproductive system.
F
B
E
D C
Fig. 4.1
(a) Complete Table 4.1 to show the letter and the name of each of the structures that perform
these functions.
Table 4.1
function letter name
releases oestrogen
site of fertilisation
site of implantation
dilates during the process of birth
[4]
(b) Fertilisation is the fusion of the nuclei of a male gamete and a female gamete resulting in a
zygote.
State the number of chromosomes present in a human:
female gamete ...........................
zygote ........................................
[2]
614/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(c) Chlamydia is a sexually transmitted infection (STI).
Fig. 4.2 shows the number of reported cases of chlamydia in females in each age group in
one country.
400 000
350 000
300 000
250 000
number of
chlamydia 200 000
cases in 2008
150 000
100 000
50 000
0
10–14 15–19 20–24 25–29 30–34 35–39 40–44 45–54 55–64 65+
age group / years
Fig. 4.2
Describe the results shown by the data in Fig. 4.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) Chlamydia is caused by a bacterium.
(i) Suggest a treatment for chlamydia.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the name of one other STI.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
615/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(iii) Complete the sentences about the spread of STIs.
STIs are transmitted through the transfer of ............................................... during sexual
contact. One way individuals can avoid the spread of STIs is to use a type of
............................................... contraception. One example of this type of contraception
is ............................................... .
[3]
[Total: 14]
616/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 2,4-D is a synthetic plant auxin that is used as a weedkiller.
Researchers investigated the effectiveness of different treatments of 2,4-D on the control of the
weed Conyza canadensis in fields of maize, Zea mays.
Table 5.1
treatment time of treatment mean dry mass of weed density / number

weeds / g per m2 of weeds per m2
day 7 day 23 day 33
A ✓ 7.40 6.20
B ✓ 3.90 4.90
C ✓ 0.50 1.20
D ✓ ✓ 0.66 1.90
E ✓ ✓ 0.18 0.98
F ✓ ✓ 0.07 0.29
G ✓ ✓ ✓ 0.08 0.51
(a) (i) Maize farmers that had been using treatment C were advised by the researchers to
change to treatment F.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of changing to treatment F.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(ii) Suggest two factors that could decrease the effectiveness of 2,4-D.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
617/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(iii) Explain how 2,4-D acts as a weedkiller.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Auxin causes the shoots of a plant to grow away from gravity.
State the name of this response.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]
618/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 (a) Define the term chemical digestion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A student investigated the activity of the digestive enzyme pepsin.
Fig. 6.1 shows the apparatus used in the investigation.
test-tube 1 test-tube 2 test-tube 3 test-tube 4 stop-clock

egg white solution egg white solution, egg white solution, egg white solution
and pepsin pepsin and boiled pepsin and and hydrochloric
hydrochloric hydrochloric acid
acid acid
Fig. 6.1
The appearance of the four test-tubes was recorded at 0 and 5 minutes.
The protein in the egg white solution gives the solution a cloudy appearance.
The cloudy appearance clears when the protein in the egg white solution breaks down.
Table 6.1
test-tube contents appearance at appearance after

0 mins 5 mins
1 egg white solution, cloudy less cloudy
pepsin
2 egg white solution, cloudy clear
pepsin, hydrochloric acid
3 egg white solution, boiled cloudy cloudy
pepsin, hydrochloric acid
4 egg white solution, cloudy cloudy
hydrochloric acid
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
619/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(i) Explain the results shown for test-tubes 1, 2 and 3 in Table 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[5]
(ii) Explain the purpose of test-tube 4.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State the name of the organ in the body that produces pepsin.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
620/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(c) Maltase is another digestive enzyme.
Describe the action of maltase and state where it acts in the alimentary canal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/F/M/18
621/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 1 6 3 0 2 3 2 2 6 2 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (SC/AR) 145577/4
622/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 (a) The reactions of chemical digestion are catalysed by enzymes.
Fig. 1.1 shows the stages of an enzyme-catalysed reaction.
enzyme
A
Fig. 1.1
State the names of A to D in Fig. 1.1.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
C ...............................................................................................................................................
D ...............................................................................................................................................
[4]
623/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(b) Explain the importance of chemical digestion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows the human alimentary canal and associated organs.
The functions of some of these parts of the body are given in Table 1.1.
M
B
K D
H E
F
G
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/M/J/18
624/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
Table 1.1
function letter from Fig. 1.2 name of structure
site of starch digestion
reabsorption of water
secretion of pepsin
site of maltose digestion
secretion of bile
storage of faeces F rectum
secretion of lipase and trypsin

[6]
[Total: 12]
625/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 (a) Adaptive features are defined as the inherited features of an organism that increase its fitness.
State what is meant by fitness in this context.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Rodents are the most common mammals in many hot deserts.
Fig. 2.1 shows the lesser Egyptian jerboa, Jaculus jaculus, which lives in North Africa and the
Middle East in areas that have high daytime temperatures and very little rainfall.
Fig. 2.1
Like many desert-living mammals, jerboas are active at night.
Suggest two features of J. jaculus that adapt it to each of the following challenges of living in
desert ecosystems:
(i) very high daytime temperatures
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) very little or no light at night
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/M/J/18
626/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(c) A scientist studied communities in different parts of a desert and estimated the biomass of the
organisms in each area.
He divided the organisms into four groups according to their roles in the food web as shown
in Table 2.1.
Detritivores are animals that eat dead organisms or parts of organisms.
Table 2.1
groups of organisms in the food web biomass / g per m2

producers 480
herbivores 220
detritivores 120
carnivores 40
Some of these results are shown as a pyramid of biomass in Fig. 2.2.
herbivores and detritivores
producers
Fig. 2.2
(i) Use the information in Table 2.1 to complete the pyramid of biomass in Fig. 2.2. [2]
(ii) The scientist observed the detritivores and decided to include them with herbivores in
this pyramid of biomass.
Suggest what the scientist discovered about the detritivores that made him make this
decision.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
627/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(iii) Explain why there are rarely more than four or five trophic levels in ecosystems.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iv) Explain the advantages of presenting information about food webs as a pyramid of
biomass and not as a pyramid of numbers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/M/J/18
628/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
3 A student cut a section of a root and made an outline drawing of the distribution of tissues as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Identify the position of the xylem tissue by drawing a label line and the letter X on Fig. 3.1.
[1]
(ii) State why xylem is a tissue.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Water absorbed by the roots moves through the stem and enters the leaves. Most of this
water is lost in transpiration.
Explain how the internal structure of leaves results in the loss of large quantities of water in
transpiration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 6]
629/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 The flow of blood through the skin can be investigated by using a flow-meter.
Fig. 4.1 shows a flow-meter above a section through the skin.
flow-meter
skin
Q
S
ring of
muscle
Not drawn to scale

Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) State the name of cell P.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the types of blood vessel labelled Q, S and T.
Q .......................................................................................................................................
S ........................................................................................................................................
T ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) State the name of the tissue at R that provides insulation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
630/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(b) The blood flow through the skin of some volunteers was measured with a flow-meter when
their skin was exposed to different temperatures.
Capsaicin is a compound that gives people the sensation of feeling hot when it is put on the
skin. Researchers applied capsaicin to the skin of the volunteers and again measured the
blood flow through their skin at different temperatures.
100
90
80
with capsaicin
average blood 70
flow as a
percentage 60
of maximum
blood flow 50
40 without
capsaicin
30
20
10
0
15 20 25 30 35 40 45
temperature of the skin surface / °C
Fig. 4.2
(i) Use the information in Fig. 4.2 to describe the effect of increasing the temperature of the
skin surface on blood flow to the skin without capsaicin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/M/J/18
631/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Explain the mechanism that increases blood flow through the skin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) State the difference between the average blood flow for the treatments (with and without
capsaicin) at 35 °C.
Space for working.
....................................................... % [1]
(iv) The researchers thought that capsaicin stimulated receptors in the skin.
Explain the process by which capsaicin could reach these receptors.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
632/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) Explain the importance of regulating body temperature in humans.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) Body temperature is controlled by both hormones and nerves.
Explain how co-ordination by hormones differs from co-ordination by nerves.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 22]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/M/J/18
633/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 (a) State the balanced chemical equation for aerobic respiration.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Researchers in the Czech Republic investigated oxygen consumption in horses. They
measured the oxygen consumption of the horses while they were exercising at four different
paces: walking, trotting, cantering and galloping.
120
110
100
90
average rate 80
of oxygen
consumption 70
/ cm3 kg–1 min–1
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
walking trotting cantering galloping
type of exercise
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/M/J/18
634/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
Calculate the percentage increase in the average rate of oxygen consumption as the horses
change from walking to trotting.
Show your working.
................................ %
[2]
(c) The researchers also calculated the oxygen debt for each type of exercise.
They found that the horses developed a larger oxygen debt when they exercised by galloping
and cantering rather than when they walked.
Explain why the horses developed an oxygen debt when they exercised.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) Describe how the horses would recover from an oxygen debt when they stop exercising.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total:11]
635/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of the human female reproductive system.
T
S
W
R
X
Y
Fig. 6.1
(i) Complete Table 6.1 by stating the letter from Fig. 6.1 that identifies the structure where
each process occurs.
Table 6.1
process letter from Fig. 6.1
meiosis
fertilisation
implantation
[3]
(ii) State the name of the part of the female reproductive system labelled S in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/M/J/18
636/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(b) Fig. 6.2 is a diagram of a human sperm cell.
acrosome
nucleus
flagellum
mitochondria
Fig. 6.2
(i) Write the formula that would be used to calculate the magnification of the diagram.
[1]
(ii) The actual length of the sperm cell in Fig. 6.2 is 0.055 mm.
Convert this value to micrometres (μm).
Space for working.
.................................................... μm [1]
(c) Explain why the nuclei of sperm cells differ from those of other cells in the male.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
637/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(d) Explain the roles of the flagellum, the mitochondria and the acrosome in sperm cells.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
(e) Explain why the sex of a child is determined by its father.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 16]
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/M/J/18
638/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 7 6 6 8 0 6 5 7 2 5 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 145576/4
639/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 (a) Red pandas, Ailurus fulgens, and humans have a similar arrangement of teeth.
Fig. 1.1 shows a section through one tooth of a red panda. Fig. 1.2 shows the side view of the
lower jaw of a red panda.
C D E F
Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2
(i) State the names of the structures labelled A to F in Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
C ........................................................................................................................................
D ........................................................................................................................................
E ........................................................................................................................................
F ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) State the type of digestion that breaks down large pieces of food.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Food that sticks to the teeth can be used by bacteria for anaerobic respiration.
This type of respiration releases a substance that can cause tooth decay.
(i) State the type of substance released by the bacteria, during respiration, that causes
tooth decay.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
640/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(ii) State the names of the two parts of a tooth that are dissolved by the substance released
by bacterial respiration.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The teeth of red pandas do not decay as much as human teeth.
Suggest the component of a human diet that causes teeth to decay as a result of bacterial
respiration.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/M/J/18
641/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 Mangrove trees are hydrophytes because they grow in water.
Fig. 2.1 shows a young mangrove tree.
Fig. 2.1
(a) An adaptive feature is a feature that increases the fitness of an organism.
(i) Define the term fitness.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Mangrove trees have many aerial roots and floating seeds.
Suggest how these adaptive features allow mangrove trees to survive in water.
many aerial roots ...............................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
floating seeds ....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
642/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a food chain in a mangrove forest.
mangrove tree fiddler crab seagull
Fig. 2.2
Table 2.1 gives the number of organisms and their biomass in a mangrove forest.
Table 2.1
organism number of organisms biomass of organisms / kg

mangrove trees 1 000 450 000
fiddler crabs 7 500 000 8 000
seagulls 150 000 1 200
(i) Estimate the biomass of one fiddler crab in grams.
Write your answer to two significant figures.
Show your working.
............................ g
[2]
(ii) Sketch a pyramid of numbers, using the information in Table 2.1, for the food chain
shown in Fig. 2.2.
Write the number of each trophic level on the appropriate part of your pyramid.
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/M/J/18
643/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(iii) Explain why the shape of a pyramid of biomass, for the information given in Table 2.1,
would be different from the shape of your pyramid of numbers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 12]
644/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Aphids are insects that feed on the phloem sap in plants.
Fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of an aphid with its mouth parts inserted into the stem of a plant.
phloem xylem
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mouth parts of the aphid reach the phloem tissue of the stem.
(i) State the name of the foods the aphid could suck out of the phloem tissue.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain the role of phloem in plant transport. Use the words source and sink in your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/M/J/18
645/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows some of the features of xylem.
Describe how xylem is adapted for its functions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
(c) Some farmers spray their crops with insecticides to kill pests such as aphids.
Explain the benefits of killing pests.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 14]
646/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
4 One of the roles of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) in Atlanta, US, is to try
to reduce the number of people who are infected with pathogens.
The CDC conducted a survey. They asked women which, if any, contraceptive methods they used.
(a) Suggest why the CDC collected data on contraceptive methods.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
Fig. 4.1 shows the results of the survey.
90
80
70
60
percentage
50
of women
in the survey
40
30
20
10
0
any condoms/ contraceptive other
method femidoms pills chemical
methods
contraceptive method
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/M/J/18
647/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(b) (i) State two hormones that are used in contraceptive pills.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest why contraceptive pills do not contain FSH.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Give one example of ‘other chemical methods’ (fourth bar) that could be included in the
bar in Fig. 4.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State two methods of birth control that were not listed in the survey.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(v) The percentage of the last three bars in Fig. 4.1 added together is 90%.
Suggest why the percentage of women who used any type of contraceptive method (first
bar) is not equal to the sum of the last three bars.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
648/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 Fig. 5.1 shows an adult fly, Chrysomya megacephala.
Fig. 5.1
(a) State three visible features from Fig. 5.1 that could be used to distinguish adult insects from
other arthropods.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fly larvae are immature insects that are often used in experiments on respiration.
Give the balanced chemical equation for aerobic respiration.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/M/J/18
649/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(c) A respirometer is shown in Fig. 5.2. It can be used to estimate an organism’s rate of respiration.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
droplet
of oil
water-bath
fly larvae wire mesh
soda lime
Fig. 5.2
(i) Complete the sentences:
A respirometer can be used to calculate the ............................. of oxygen used by the
fly larvae by measuring the ............................. the droplet of oil moves in one minute. A
water-bath is used to ............................. the temperature of the apparatus.

[3]
(ii) The soda lime in the respirometer absorbs carbon dioxide.
Explain why this is important in this investigation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Fly larvae respire to release energy.
State two uses of energy in a fly larva.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
650/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(d) A student used a respirometer to investigate the effect of temperature on the rate of respiration
of germinating seeds.
Predict the results of this investigation and explain your prediction.
prediction ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/M/J/18
651/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
6 Bacteria are useful in biotechnology and genetic engineering.
Fig. 6.1 shows a photomicrograph of a bacterium.
magnification ×27 000
Fig. 6.1
(a) State the name of the process that is taking place in Fig. 6.1.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Write the formula that would be used to calculate the actual width of the bacterium.
[1]
(ii) The actual width of the bacterium is 0.0008 mm.
Space for working.
................................. μm [1]
(c) Genetically modified bacteria can produce human insulin.
(i) State the name of the disease that can be treated with insulin injections.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
652/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(ii) Insulin is a protein.
Describe the process of using bacteria in genetic engineering to produce human proteins.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [5]
(d) Genetically modified bacteria are often grown in fermenters.
(i) Suggest why steam is used to clean fermenters.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State three conditions inside a fermenter that are measured and controlled.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
3 .........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) State the name of one commercial product, other than insulin, that is made in fermenters.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/M/J/18
653/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(e) Crop plants can also be genetically modified.
Describe the advantages of genetically modifying crops.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/M/J/18
654/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 4 9 9 6 1 4 9 6 2 0 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SW) 145575/4
655/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Two functions of the alimentary canal are mechanical digestion and chemical digestion.
(a) Outline where and how mechanical digestion occurs in the alimentary canal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Enzymes catalyse the reactions of chemical digestion. Table 1.1 gives information about
chemical digestion in three parts of the alimentary canal.
Complete Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
part of the alimentary

enzyme substrate product(s)
canal
mouth starch
stomach peptides
fat fatty acids and glycerol
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
656/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Substances that are absorbed from the alimentary canal may enter cells and become part of
the cells.
(i) State the storage carbohydrate made from glucose in liver cells.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the type of protein used in the immune system that is produced from amino acids
by lymphocytes.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Fat is produced from fatty acids and glycerol by cells in the fatty tissue beneath the skin.
State one function of this layer of fat.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 10]
657/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows an Arctic wolf, Canis lupus. These wolves are one of the few mammals adapted to
the extreme cold of the tundra in the Canadian Arctic and in Alaska.
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) State two features, visible in Fig. 2.1, that identify Arctic wolves as mammals.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Arctic wolves show many adaptive features to a cold environment.
Explain what is meant by the term adaptive feature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
658/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(b) The food available to animals in the Arctic tundra is limited. There is a short growing season
for plants and the environmental conditions do not favour high rates of photosynthesis and
growth compared with temperate and tropical ecosystems.
State three conditions that limit plant growth rates.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Arctic wolves are the top carnivores in the food web in the tundra.
Explain why the number of Arctic wolves is so small in this ecosystem.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
[Total: 14]
659/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 Fig. 3.1 is a scanning electron micrograph of a vertical section through part of the leaf of a broad
bean plant, Vicia faba.
air spaces
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State the names of the tissues labelled A and B.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The cells in regions B and C in Fig. 3.1 have a large surface area.
Explain why this is necessary for the functioning of the leaf cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) Explain why there are many interconnecting air spaces within the leaf.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
660/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(b) When water is in short supply, plants can wilt as shown in Fig. 3.2.
Fig. 3.2
(i) State two conditions that are likely to increase the chances of wilting.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain what happens to the cells of a leaf to cause wilting.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
661/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(iii) Wilting may look harmful, but it is often a strategy for survival.
Suggest the advantages to a plant of wilting.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
662/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
4 (a) The endocrine system in mammals produces hormones.
Define the term hormone.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The responses of the human body to danger are coordinated by the nervous and endocrine
systems.
Fig. 4.1 shows the sequence of events that occurs in response to a dangerous situation that
is detected by the eyes.
Key:
nerve impulses
hormone
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
663/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(i) State the tissue in the eye that converts light energy into nerve impulses.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the part of the eye that has the highest concentration of light-sensitive cells and
gives the most detailed image.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State the type of neurone that conducts impulses from the eye to the brain.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) State the nerve that contains these neurones that conduct impulses from the eye to the
brain.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(v) Identify the organ labelled P.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(vi) Identify the gland labelled Q.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Complete Table 4.1 to describe the effects of the hormone released when a person is in a
dangerous situation.
Table 4.1
organ effect of the hormone
heart
liver
lungs
eyes
[4]
664/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(d) Explain the advantages of coordinating the response to a dangerous situation using both the
nervous system and the endocrine system.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(e) (i) Plants also make hormones.
State the name of one hormone made by plants.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Some plant hormones are manufactured and applied to crops to alter aspects of plant
growth.
Describe how the synthetic plant hormone 2,4-D is used in agriculture.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
665/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 (a) State the balanced chemical equation for aerobic respiration.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Students investigated the rate of respiration of crickets (a type of insect) using a carbon
dioxide sensor and laptop as shown in Fig. 5.1. The sensor was fitted inside an airtight glass
jar. The apparatus was set up in a room with a constant temperature of 17 °C.
Fig. 5.1
The students found that the concentration of carbon dioxide inside the jar increased by
50 ppm in 120 seconds.
Calculate the rate of carbon dioxide production as ppm per second.
Show your working and express your answer to two significant figures.
............................................ ppm s–1 [1]
666/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) After 10 minutes, the students opened the jar by removing the sensor. They left the jar open
for 5 minutes but made sure that the crickets remained in the jar. They then replaced the
sensor and took more readings for another 10 minutes.
State and explain one reason for opening the jar after 10 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) During the investigation the temperature inside the jar increased. The temperature outside
the jar remained constant.
Explain why the temperature inside the jar increased.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
667/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(e) Researchers in Chile also investigated the rate of respiration in crickets.
They investigated the effect of temperature and body mass on the rate of respiration. They
measured the rate of oxygen consumption in crickets with different body masses, at different
temperatures.
The researchers’ results are shown in Fig. 5.2.
30
27 °C
25
20
rate of oxygen 17 °C
consumption 15
/ 10–3 cm3 h–1
10
7 °C
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
body mass / mg
Fig. 5.2
State two conclusions that can be made from the data in Fig. 5.2 and support each conclusion
with evidence from the graph.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total:11]
668/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 is a half-flower drawing of pride of Barbados, Caesalpinia pulcherrima.
D
C
Fig. 6.1
Complete Table 6.1 by stating the letter from Fig. 6.1 that indicates the organ where each
function occurs and the name of the organ.
Table 6.1
function letter from Fig. 6.1 name of the organ
meiosis to produce pollen grains
pollination
development of seeds
protection of flower in the bud

[4]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
669/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) Fig. 6.2 is a scanning electron micrograph of some pollen grains from wind-pollinated flowers
and insect-pollinated flowers.
magnification ×220
Fig. 6.2
(i) Write the formula that would be used to calculate the actual diameter of pollen grain H.
[1]
(ii) The actual diameter of pollen grain H is 0.082 mm.
Space for working.
..................................................... μm [1]
(iii) Explain how the pollen grain labelled J is adapted for insect pollination.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
670/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(c) Pollen grains grow tubes, which contain haploid male gamete nuclei.
(i) One of these male gamete nuclei fuses with the female gamete.
State the part of the flower that contains the female gamete.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Define the term haploid nucleus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Explain why it is important for gametes to be haploid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/M/J/18
671/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 2 2 0 3 4 7 9 9 5 2 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 16 printed pages.
DC (ST/JG) 152888/3
672/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a pyramid of biomass and part of the carbon cycle.
CO2 in atmosphere
A
B
decomposers
C
D
fossil fuels
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) State the principal source of energy required for trophic level D of the pyramid of biomass
in Fig. 1.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the letter that represents the primary consumers in Fig. 1.1.
........................................... [1]
(iii) State how carbon is transferred from producers to primary consumers.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Explain why trophic level A is smaller than trophic level B in the pyramid of biomass in
Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/O/N/18
673/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) Some fungi and bacteria are decomposers.
(i) Define the term decomposer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Arrow X on Fig. 1.1 indicates the transfer of carbon from decomposers to the atmosphere.
State the name of process X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Describe how human activities are affecting the carbon cycle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
[Total: 13]
674/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Microbiologists test strains of bacteria for antibiotic resistance.
They do this by soaking paper discs in antibiotics and placing them on bacteria growing in Petri
dishes.
The paper discs in the centre of Petri dishes E and F in Fig. 2.1 have been soaked in penicillin.
zone where bacteria are growing
paper disc
soaked in
penicillin
E F
zone where bacteria are no longer growing
Fig. 2.1
(a) State the type of microorganism that produces penicillin.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State and explain the evidence from Fig. 2.1 that suggests that the bacteria in dish F are
resistant to penicillin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/O/N/18
675/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(c) (i) Explain how bacteria become resistant to antibiotics and how humans can reduce the
problem of antibiotic resistance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[6]
(ii) Explain why viral infections cannot be treated with antibiotics.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Some bacteria and viruses cause disease but many are useful to the biotechnology industry.
Explain why bacteria are useful in biotechnology.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 13]
676/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a photomicrograph of a section of a root.
Fig. 3.1
(a) Structure J is a xylem vessel.
The xylem vessels conduct water from the roots to the stems.
State the features of xylem vessels that enable them to conduct water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/O/N/18
677/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(b) Describe the pathway of water from outside the root to the xylem vessels (J) at the centre of
the root. Use the letters in Fig. 3.1 in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
678/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) Scientists wanted to determine the flow-rate of water in roots.
They measured the flow-rate in three zones of onion roots as shown in Fig. 3.2.
zone 3
glass jar containing
zone 2
water
zone 1
Fig. 3.2
They measured the flow-rate in healthy roots and roots that had been treated with a toxic
solution.
Table 3.1
zone in average flow-rate of water / arbitrary units

Fig. 3.2 healthy roots treated roots
1 150 160
2 230 200
3 280 270
(i) Calculate the percentage increase in the average flow-rate between zone 1 and 3 for
healthy roots.
Show your working.
............................................................ %
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/O/N/18
679/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(ii) The scientists observed that the xylem vessels nearer the root tip were narrower than
the xylem vessels higher up the root.
Describe how the width of xylem vessels in different zones of a root affects the average
flow-rate of water. Use the information in Table 3.1 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) Suggest why there was little difference in the flow-rate in healthy roots and in roots
treated with the toxic solution.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 15]
680/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
4 The eye is a sense organ that responds to light.
Fig. 4.1 is a diagram of a section through the human eye.
R W
S
X
T
Y
Fig. 4.1
(a) Table 4.1 describes some of the functions of the parts of the eye.
• naming the parts of the eye

• using the letters on Fig. 4.1 to identify the parts of the eye.
Table 4.1
function name of part letter on Fig. 4.1
carries impulses to the brain
focuses light onto the back of the eye
controls the tension of the suspensory ligaments
tissue that detects light and colour
location of most of the cone cells
[5]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/O/N/18
681/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(b) (i) A pair of muscles in the eye work in opposition to each other to adjust the amount of light
entering the pupil.
State the term that describes the action of a pair of muscles working in opposition to
each other.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A different pair of muscles in the eye work in opposition to each other to view objects at
different distances from the eye.
State the name of the process that allows the eye to view objects at different distances.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Explain why the eye cannot easily identify different colours in low levels of light.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Some people inherit colour blindness and cannot identify certain colours, even in bright light.
The gene responsible for colour vision is located on the X chromosome.
There are two alleles for this gene on the X chromosome:
• XB – normal colour vision

• Xb – colour blindness.
(i) People that are heterozygous for colour blindness are called carriers.
State the genotype of a heterozygous female carrier.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) There is no gene for colour vision on the male sex chromosome.
State the genotype of a colour-blind male.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
682/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
Fig. 4.2 shows a pedigree diagram for colour blindness.
1 2 Key:
colour vision female
3 4 5 6 7 8 carrier female
colour-blind female
colour vision male
9 10 11 12 13........... carrier male
colour-blind male
Fig. 4.2
(iii) Person 13 in Fig. 4.2 is male. His parents are person 7 and person 8.
Use the key to complete Fig. 4.2 by drawing the correct symbol for person 13. [1]
(iv) Colour blindness is a sex-linked characteristic.
Explain why females 4 and 5 are carriers even though their mother is not a carrier.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/O/N/18
683/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 The liver is an important organ in many processes.
(a) The liver responds to changes in insulin concentration.
Insulin is a hormone.
(i) Define the term hormone.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Describe how the liver responds to an increase in insulin concentration.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The liver is also involved in the processing of amino acids.
(i) Describe how excess amino acids are broken down.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State the name of the process that assembles amino acids to form proteins.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
684/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) The liver is also involved in the processing of toxins.
(i) Lactic acid is an example of a toxin that is produced during vigorous exercise and
processed in the liver.
Describe how lactic acid is processed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Alcohol is another toxin that is processed in the liver.

The effect of alcohol consumption on the risk of dying from liver disease was investigated
in men and women.
60 Key:
men
50 women
40
risk of dying
from liver
30
disease
/ arbitrary
units 20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
alcohol consumption / g per day
Fig. 5.1
Describe the results shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/O/N/18
685/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
6 Young mammals that are orphaned can be bottle-fed.
Fig. 6.1 shows a newborn tiger cub sucking on a bottle.
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) Sucking is an example of an involuntary action observed in newborn mammals.
State the name given to involuntary actions.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe the advantages of breast-feeding compared with bottle-feeding.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
686/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(b) The digestive systems of young mammals are not fully developed.
Enzymes such as amylase, maltase and protease are often added to baby food to aid
chemical digestion.
(i) Complete Table 6.1 by stating the substrate and product(s) for each enzyme reaction.
Table 6.1
amylase
maltase
protease
[3]
(ii) Suggest why the temperature of baby food must be controlled when the enzymes are
added.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State one other condition that must also be controlled to optimise enzyme activity.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0610/41/O/N/18
687/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 3 5 8 0 8 4 5 9 9 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/CT) 152730/3
688/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 Wetlands are important ecosystems. Researchers studied the feeding relationships between the
organisms in an area of wetland on the coast of Texas.
Fig. 1.1 shows part of the food web that they studied.
bald eagle spotted

sandpiper
stone crab
marsh rice
blenny
rat
mycid shrimp
snow goose oyster pipe fish

water flea
muskrat
clover algae and

grass
phytoplankton
Fig. 1.1
(a) Complete Table 1.1 by giving the name of one organism from the food web in Fig. 1.1 for
each row.
Table 1.1
name of organism from Fig. 1.1
producer
secondary consumer
an animal that feeds

at two trophic levels
[3]
689/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
The functioning of ecosystems relies on the cycling of nutrients.
nitrogen gas in
the air
C
amino acids
plants nitrate ions
in plants
D A
proteins proteins in dead plants ammonium ions

in plants
Fig. 1.2
(b) State the name of process A in Fig. 1.2 and give the type of organism that converts ammonium
ions to nitrate ions.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
type of organism .......................................................................................................................

[2]
(c) Describe how nitrate ions enter the roots of plants shown by arrow C on Fig. 1.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/O/N/18
690/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(d) State the name of the structure in plant cells where process D occurs.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) State the process that occurs at B.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) A pyramid of numbers for the wetland ecosystem showed that there were very large numbers
of organisms at the base of the pyramid and very few at the top.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 13]
691/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a dwarf sunflower and a tall sunflower, Helianthus annuus. The height of the dwarf
sunflower is 0.45 m and the height of the tall sunflower is 4.5 m.
dwarf tall not to scale
Fig. 2.1
Dwarf plants like the one in Fig. 2.1 have mutant alleles.
(a) Define the term allele.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Shoot growth in plants is controlled by auxins. An enzyme in shoot tips converts molecules of
an amino acid into auxins as shown in Fig. 2.2.
enzyme
amino acid auxin
Fig. 2.2
Explain how a mutation in DNA results in an abnormal enzyme which does not catalyse the
reaction shown in Fig. 2.2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
692/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) Two tall sunflower plants were crossed. 25% of the offspring produced were dwarf.
Explain how it is possible for two tall parent plants to have this percentage of dwarf offspring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Fig. 2.3 shows how several strawberry plants can be formed from one parent plant.
parent plant
offspring
Fig. 2.3
(i) Explain the type of reproduction that produces plants by the method shown in Fig. 2.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/O/N/18
693/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(ii) Explain the disadvantages of the type of reproduction shown in Fig. 2.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
694/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of some xylem vessels.
Fig. 3.1
(i) State one structural feature of xylem vessels and explain how this is related to the
function of water transport.
feature ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain the mechanism that is responsible for the movement of water in xylem vessels.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/O/N/18
695/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(iii) State one role of xylem vessels other than transport.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The rate of transpiration is affected by several factors including the temperature and the
humidity of the air.
State and explain the effect of an increase in temperature on the rate of transpiration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
696/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 Insulin is a hormone that regulates the concentration of glucose in the blood.
(a) Define the term hormone.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Two people, A and B, visited a doctor to discuss their similar symptoms. The doctor thought
that their blood glucose concentrations were not very well controlled. A glucose tolerance test
was carried out on both people.
A and B did not eat or drink anything other than water for eight hours before the test. They
then drank a glucose solution. Blood samples were taken at 30 minute intervals. The samples
were tested for glucose concentration.

blood glucose
concentration
/ mg per 100 cm3
220
200
A
180
160
glucose
solution
140
taken
120
100
B
80
60
40
20
0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
time / minutes
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/O/N/18
697/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(i) Use Fig. 4.1 to state the blood glucose concentrations of A and B at 180 minutes.
A .............................................................................................................. mg per 100 cm3
B .............................................................................................................. mg per 100 cm3

[1]
(ii) Calculate the percentage increase in the blood glucose concentration in person A
between 60 and 90 minutes.
Show your working.
................ %
[2]
(iii) Describe how the response of person A differs from the response of person B in Fig. 4.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Explain the results of the glucose tolerance test shown by person B.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
698/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(v) The doctor thought that person A had Type 1 diabetes.
Describe three symptoms of Type 1 diabetes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/O/N/18
699/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a photomicrograph of human blood.
phagocyte
lymphocyte
red blood
cell
Fig. 5.1
(a) Describe the differences in appearance and the roles of the three cells labelled in Fig. 5.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
700/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows some of the stages of blood clotting.
a blood vessel breaks
platelets collect at the

break in the blood vessel
platelets release an
enzyme
prothrombin thrombin
forms a mesh at the break

in the blood vessel
Fig. 5.2
(i) Complete Fig. 5.2 by filling in the two empty boxes. [1]
(ii) State two roles of blood clotting.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/O/N/18
701/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(c) Haemophilia is a sex-linked blood disorder in which blood takes a long time to clot. Fig. 5.3 is
a pedigree diagram showing the inheritance of haemophilia.
Q R S T
male with normal clotting time
male with haemophilia
female with normal clotting time
Fig. 5.3
The normal allele is represented by XH and the mutant allele is represented by Xh.
(i) State the genotypes of the people identified as P, Q and R in Fig. 5.3.
P ........................................................................................................................................
Q .......................................................................................................................................
R ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
702/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(ii) The couple S and T are expecting another child.
What is the probability that the child will have haemophilia?
Space for working
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Define the term sex-linked characteristic.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/O/N/18
703/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the Galapagos iguana, Amblyrhynchus cristatus.
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State two features that are used to classify animals, such as the Galapagos iguana, as
reptiles.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State two features that are present in plant cells that are not present in the cells of
reptiles.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Galapagos iguanas feed on seaweed which contains starch and other carbohydrates.
(i) State the name of the enzyme that digests starch.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the names of two parts of the alimentary canal where starch is digested.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
704/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(c) There are many threats to wildlife in the Galapagos.
Describe ways in which endangered species can be conserved.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(d) One aim of conservation is to maintain resources in natural ecosystems.
State three resources that natural ecosystems provide for humans.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2018 0610/42/O/N/18
705/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 2 4 8 0 3 9 0 3 5 7 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/SW) 152729/4
706/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Water is a very important molecule for all living organisms.
(a) (i) State the name of the organ in plants where most water is absorbed.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the name of the organ in humans where most water is absorbed.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State one property of water that makes it useful to animals and plants.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The flow diagram in Fig. 1.1 shows a town and part of the water cycle.
F G K L M N
O
J
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/O/N/18
707/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
Table 1.1 describes some of the processes in the water cycle.
Complete Table 1.1.
One row has been done for you.
Table 1.1
description name of the process letter in Fig. 1.1
nitrate ions are washed into rivers leaching F
an algal bloom in the water is caused by

leaching of nitrate ions
evaporation
conversion of water from a vapour to a

liquid
transpiration
[4]
(c) Polluted water can be purified at a sewage treatment works.
(i) State one reason why it is necessary to treat polluted water before it is used as drinking
water.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Outline the process of sewage treatment. You may use the letters in Fig. 1.1 in your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 12]
708/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 The Indian muntjac deer, Muntiacus muntjak, is recorded as the mammal with the lowest number
of chromosomes.
Fig. 2.1 is an image of the chromosomes in the nucleus of a diploid cell of a female muntjac deer.
sex chromosomes
Fig. 2.1
(a) State the diploid number of chromosomes for the female muntjac deer.
................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 2.2 is an image of the chromosomes in the nucleus of a diploid cell of a male muntjac
deer.
sex chromosomes
Fig. 2.2
Describe how the sex chromosomes of the male muntjac deer shown in Fig. 2.2 differ from
those of the female shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/O/N/18
709/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(c) Explain how meiosis can result in variation in a species.
Use the words chromosome and gametes in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) Another cause of variation is the formation of new alleles.
Describe how new alleles can be formed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
710/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 is a photomicrograph of part of the upper surface of a broad bean leaf, Vicia faba.
Fig. 3.1
(i) On Fig. 3.1, identify and label two structures that are visible in cell P. [2]
(ii) State the name of the tissue shown in Fig. 3.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The tissue shown in Fig. 3.1 is transparent.
Explain why it is important to the plant that the tissue shown in Fig. 3.1 is transparent.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
711/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(b) Stomata are found on the lower surface of broad bean leaves.
Describe the function of stomata.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) More than 40 years ago, botanists studied the leaves of broad bean plants and discovered
that guard cells control the opening and closing of stomata. They found that stomata were
open when the guard cells were turgid.
Table 3.1 shows some of their measurements.
Table 3.1
closed stomata open stomata

ion concentration in guard cells / pmol 0.3 2.5
guard cell volume / μm3 4000.0 6500.0
turgor pressure in the guard cells / MPa 2.0 4.8
width of stomatal opening / μm 0.0 8.0
(i) Ions move into guard cells by active transport.
Describe how the ions move into the guard cells.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/O/N/18
712/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(ii) Describe and explain how the change in ion concentration causes the guard cell volume
to change. Use the information in Table 3.1 in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[5]
(iii) The botanists left the broad bean plants unattended for three days. During this time the
broad bean plants wilted.
Suggest two environmental factors that can cause plants to wilt.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 18]
713/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Glycogen is a storage carbohydrate in animals. Glycogen is made from glucose.
(a) (i) Cells that convert glucose to glycogen contain many mitochondria.
Suggest why these cells contain many mitochondria.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State the type of biological molecule that catalyses reactions such as the conversion of
glycogen to glucose.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A fetus needs glucose to make glycogen.
Describe how a fetus obtains glucose.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
714/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(c) Fig. 4. 1 shows the concentration of glycogen in the fetus of a domestic cat during pregnancy
and immediately after birth.
birth
700
600
500
glycogen
concentration 400
/ μmol per g
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
time since fertilisation / days
Fig. 4.1
Hormones stimulate changes in the concentration of glycogen in the fetus.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/O/N/18
715/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Calculate the percentage increase in the glycogen concentration in the fetus between
day 10 and birth in Fig. 4.1.
Show your working.
............................................................ %
[2]
(iii) Describe the changes in glycogen concentration shown in Fig. 4.1 and explain how
hormones in the fetus cause these changes.
Use data from Fig. 4.1 to support your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[6]
716/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(d) After birth, cats produce milk to feed their offspring.
Human babies can be breast-fed or bottle-fed with formula milk.
Outline three disadvantages of breast-feeding.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/O/N/18
717/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
5 An ecologist studied variation in a species of xerophyte.
(a) Xerophytes are adapted to a particular type of environment.
State this type of environment.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The ecologist studied the features of the leaves in the species of xerophyte.
Fig. 5.1 shows the variation in the type of leaf spike.
number of 5
individuals
4
0
type 1 type 2 type 3
type of leaf spike
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the type of variation shown in Fig. 5.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why the type of leaf spike is an example of the variation shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
718/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(c) The ecologist also measured other features of the leaves.
Fig. 5.2 shows the variation in leaf feature B.
number of 5
individuals
4
0
0–5 6–10 11–15 16–20 21–25
leaf feature B / arbitrary units
Fig. 5.2
State two named features of leaves that show the type of variation shown in Fig. 5.2.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/O/N/18
719/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(d) After one year, the ecologist recorded the variation in leaf feature B again.
number of 5
individuals
4
0
0–5 6–10 11–15 16–20 21–25
leaf feature B / arbitrary units
Fig. 5.3
Suggest one reason for the difference in variation of leaf feature B after one year.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
720/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 Fig. 6.1 is a diagram showing some body cells and parts of the human lymphatic and circulatory
systems.
arteriole
lymphatic vessel
B
Z capillary
venule
not to scale
Fig. 6.1
(a) Capillaries allow blood to reach most cells in the body.
(i) State the name of the process by which oxygen moves from A to Z as shown in Fig. 6.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe how some of the liquid in A moves to B in Fig. 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State one component of blood that remains inside the capillaries as the blood flows from
X to Y in Fig. 6.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/O/N/18
721/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(b) Lymphatic vessels are similar in structure to veins.
(i) Describe the structure of veins.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Describe the role of the lymphatic vessel shown in Fig. 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Lacteals are another part of the lymphatic system.
State where in the body lacteals are found and state their function.
location in the body ...................................................................................................................
function .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) In the lymphatic system, there are structures that contain large numbers of lymphocytes.
(i) State the name of these structures.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the role of lymphocytes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2018 0610/43/O/N/18
722/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 0 1 0 5 4 8 2 2 6 6 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (LK/SG) 129196/2
723/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a vertical section through a human heart and the major blood vessels.
O
L
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) State the names of the structures labelled L, M and O as shown in Fig. 1.1.
L ..................................
M ..................................
O ..................................
[3]
(ii) Identify a letter on Fig. 1.1 that represents a blood vessel that has:
blood with the highest concentration of carbon dioxide ...........
blood with the highest concentration of oxygen ...........
the highest pressure ...........

[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/F/M/17
724/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) (i) Describe how blood is moved by the heart from blood vessel K to blood vessel J.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[5]
(ii) Explain why the wall of the left ventricle is thicker than the wall of the right ventricle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 13]
725/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Bacteria are classified as belonging to the Prokaryote kingdom.
(a) State two features of all prokaryotes.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
MRSA is a type of bacterium that is resistant to antibiotics. The number of cases of MRSA
identified in hospitals in the USA between 1995 and 2005 was recorded.
Fig. 2.1 shows these data.
400 000
350 000
300 000
250 000
number of cases
of MRSA per year
200 000
150 000
100 000
50 000
0
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005
year
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/F/M/17
726/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(b) (i) Describe the results shown in Fig. 2.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain how bacteria become resistant to antibiotics.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) The number of cases of MRSA has decreased since 2005.
Suggest reasons for this decrease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]
727/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 Colour blindness in humans is caused by a fault in some of the light receptor cells in the retina of
the eye. Rod cells and cone cells are two types of light receptor.
(a) Complete Table 3.1 to state the function of three types of cell in the eye.
Table 3.1
type of cell in the eye function
..........................................................................................
rod cells
..........................................................................................
..........................................................................................
cone cells
..........................................................................................
..........................................................................................
sensory neurones
..........................................................................................
[3]
(b) The number of rod cells and cone cells at places across the retina were recorded.
The diagram of an eye in Fig. 3.1 shows the angles from the fovea where the recordings were
made.
The graph in Fig. 3.1 shows the number of rod cells and cone cells across the retina.
Use Fig. 3.1 to describe and explain the distribution of rod cells and cone cells across the
retina.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/F/M/17
728/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
70° 70°
60° 60°
40° 40°
20° 20°
0°
blind spot
fovea optic nerve
fovea blind spot

180 000
160 000
140 000
rod cells rod cells
number of 120 000
rod cells
and 100 000
cone cells
per mm2 80 000
60 000
40 000
20 000 cone cells cone cells
0
70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
angle from fovea / degrees
Fig. 3.1
729/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) Colour blindness is a sex-linked characteristic.
The gene for colour vision is on the X chromosome.
There are two alleles of this gene:
• B is the allele for normal colour vision
• b is the allele for colour blindness.
Fig. 3.2 is a pedigree chart showing the inheritance of colour blindness in a family. The key
shows the sex chromosomes and the alleles of the gene for colour vision.
Key
male with normal colour vision XBY
colour-blind male XbY
female with normal colour vision XBXB
carrier female with normal XBXb
colour vision
colour-blind female X b Xb
Fig. 3.2
Describe evidence from Fig. 3.2 that shows that colour blindness is a sex-linked characteristic.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/F/M/17
730/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(d) A man with normal colour vision (XBY) and a woman who is colour-blind (XbXb) have a
baby.
Complete the genetic diagram to predict the probability that the baby is colour-blind.
parental phenotypes male with normal x colour-blind female

colour vision
parental genotypes XBY x XbXb
parental gametes ............... ............... ............... ...............
offspring genotypes ................... ................... ................... ...................
offspring phenotypes ................... ................... ................... ...................
probability that the baby is colour-blind:
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 14]
731/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
4 (a) Water is one requirement for photosynthesis.
State two other requirements needed by plants to carry out photosynthesis.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
Table 4.1 shows the number of hectares of forested area in some countries in Africa in the years
1990, 2000 and 2005.
Table 4.1
hectares of forest per 1000 hectares of land

country
1990 2000 2005
Cameroon 25 22 21
Tanzania 41 37 35
Nigeria 17 13 11
Zambia 49 45 43
Zimbabwe 22 19 18
(b) Calculate the percentage loss of forested area in Nigeria between 2000 and 2005.
............................................................ %
[2]
(c) Some forested areas are cleared to provide land to grow crop plants. Deforestation reduces
the local rainfall and the concentration of water vapour in the air.
(i) Describe and explain how a reduced concentration of water vapour in the air would
increase the movement of water through crop plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/F/M/17
732/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(ii) Describe how water moves from the soil into the roots of crop plants.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) Describe the consequences of deforestation on the animals that live in forests.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 14]
733/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 (a) (i) Alcohol can be made by the microorganism yeast.
State the balanced chemical equation for the production of alcohol by yeast.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Name the organ that breaks down alcohol in the human body.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a computer model of the enzyme alcohol dehydrogenase, which is the enzyme
responsible for breaking down alcohol.
Fig. 5.1
Enzymes have a specific three dimensional shape.
Explain why the shape of an enzyme is important.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/F/M/17
734/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(c) Table 5.1 shows the enzyme activity of alcohol dehydrogenase at different temperatures.
Table 5.1
temperature / °C enzyme activity

/ arbitrary units
30 115
42 175
(i) The information in Table 5.1 shows that an increase in temperature increases the activity
of alcohol dehydrogenase.
Explain why an increase in temperature causes an increase in enzyme activity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) State one factor, other than temperature, that affects enzyme activity.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A gene is involved in the production of the enzyme alcohol dehydrogenase.
(i) Define the term gene.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Describe the role of ribosomes in the synthesis of proteins such as enzymes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 14]
735/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
6 (a) Table 6.1 shows some of the enzymes, their substrates, products and where they are
produced in the digestive system.
Complete Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
location of enzyme
production
starch salivary glands

.............................. ..............................
maltase maltose
.............................. ..............................
amino acids stomach wall

.............................. ..............................
pancreas and
amino acids
.............................. .............................. small intestinal wall
lipase fats
.............................. ..............................
[5]
(b) Bile is made in the liver, stored in the gall bladder and passes into the small intestine.
Describe the role of bile in digestion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) After chemical digestion the products of digestion are absorbed.
Define absorption.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/F/M/17
736/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(d) Lack of protein in the diet can result in protein-energy malnutrition.
State the name of one disease caused by protein-energy malnutrition.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) People that eat a diet that is high in fats are often advised to reduce their intake of fats.
Suggest the health benefits of this change in diet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/F/M/17
737/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 9 8 6 6 7 1 7 1 5 4 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SG) 129195/3
738/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fat is a necessary component of the human diet.
(a) State three ways in which the human body uses fat.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................
[3]
The arrows in Fig. 1.1 show the pathway of fat in part of the alimentary canal.
liver
stomach
pancreas
R
Q
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
739/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) State the name of
(i) the enzyme secreted by the pancreas that digests fat
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the products of chemical digestion of fat
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) the liquid that is produced by the liver and stored by organ P in Fig. 1.1
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) organ P in Fig. 1.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Explain what happens to ingested fat at R in Fig. 1.1 before chemical digestion occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Explain how the products of fat digestion are transported from Q to the rest of the body.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
740/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
One possible effect of too much fat in the diet is coronary heart disease.
(e) Describe how too much fat in the diet may cause coronary heart disease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(f) Describe and explain how coronary heart disease can be treated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
[Total: 21]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
741/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 The genes for antibodies are only active in lymphocytes.
(a) Define the term gene.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Lymphocytes produce antibodies.
Outline the role of antibodies in the defence of the body against pathogens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
742/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) Fig. 2.1 is a drawing made from an electron micrograph of a lymphocyte that produces
antibodies.
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1 contains statements about the structures visible in Fig. 2.1.
Complete Table 2.1 by
• naming the structure

• identifying the letter that labels the structure.
The first one has been done for you.
Table 2.1

absorption of amino acids used
cell membrane A
in making antibodies
stores genetic information as
DNA
provides energy for making
antibodies
site of production of antibodies
transport of antibody molecules

for release into blood
[4]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
743/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(d) State the name of one type of cell, other than a lymphocyte, that is involved in the defence of
the body against pathogens and describe its role.
name ..........................................................................................................................................
role .............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 12]
744/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Heroin is a drug that acts on the nervous system.
(a) Define the term drug.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
There are pain receptors in the skin. These receptors transmit impulses along sensory neurones
to the spinal cord.
Fig. 3.1 shows the synapses between sensory neurone A and a relay neurone and sensory
neurone B and a relay neurone, in the spinal cord.
Fig. 3.2 is an enlarged view of the synapse between sensory neurone A and the relay neurone, as
indicated by the circle on Fig. 3.1.
sensory neurone A
from pain receptors
in the skin
relay neurone in
the spinal cord
impulses to sensory
regions of the brain
sensory neurone B
from pain receptors Fig. 3.1
in the skin
neurotransmitter
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
745/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(b) Describe how impulses are transmitted across the synapse.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) Suggest how the structure of a synapse ensures that impulses travel in one direction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) When an impulse arrives along sensory neurone B, a different neurotransmitter is released.
This prevents the production of an impulse in the relay neurone.
Molecules of heroin have a similar shape to the neurotransmitter released from these
neurones.
Explain how heroin affects the function of the synapse.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
746/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(e) List three stimuli, other than pain, which humans can detect.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
747/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 Fig. 4.1 shows part of the circulatory system of a fish.
The arrows show the direction of blood flow.
A B
gills
C
atrium
heart
ventricle
E
Fig. 4.1
(a) The circulatory system of fish is described as a single circulation.
State what is meant by a single circulation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State the letter of the blood vessel in Fig. 4.1 that contains blood at the highest pressure.
................. [1]
(c) The gills are the site of gas exchange.
State two features of gas exchange surfaces.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
748/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 The giant quiver tree, Aloe pillansii, shown in Fig. 5.1, is an endangered species.
These long-lived trees grow in harsh environments. Some populations of A. pillansii are found
within the Richtersveld National Park, but one population is found just outside on a mountain
called Cornell’s Kop in southern Africa.
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) State the genus of the giant quiver tree.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why the A. pillansii trees on Cornell’s Kop represent a population.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Suggest three reasons why the giant quiver tree is an endangered species.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
749/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) It was estimated in 2005 that the total number of giant quiver trees in the wild was less than
3000, which is considered to be very low compared with other tree species.
Explain the risks to a plant species of having very small numbers.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
750/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(d) The population of A. pillansii trees on Cornell’s Kop was surveyed and photographed at four
sites, A to D, from 1937 onwards. Researchers took photographs at all four sites in 2004 and
compared them with the original photographs.
Table 5.1
site date of the number of number of number of average annual

original living trees in living trees in dead tree mortality rate
photograph the original 2004 stumps / percentage of
photograph deaths per year
A 1937 12 4 8 1.0
B 1953 9 5 4 0.9
C 1985 5 3 2 2.1
D 2001 6 5 1 5.6
(i) Calculate the percentage decrease in the number of living trees at site B from 1953
to 2004.
.............................................................%
[2]
(ii) Describe what the analysis of the photographs shows about the population of A. pillansii
on Cornell’s Kop.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 15]
751/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 Students investigated the effect of mineral ion deficiencies on the growth of radish plants.
The seeds that were used in the experiment were from plants that had been self-pollinated for
many generations and were therefore all genetically identical.
(a) Explain the advantage of using genetically identical radishes in this investigation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
The radish seedlings were divided into four groups. Each group was grown in a different mineral
ion solution as follows:
1 complete solution containing all the major mineral ions
2 solution with all the major mineral ions except nitrate ions
3 solution with all the major mineral ions except magnesium ions
4 solution with all the major mineral ions except phosphate ions
The apparatus used to investigate the growth of the plants is shown in Fig. 6.1.
solution solution
inflow outflow
mineral ion
solution
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
752/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) State three other environmental factors that could affect the growth of the seedlings.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................
[3]
The results of the investigation are shown in Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
group mineral ion number total dry mass of all plants / mg mean dry
solution of plants mass of one
leaves roots total plant / mg
1 complete 8 1880 1110 2990 374
2 without 10 1410 750 2160 216
nitrate ions
3 without 9 1600 260 1860 207
magnesium
ions
4 without 9 1670 140 1810 201
phosphate
ions
(c) Describe and explain the results for the radishes grown without nitrate ions (group 2).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
753/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(d) Describe the likely appearance of the radish plants grown in the solution without magnesium
ions (group 3) and explain your answer.
appearance ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
explanation.................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(e) Phosphate ions are a component of DNA.
Suggest why the radish plants in group 4 grew less than the radish plants in the complete
solution (group 1).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/M/J/17
754/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 8 3 7 8 4 6 0 9 5 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 129193/4
755/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Wheat is a crop plant grown to produce flour.
(a) Flour is used to make dough for bread.
(i) State the name of the organism used to make dough rise.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the name of the process that this organism uses to produce the gas that makes
dough rise.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Farmers grow crop plants such as wheat to provide food.
(i) State two types of natural event that could cause widespread food shortages.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The increasing human population is another reason for food shortages.
Explain how the increasing human population contributes to food shortages.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/M/J/17
756/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Many farmers grow crop plants as monocultures to improve yields.
Fig. 1.1 shows a monoculture of wheat.
Fig. 1.1
Describe the impact of large-scale monocultures on the environment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 11]
757/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Many researchers are studying the structure and function of genes.
(a) Define the term gene.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Every living cell is able to make proteins.
The process begins in the nucleus.
Describe how proteins are made in a cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/M/J/17
758/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(c) Fig. 2.1 is a diagram of a protein used to move ions across membranes in root hair cells.
protein
high concentration
of ions
direction of
ion movement
low concentration
of ions
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the name of the process that moves mineral ions into root hair cells through cell
membrane proteins.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how protein molecules move ions across a membrane during this process.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) Proteins are also found in the blood.
State the names of two proteins found in the blood.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 12]
759/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 Heart rate is influenced by electrical impulses from the brain.
(a) State the name of the type of cell that conducts electrical impulses to the heart.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The electrical activity of the heart can be recorded on an ECG.
Fig. 3.1 shows an ECG of one heartbeat.
T
P
Q
S
Fig. 3.1
(i) Table 3.1 shows how the electrical activity, during one heartbeat, corresponds to the
opening and closing of the valves in the heart.
Complete Table 3.1 using the words ‘open’ and ‘closed’.
Table 3.1
part of the ECG result of electrical atrioventricular

semilunar valves
shown in Fig. 3.1 activity valves
P atria contract
QRS ventricles contract
atria and ventricles
T
relax
[3]
(ii) State the function of heart valves.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/M/J/17
760/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(c) Fig. 3.2 shows the ECG of an athlete before and during exercise.
exercise begins
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
time / s
Fig. 3.2
(i) Calculate the heart rate, in beats per minute, before exercise begins.
..................................... beats per minute

[2]
(ii) Using Fig. 3.2, describe how the electrical activity of the heart during exercise differs
from the electrical activity before exercise begins.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
761/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(iii) Describe how the ventilation of the lungs will change while the athlete exercises.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/M/J/17
762/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
4 A balanced diet is required to ensure healthy weight gain as children grow.
(a) Explain the term balanced diet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) A doctor diagnosed a young child with marasmus.
Describe the symptoms of marasmus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
763/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) The child with marasmus was put on a special diet.
He was given fortified milk, which is milk that has extra nutrients added to it.
The child was encouraged to drink as much fortified milk as he wanted over a period of seven
months.
Table 4.1 shows the composition of the fortified milk given to the child and the composition of
cow’s milk for comparison.
Table 4.1
type of milk milk composition

percentage of percentage of percentage of energy / kJ dm–3
protein carbohydrate fat
fortified milk 16.5 57.0 17.0 5468
cow’s milk 3.3 4.6 3.9 2845
The body mass of the child who had marasmus and the mean body mass of healthy children
of the same age were recorded. The data is shown in Fig. 4.1.
12
10
Key
marasmus
healthy
8
body mass / kg
0
12 14 16 18 20 22
time / months
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/M/J/17
764/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
Using the information in Table 4.1 and Fig. 4.1, describe and explain the importance of diet
when treating children affected by marasmus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
(d) It is important that children with marasmus produce enough bile.
Describe the role of bile in the digestion of fats.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 15]
765/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
5 Acid rain has negative effects on many ecosystems.
(a) Describe the negative effects of acid rain on freshwater ecosystems, such as streams, rivers
and lakes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
(b) Two groups of students were asked to investigate the effects of acid rain on the germination
of pine tree seeds.
(i) Both groups of students decided to use sulfuric acid rather than hydrochloric acid to
represent acid rain in their investigation.
Suggest why.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State how the students could have measured the pH of the sulfuric acid.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The students provided the environmental conditions that seeds need to germinate.
State two of these environmental conditions.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
766/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) One group of students recorded the change in temperature as the seeds germinated in five
insulated flasks, labelled A to E.
(i) Suggest why germinating seeds increase in temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The students sterilised the seeds before their investigation.
Their teacher told them to use a sterilising solution to wash the seeds because steam
would kill the seeds and prevent the seeds from germinating.
Explain why steam sterilisation would prevent seed germination.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
The results from this group of students are shown in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
flask pH group 1
temperature
of seeds after
72 hours / °C
A 2.0 20.6
B 3.5 20.3
C 4.0 21.2
D 5.5 34.1
E 7.0 46.2
(iii) Describe the results obtained by group 1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/M/J/17
767/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(d) The second group of students placed 100 seeds in each of five Petri dishes, labelled 1 to 5.
Group 2 used the same range of pH values as group 1.
They recorded the percentage of seeds that had germinated after 72 hours.
Table 5.2
Petri pH group 2
dish
percentage of
seeds germinated
after 72 hours
1 2.0 20
2 3.5 82
3 4.0 19
4 5.5 65
5 7.0 87
The teacher thought that group 2 had forgotten to add the sulfuric acid to one of their Petri
dishes.
Suggest which Petri dish was not set up correctly.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 15]
768/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 Fig. 6.1 is a flow diagram that shows what happens at the start of a bacterial infection.
T S
U
V U
Fig. 6.1
(a) Cell R is a prokaryote and cell S is a lymphocyte.
(i) State the names of two cellular structures that would be found in both prokaryotes and
white blood cells.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe how the cellular structure of white blood cells differs from the cellular structure
of prokaryotes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/M/J/17
769/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(b) Cell R is a pathogen that has structures T on its surface. These structures are recognised
by cell S. Cell S is a lymphocyte and it produces structures V. Cell R reproduces by binary
fission and cell S divides by process U.
Identify T to V from the passage and Fig. 6.1.
T ..............................
U ..............................
V ..............................
[3]
(c) Cell W in Fig. 6.2 also responds to pathogens.
cell W
pathogen
Fig. 6.2
(i) State the name of the process shown in Fig. 6.2.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe what happens to the pathogen during the process shown in Fig. 6.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
770/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
Fig. 6.3 shows some human teeth that require dental treatment.
Fig. 6.3
(d) (i) Identify the type of teeth in Fig. 6.3.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how bacteria dissolve enamel to cause tooth decay.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Describe two ways of preventing tooth decay.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/M/J/17
771/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 3 4 2 3 1 3 5 5 8 6 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/JG) 129192/3
772/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is a diagram of the human heart. The diagram shows the phase during the heart beat
when the atria contract. The blood vessels that carry blood to and from the heart are labelled
A to F.
C D
B
1 left atrium
right atrium
A F
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Draw one arrow on Fig. 1.1 to show the pathway taken by blood from a vein into the
right ventricle. [1]
(ii) Identify the letter of the blood vessel that carries blood at the highest pressure and state
its name.
letter ...............
name of the blood vessel ..................................................................................................

[1]
(b) (i) Suggest what causes the valves at 1 and 2 to close during a heart beat.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the function of valves 1 and 2 in the heart.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
773/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows the phase of the heartbeat when the ventricles are filling with blood.
Using Fig. 1.1, describe and explain how the blood travels from the right ventricle to the
lungs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) State the name of the part of the heart labelled 3 and state its role in the mammalian
circulation.
name .........................................................................................................................................
role ............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
774/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Quinoa, Chenopodium quinoa, is a dicotyledonous plant that produces seeds that resemble those
of cereals, such as rice.
(a) State one feature shown by all dicotyledonous plants.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) During seed development, amino acids are converted into storage proteins and proteases.
Protease molecules become active when the seed absorbs water at the start of germination.
Fig. 2.1 shows the formation of a storage protein and a protease in developing quinoa seeds
and the action of protease on the storage protein during germination.
amino acids in
seeds
protein
synthesis in
seeds
part of a storage
protein molecule part of a
protease
molecule
protease breaks
down storage
protein
supply of amino acids in the

germinating seed
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
775/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(i) During seed development in quinoa some genes are ‘switched on’.
Define the term gene.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Describe the differences in structure between the storage protein and the protease
shown in Fig. 2.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State the roles of mRNA and ribosomes in protein synthesis.
mRNA .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
ribosome ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
776/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(d) Researchers investigated the effect of pH on the activity of the protease in quinoa seeds.
0.6
0.5
0.4
enzyme activity
/ arbitrary units 0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0
pH
Fig. 2.2
(i) State two factors other than pH that would affect enzyme activity.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the effect of increasing pH on the activity of the protease in quinoa seeds.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
777/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(iii) Explain the activity of protease at pH 4.0 and at pH 7.0.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 16]
778/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Red blood cells in humans are produced from stem cells.
Fig. 3.1 shows how a red blood cell is produced and becomes specialised.
nucleus
mitochondria
stem cells
stem cell
production of
haemoglobin
nucleus
mature red
blood cell
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
779/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(a) Use the information in Fig. 3.1 to describe how red blood cells are produced and explain how
they are adapted to their function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
(b) Red blood cells are suspended in the liquid part of the blood.
State the name of the liquid part of the blood.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Stem cells are also found under the outer layer of the skin.
Explain why stem cells are found in the skin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
780/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(d) A type of anaemia is caused by a dietary deficiency.
(i) State the nutrient that is deficient in the diet when this type of anaemia occurs.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State two symptoms of anaemia.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Some people have sickle cell anaemia.
Describe the cause of this type of anaemia.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
781/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Fig. 4.1 is a photograph of a yellow-shouldered Amazon, Amazona barbadensis, a species of

parrot found along the Venezuelan coast of the Caribbean.
Fig. 4.1
(a) State the vertebrate group that includes A. barbadensis and give two features that are used
to classify animals into this group.
vertebrate group .......................................................................................................................
feature 1 ....................................................................................................................................
feature 2 ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) This species is subdivided into several populations on the mainland and on the islands of
Margarita and Bonaire. Scientists believe that yellow-shouldered Amazons rarely travel
between these places.
Explain what biologists mean when they refer to populations of animals, such as
A. barbadensis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
782/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(c) The number of yellow-shouldered Amazons on Margarita Island had decreased to 700 parrots
by 1989. The population then increased to 1600 parrots by 2009.
Part of this increase was due to the release of captive-bred parrots on the island. This is one
of the few successful release programmes of parrots. A similar release programme in Arizona
in the 1980s of a different species of parrot was not successful.
Suggest why release programmes for captive-bred parrots were not successful.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Some captive breeding programmes involve very small numbers of animals.
Outline the disadvantages of such programmes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
783/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(e) Many biologists think that it is better to conserve ecosystems rather than individual species,
such as parrots.
Explain the advantages of conserving ecosystems.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 13]
784/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 An investigation studied the effect of fertilisers on grass yield and species diversity in a grassland
ecosystem.
Some plots within the grassland were treated with fertilisers containing nitrogen, magnesium and
phosphate.
The control plots did not have any added fertiliser.
The average yields were:
• plots with fertiliser 1733 g m–2 year –1

• plots without fertiliser (control plots) 1009 g m–2 year –1
(a) (i) Calculate the difference between the average yields of the two plots within the field as a
percentage of the average yield of the control plots.
............................................................ %
[2]
(ii) Explain why the average yield increased as a result of adding the fertiliser.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) State the name of the process that occurs when fertiliser washes off land into rivers and
causes an algal bloom.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
785/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
The researchers counted the number of different plant species in each of the plots in the grassland
to determine species diversity. Counting started at the beginning of the growing season and was
repeated every three weeks.
The average number of plant species in each type of plot is shown in Fig. 5.1.
25
plots without fertiliser

(control plots)
20 plots with fertiliser
15
species diversity
/ average number of plant
species m–2
10
0
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
time / weeks
Fig. 5.1
(b) Describe the effect of fertiliser on the plant species diversity shown in Fig. 5.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
786/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(c) Suggest why some species of plants survive in grassland and others do not.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
787/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 Meningitis is a transmissible disease. One form of the disease is caused by the bacterium
Neisseria meningitidis.
(a) Define the term transmissible disease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) One effect of meningitis is a slowing down of nerve impulses.
State what is meant by a nerve impulse.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The spread of meningitis can be controlled by using vaccines.
(i) Explain how vaccination provides active immunity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(ii) If meningitis disappears from a country, explain why the vaccine should continue to be
used in that country.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
788/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(d) People who have meningitis are treated with injections of antibodies to give them passive
immunity.
(i) Suggest why the antibodies must be injected rather than taking them by mouth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why passive immunity does not give long-term protection against diseases, such
as meningitis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/M/J/17
789/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 2 6 7 4 1 8 0 0 9 1 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/JG) 133513/4
790/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2 show two images of villi.
Fig. 1.1 shows a surface view of many villi viewed through a scanning electron microscope.
Fig. 1.2 shows a section of one villus viewed through a light microscope.
villi
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
791/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
Villi are found in the small intestine.
(a) State the function of villi.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Identify and describe two of the labelled components of a villus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) Some infections in the small intestine can cause diarrhoea.
(i) Describe the effects of diarrhoea on the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State the treatment for the effects of severe diarrhoea.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) (i) Blood transports nutrients.
State the component of the blood that transports nutrients.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
792/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(ii) The nutrients in the blood can be used to become part of cells.
State the name of this process.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Amino acids are an example of a type of nutrient transported in the blood.
State two examples of larger molecules found in cells that are made from amino acids.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
793/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 A group of students planned an investigation to determine the effects of physical activity on

breathing rate.
(a) Describe how the students could measure their breathing rates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The students measured their breathing rates before physical activity and every minute for
five minutes after cycling around the school field.
Write a hypothesis for their investigation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
794/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) Fig. 2.1 shows a woman on a stationary bicycle. The mask fitted over her nose and mouth
measures the composition of the air she breathes out.
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2 shows the concentration of carbon dioxide in the air expired by the woman in the five
minutes after she stopped exercising.
The dashed line on the graph shows the concentration of carbon dioxide in her expired air
when she was at rest, before she began to exercise.
6.5
concentration of
6.0 carbon dioxide
expired
percentage before exercise
concentration 5.5
of carbon dioxide concentration of
5.0 carbon dioxide
expired
4.5 immediately
after exercise
4.0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / min
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
795/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
Describe and explain the results of the investigation shown in Fig. 2.2.
Use the data in Fig. 2.2 in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
(d) Before starting the investigation, the researchers confirmed that the woman did not have
coronary heart disease.
(i) Suggest why.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why exercise is recommended for people with a high risk of developing coronary
heart disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 14]
796/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 The flowers of pea plants can be pollinated by bees.
(a) State three features of flowers that would attract insects such as bees.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Successful pollination results in fertilisation.
Describe the events that occur after pollen grains leave the anther of a flower until fertilisation
takes place.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
797/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(c) Following fertilisation, seeds will form.
In pea plants there are two alleles for height:
• tall (T)
• dwarf (t)
(i) Define the term allele.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A farmer wanted to identify the genotype of tall pea plants as either homozygous
dominant or heterozygous.
He used a homozygous recessive dwarf pea plant to determine the genotype of the tall
pea plants.
State the name of this type of genetic cross.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Complete the genetic diagram to determine the genotype of the parent plant if all the
offspring from the cross are tall plants.
parental phenotypes tall × dwarf
gametes ............. ............. + ............. .............
offspring genotype .............................................................................................................
offspring phenotype ...........................................................................................................

[4]
798/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(iv) Another farmer wants to produce pure-breeding dwarf pea plants.
State the genotypes of both of the parent pea plants the farmer should use.
Give a reason for your choice.
genotypes ..........................................................................................................................
reason ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
799/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 A neurone is a type of specialised animal cell.
(a) (i) Neurones develop from unspecialised cells.
State the name of these unspecialised cells.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) All animal cells have some common features.
State two structural features common to all animal cells.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Most neurones are longer than other types of animal cell.
Suggest why most neurones are very long.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Some neurones connect to effector organs.
(i) State the name of the type of neurone that connects to an effector organ.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State one example of an effector organ.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
800/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(c) Fig. 4.1 shows parts of two neurones. The area in the dashed circle has been magnified.
E
L
J
K
Fig. 4.1
(i) Complete Table 4.1. One row has been done for you.
Table 4.1
letter from name description

Fig. 4.1
component of the cell that releases energy during
aerobic respiration
H neurotransmitters chemicals that transmit signals from one neurone
to the next neurone
the gap between two neurones
the sac in which neurotransmitters are transported

to the cell membrane
the molecules that the neurotransmitters bind to
the structure that controls the activities in the cell
[5]
(ii) State where in the body the neurones in Fig. 4.1 would be found.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
801/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(d) Describe how neurotransmitters move across the gap between two neurones.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(e) Nerves and hormones coordinate the functions of the body.
Suggest why blinking of the eyes is coordinated by nerves and not hormones.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 16]
802/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 (a) Yeast can respire aerobically and anaerobically.
State the balanced chemical equation for aerobic respiration by yeast.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) When yeast respires anaerobically, ethanol is released.
Ethanol is a type of sustainable resource that can be produced from a wide range of crops.
It can be used as a biofuel.
Table 5.1 summarises some information about crops that are used to make biofuel.
Table 5.1
biofuel energy yield optimum growth optimum annual

crop
produced / GJ per ha temperature / °C rainfall range / mm
wheat ethanol 53–84 24 800–1200
corn ethanol 63–76 18 360–1000
sugar beet ethanol 110–122 18 360–1000
sugar cane ethanol 110–140 28 800–1200
oil palm oil 150–166 28 1100–2500
(i) Uruguay has an average temperature range of 12 °C to 24 °C and an average annual

rainfall of 1000 mm.
Suggest and explain which crop would be the most suitable crop to grow for producing
biofuel in Uruguay.
Use the information in Table 5.1 to justify your choice.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
803/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(ii) Sugar cane requires soil with high concentrations of nitrogen and potassium.
Describe how the lack of nitrate ions would affect the production of sugar cane.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) Researchers in Brazil are considering using microscopic algae that live in water to
produce biofuels. They have found that algae can produce a maximum amount of energy
of 200 GJ per m2.
1 m2 = 0.0001 ha
Convert the production of biofuel from algae into GJ per ha.
Space for working.
.......................................... GJ per ha [1]
(iv) Suggest why people who are concerned about the environment want countries to
produce more biofuel from algae rather than the crops listed in Table 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
804/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(c) Define the term sustainable development.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
805/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 Viruses can cause diseases.
(a) (i) State two other features of all viruses.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe how vaccination can prevent the spread of disease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[5]
806/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows four different viruses.
herpesvirus retrovirus
adenovirus picornavirus
Fig. 6.1
Suggest one feature that could be used to classify viruses into groups.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0610/41/O/N/17
807/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 1 1 5 0 0 4 7 3 4 4 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 139138/3
808/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 The lungs and the kidneys are part of the excretory system of mammals.
(a) (i) State the name of one substance that is excreted from the lungs and state where in the
body it is produced.
name .................................................................................................................................
site of production ...............................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) State the name of one excretory substance, that is removed by the kidneys, that contains
nitrogen.
Explain why it is excreted.
name .................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Blood is filtered as it flows through the kidneys.
(i) State the name of the structure within a kidney that filters the blood.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State two components of blood that do not pass through the filter.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
809/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) The filtrate which is formed from the blood in the kidneys contains many useful substances,
which are reabsorbed into the blood.
Fig. 1.1 is a photomicrograph of a cross-section of some of the cells that carry out reabsorption.
E A
Fig. 1.1
(i) Complete the table by stating the letter in Fig. 1.1 that identifies each structure.
structure letter on Fig. 1.1

microvilli
nucleus
mitochondrion
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
810/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(ii) State one function of the nucleus.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State the name of one part of the mammalian body other than the kidney that has cells
with microvilli.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) The cells that line the kidney tubules, such as those in Fig. 1.1, absorb many compounds
from the filtrate.
Use Fig. 1.1 to explain how the cells are adapted for absorption.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 16]
811/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 A person who wanted to begin a fitness programme did some vigorous exercise.
A fitness trainer took a drop of blood from the person’s finger before, during and after vigorous
exercise and tested it for lactic acid.
(a) Explain why it is important that the equipment used for taking blood is clean (sterile).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The results of the tests for lactic acid are shown in Fig. 2.1.
period of exercise
14
12
10
8
blood lactic
acid concentration
/ mmol dm–3 6
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
time / min
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
812/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
Describe and explain the changes in blood lactic acid concentration shown in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
813/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) The concentration of lactic acid in the blood of two athletes was investigated. One athlete, P,
had been training and the other, Q, was returning to training after an injury.
Blood samples were taken from both athletes during a training session. The results are shown
in Fig. 2.2.
10
8
athlete Q
7
blood lactic 6
acid concentration athlete P
/ mmol dm–3 5
0
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
running speed / km h–1
Fig. 2.2
(i) The lactic acid threshold is the level of exercise where the lactic acid concentration
begins to increase exponentially.
State the lactic acid threshold for athletes P and Q.
P ................................................. km h–1
Q ................................................. km h–1
[1]
(ii) Suggest a reason for the difference in lactic acid threshold of athletes P and Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
814/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(iii) Explain the link between physical activity and breathing.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 14]
815/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
3 Tasmania is an island off the south coast of Australia. Sheep were introduced to Tasmania in the
nineteenth century.
Fig. 3.1 shows the population of sheep in Tasmania from 1820 to 1940. The dashed line shows
the trend in the population growth.
2.25
2.00
1.75
1.50
number
of 1.25
Key
sheep
1.00 solid line = actual number
/ millions
of sheep
0.75
dashed line = trend line
0.50
0.25
0.00
1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940
year
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe the trend in the population of sheep in Tasmania between 1820 and 1940, using the
information in Fig. 3.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
816/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(b) Explain the change in the trend of the population that you described in 3(a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The sheep that were first introduced to Tasmania were not well adapted to the environment.
Describe how farmers can use selective breeding to improve their sheep so that they are
better adapted to the environment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
817/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(d) Maintaining very large populations of farm animals is unsustainable.
Define the term sustainable development.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
818/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
4 The garden pea, Pisum sativum, is a plant which has flowers that have both male and female
parts. P. sativum is naturally self-pollinating.
(a) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of self-pollination.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Gregor Mendel studied inheritance in the garden pea, P. sativum.
The flowers of P. sativum that he studied were either purple or white. The gene that controls
flower colour has two alleles, B and b.
When Mendel crossed purple-flowered plants with white-flowered plants all the plants in the
next generation had purple flowers.
(i) Table 4.1 shows five genetic terms that can be applied to Mendel’s study of the
inheritance of flower colour.
Complete Table 4.1 by stating an example of each genetic term. The first one has been
completed for you.
Table 4.1
term example in P. sativum
dominant trait purple flowers
recessive allele
phenotype
homozygous genotype
heterozygous genotype
[4]
819/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(ii) Test crosses can be used to determine the genotype of a plant with purple flowers.
The genetic diagrams show test crosses for purple-flowered plants with two different
genotypes.
Complete the genetic diagrams for test cross 1 and test cross 2.
test cross 1 test cross 2

parental
phenotype purple flowers × white flowers purple flowers × white flowers
parental
genotype Bb × ..................... BB × .....................
genotypes
of gametes ....... ....... + ....... ....... ....... ....... + ....... .......
offspring
genotypes ....................................................... .......................................................................
offspring
phenotypes ..................................................... .......................................................................
[5]
(c) Pickerel weed, Pontederia cordata, is a plant that grows in shallow water on the edges of
ponds and lakes in North America.
A few seedlings of these plants are white. The white seedlings cannot make chlorophyll.
Researchers carried out several crosses using pickerel weed plants.
Table 4.2
number of offspring
cross
green white
1 149 0
2 70 22
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
820/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(i) Select suitable symbols for the alleles and state the possible genotypes of the parents
for each cross.
cross 1 ...............................................................................................................................
cross 2 ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) It is not possible to carry out a test cross with pickerel weed plants.
Suggest why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 17]
821/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 Fig. 5.1 shows the bacterium Helicobacter pylori, which is a human pathogen.
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the genus of Helicobacter pylori.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) H. pylori is placed in the prokaryote kingdom.
State two structural features that H. pylori shares with other prokaryotes.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) (i) H. pylori can cause infections in the stomach.
Suggest how this infection could be treated.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State one natural body defence that is found in the stomach.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
822/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(d) The immune system is not very effective against pathogens, such as H. pylori, that live inside
the alimentary canal. This means that active immunity and passive immunity do not provide
complete protection against H. pylori infections.
Explain how active immunity differs from passive immunity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
823/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 Glucose is absorbed into the blood in the small intestine. Fig. 6.1 shows the human circulatory
system and the pathway taken by molecules, such as glucose, when they travel in the blood.
head & arms
lungs
C
heart
liver
stomach &
intestines
kidneys
muscles in
the legs
E
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
824/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(a) Complete Table 6.1 by naming the blood vessels labelled on Fig. 6.1 and stating whether
they contain oxygenated blood or deoxygenated blood. One row has been completed for you.
Table 6.1
letter on oxygenated or
name of the blood vessel
Fig. 6.1 deoxygenated blood
E femoral artery oxygenated
[4]
(b) Insulin is a hormone that is secreted by the pancreas.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Describe the role of insulin in the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
825/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(c) Explain how blood flow in the skin helps to maintain a constant body temperature in very hot
conditions.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0610/42/O/N/17
826/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 4 8 6 2 9 4 4 5 3 1 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SG) 133511/4
827/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows two photomicrographs of a cross-section of trachea.
low magnification high magnification
Fig. 1.1
(a) The open space at the centre of the trachea is labelled A in Fig. 1.1.
Air travels into and out of the trachea through this open space.
State a gas that is at a higher concentration in expired air than in inspired air.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Describe and explain the functions of the structures or substances labelled B to E in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
828/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows some events during inspiration.
P pressure in the thorax decreases

Q air travels down the trachea
R air enters the bronchi
S air travels through the larynx
T air enters the nose
U the ribcage moves upwards and outwards
V air enters the alveoli
Fig. 1.2
(i) Put the events shown in Fig. 1.2 into the correct sequence. Two have been done for you.
T V
[2]
(ii) Suggest why alveoli have thin walls.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Sickle-cell anaemia is a disease that reduces the delivery of oxygen to tissues.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 12]
829/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 A group of students investigated the effect of exercise on their heart rates.
They measured their heart rates:
• before exercise
• immediately after running 1 km
• one minute after running 1 km
Before doing the investigation they wrote a hypothesis.
(a) (i) Write a hypothesis for this investigation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The students measured their pulse as an indicator of heart rate.
Describe how the students could measure their pulse.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In another investigation, a doctor tested some of her patients to determine the effect of
exercise on coronary heart disease.
Coronary heart disease is caused by a blockage in the coronary artery.
Describe the effect on the heart of a blockage in the coronary artery.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
830/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(c) The doctor divided her coronary heart disease patients randomly into two equal groups.
Each group was given different instructions:
• group A – patients were given a daily exercise plan

• group B – patients were told to make their own exercise plan.
The doctor measured the heart rate (HR) of each patient immediately after doing exercise
and again one minute later.
She calculated their heart rate recovery using this formula:
heart rate recovery = HR immediately after exercise – HR one minute after exercise.
She then calculated the average heart rate recovery for each of the two groups of patients.
The doctor repeated these measurements after three months and after six months.
30
Key:
high group A
25
fitness
group B
20
average
heart rate recovery medium
15
/ beats per minute fitness
10
low
5
fitness
0
0 3 6
time / months
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
831/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
Describe and explain the effect of exercise on the average heart rate recovery of the coronary
heart disease patients in group A and group B.
Use data from Fig. 2.1 to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
(d) Exercise may reduce the risk of coronary heart disease.
State one other possible way of reducing the risk of developing coronary heart disease.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 13]
832/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 Apple scab is a disease that infects apple trees.
Fig. 3.1 shows apples from uninfected and infected apple trees.
uninfected apple tree infected apple tree
Fig. 3.1
There is a gene that determines whether or not apple trees are resistant to apple scab disease.
There are two alleles for this gene:
• disease-resistant, R
• not disease-resistant, r
(a) (i) Complete the sentence.
Genes and alleles are made of ..................................................... . [1]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
833/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(ii) A farmer wanted to do a test cross to identify the genotype of disease-resistant apple
trees. This would tell him whether his trees were either homozygous dominant or
heterozygous.
Determine the phenotypes of the offspring if the unknown parent apple tree was
heterozygous.
Complete the genetic diagram:
parental phenotypes disease-resistant × not disease-resistant
gametes ......... ......... × ......... .........

, ,
offspring genotype ....................................................................................
offspring phenotype ....................................................................................

[5]
(b) The farmer wanted to breed disease-resistant apple trees.
(i) He decided not to use heterozygous disease-resistant apple trees in his selective
breeding programme.
Explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
834/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(ii) The farmer wanted to be sure that only the selected disease-resistant apple trees would
reproduce.
Suggest what the farmer could do to ensure that only the selected apple trees were
pollinated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Describe how artificial selection differs from natural selection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
835/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
4 The Canadian Government were concerned about overfishing at the Grand Banks in the Atlantic
Ocean.
As a result, commercial fish stocks were monitored from 2002 until 2013.
The population data for four species of fish are shown in Fig. 4.1.
140 species K
120
100
number of fish 80
/ million 60
40
20
0
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013
year
700 species L
600
500
number of fish 400
/ million 300
200
100
0
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013
year
700 species M
600
500
number of fish 400
/ million 300
200
100
0
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013
year
2500
species N
2000
number of fish 1500

/ million
1000
500
0
2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013
year
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
836/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(a) Use the information in Fig. 4.1 to:
(i) state the most abundant fish species in 2002
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) suggest the fish species that had the most carefully controlled fishing quotas between
2002 and 2013.
Give a reason for your choice.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) calculate the percentage increase in species N between 2002 and 2003.
Show your working.
................................................................
[2]
(b) Overfishing is a possible reason for the decrease of the population of species M between
2002 and 2003.
State two other reasons that could have caused this decrease.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
837/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) Overfishing can be reduced by having large holes in fishing nets.
Fig. 4.2 shows sections of two fishing nets, the drawings are both at the same scale.
fishing net with fishing net with

large holes small holes
Fig. 4.2
(i) Suggest how controlling the size of the holes in fishing nets helps to reduce overfishing.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe and explain how methods other than fishing net hole size, could help to prevent
overfishing.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
838/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(d) Fig. 4.3 shows part of a food web at the Grand Banks.
guillemot gull seal
cod squid
zooplankton
phytoplankton
Fig. 4.3
Cod is a species of fish that almost became extinct in the Grand Banks due to overfishing.
Suggest how the extinction of cod could affect the food web in Fig. 4.3.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
839/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(e) Sustainable development is required to manage fish stocks.
Define the term sustainable development.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 17]
5 The kingdom Fungi contains a great diversity of organisms including yeasts, moulds and
mushrooms.
Like plants, fungi contain nuclei and mitochondria.
(a) (i) State the function of mitochondria.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State two characteristics of fungi that are used to distinguish them from plants.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Yeast is a single-celled fungus that is used in bread-making.
Explain why yeast is used in bread-making.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
840/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(c) Penicillium is a mould fungus that is used to make antibiotics.
(i) Describe how Penicillium is used to make the antibiotic penicillin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why antibiotics can be used to treat bacterial infections but not viral infections.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Some fungi are human pathogens.
Describe how the human body prevents pathogens from entering.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 14]
841/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 Fig. 6.1 is a flow chart of some of the events that occur to maintain a constant body temperature.
body temperature rises
temperature receptors
detect a stimulus
the central nervous system receives

an impulse and sends the impulse on
sweat glands respond

blood vessels respond
hair erector muscles respond
body temperature falls

to the set level
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
842/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
(a) (i) State the names of the types of neurones at X and Y in Fig. 6.1.
X ........................................................................................................................................
Y ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the name of one effector shown in Fig. 6.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State the name of the mechanism that controls homeostasis which is represented by the
flowchart in Fig. 6.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Describe how shunt vessels in the skin function to help cool the body when the body
temperature is high.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Describe how the sweat glands and the hair erector muscles function in mammals when
the external environment is hot.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
843/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(c) (i) Suggest an advantage of using neurones rather than hormones to regulate body
temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) List two hormones that are involved in homeostasis.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2017 0610/43/O/N/17
844/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 7 9 6 6 0 2 6 2 8 1 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/FD) 112431/6
845/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 A researcher used a light microscope to observe epithelial cells from a human cheek.
Fig. 1.1 is a photograph that the researcher made of these cells.
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Name the parts labelled A and B.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The cells in Fig. 1.1 each have a cell membrane.
State one of the functions of a cell membrane.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) State how the shape of the cells shown in Fig. 1.1 differs from the shape of a palisade
mesophyll cell in a leaf.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
846/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows an electron micrograph of a mitochondrion.
Fig. 1.2
Mitochondria have two membranes, an inner membrane and an outer membrane. The inner
membrane is folded and used in respiration.
Suggest why the inner membrane of mitochondria is folded.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
847/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(c) Table 1.1 shows different specialised cells and the average number of mitochondria each cell
contains.
Table 1.1
specialised cell type average number of

mitochondria
liver cell 1000–2000
red blood cell 0
sperm cell 25–75
heart muscle cell 1500
Explain the differences between the average numbers of mitochondria in the cells shown in
Table 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
848/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 Reflexes are simple responses that protect the body.

The pathway that nerve impulses travel along during a reflex is called a reflex arc.
(a) Letters A to G show the components of a reflex arc.
A stimulus
B motor neurone
C sensory neurone
D receptor cell
E response
F relay neurone
G effector
Put the components into the correct sequence. Two have been done for you.
A E
[1]
(b) Impulses travel between neurones across a synapse.
Describe how impulses travel across the synapse from one neurone to another.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Drugs such as heroin restrict the movement of impulses across synapses. Users can become
addicted to heroin. When users stop taking heroin they may experience withdrawal symptoms.
(i) State two withdrawal symptoms that heroin users may experience.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest why heroin abuse may increase criminal activity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
849/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(d) Heroin abuse may lead to HIV infection. There is currently no approved vaccine that prevents
the spread of HIV. Vaccination stimulates active immunity against specific pathogens.
(i) Explain how vaccination stimulates active immunity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(ii) Explain what is meant by passive immunity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
850/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
3 Yeast is used in bread-making. It respires anaerobically, producing carbon dioxide.
(a) Write the balanced chemical equation for anaerobic respiration of yeast in bread-making.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
A baker wants to increase the rate of carbon dioxide production in the bread-making process.
The baker trialled different concentrations of glucose solution in the bread dough.
4.5
4.0
rate of
carbon 3.5
dioxide
production 3.0
/ cm3 per min
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
concentration of glucose solution / %
Fig. 3.1
(b) (i) Predict the rate of carbon dioxide production if the concentration of the glucose solution
was 7.0%.
.................................................................................................................. cm3 per min [1]
(ii) The baker carried out the trials at 30 °C.

The trials were repeated at 20 °C.
Draw a line on Fig. 3.1 to show the rate of carbon dioxide production at 20 °C. [2]
(iii) The baker carried out another trial at 80 °C. No carbon dioxide was released.
State why no carbon dioxide was produced.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Name one other industrial process that uses yeast.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
851/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(d) During the production of penicillin, large fermenters are used. Fig. 3.2 shows a fermenter.
SUHVVXUH
UHOHDVHYDOYH PRWRU
SUREHV
QXWULHQWV VDPSOHWXEH
VWHULOHDLU
FRROLQJZDWHU
ZDWHUILOOHG
MDFNHW
FRROLQJZDWHU
VWLUUHU
WDS
SURGXFWV
Fig. 3.2
(i) Explain the functions of the following parts of the fermenter:
stirrer .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
water-filled jacket ...............................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
probes ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) The air and nutrients that are added to the fermenter are sterile.
State why they must be sterile.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
852/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
4 (a) Increasing human population is linked to a change in carbon dioxide concentration in the
atmosphere. Fig. 4.1 shows the carbon dioxide concentration between 1958 and 2010
measured at Mauna Loa, Hawaii.
400
390
380
carbon
dioxide 370
concentration
/ parts per 360
million
350
340
330
320
310
1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010
year
Fig. 4.1
Describe how the carbon dioxide concentration has changed between 1958 and 2010.
You will gain credit for using data from Fig. 4.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
853/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(b) (i) Carbon dioxide is a greenhouse gas.

Name one other greenhouse gas.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how carbon dioxide enhances the greenhouse effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Mineral ions are needed for plant growth.
Complete Table 4.1 to show the function and effect of the lack of some mineral ions on plants.
One has been done for you.
Table 4.1
mineral ion function in plants effect of lack of mineral ion on plants
nitrate
magnesium
phosphate used for making DNA poor root growth
[4]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
854/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(d) Fertilisers can cause pollution to aquatic systems. Overuse of fertilisers may cause
eutrophication. Lake Udai Sagar in India is an example of an aquatic system that shows high
levels of eutrophication.
Explain what happens in aquatic environments, such as Lake Udai Sagar, when eutrophication
occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
[Total: 17]
855/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 Fig. 5.1 shows the different types of human teeth.
PRODUV
SUHPRODUV
FDQLQH
LQFLVRUV
Fig. 5.1
(a) Describe the functions of the canine and molar teeth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the skulls of a tiger and a rabbit.
WLJHU UDEELW
Fig. 5.2 not to scale
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
856/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(i) State two ways in which the teeth of a tiger differ from the teeth of a rabbit, using evidence
from Fig. 5.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest one feature visible in Fig. 5.2 that indicates the tiger is a carnivore.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
857/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) Omnivores are animals that eat both animals and plants. Scientists use the number and types
of teeth to classify animals as carnivores, herbivores or omnivores.
Table 5.1 shows examples of different types of mammals and their teeth.
Table 5.1
mammal carnivore, herbivore incisors canines premolars molars total

or omnivore number
of teeth
1 omnivore 12 4 16 12
2 omnivore 12 4 16 12 44
3 herbivore 12 4 12 12 40
4 herbivore 6 2 12 12 32
5 carnivore 12 4 16 10 42
6 carnivore 12 4 10 8 34
X 12 4 12 8 36
(i) Calculate the number of molars as a percentage of the total number of teeth for
mammal 1.
Show your working.
.............................................................%
[2]
(ii) The skull of an unidentified mammal, X, is likely to be a carnivore.

Discuss the evidence in Table 5.1 for and against classifying mammal X as a carnivore.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
858/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(d) Mechanically digested food travels from the mouth to the stomach. The gastric juice in the
stomach contains hydrochloric acid, giving a low pH environment.
Explain why it is important to have a low pH in the stomach.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(e) Products of digestion are absorbed through the villi in the small intestine.
Explain how villi are adapted for absorption.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(f) Coeliac disease is caused by a reaction to a protein called gluten. The villi become damaged
causing a reduction in the absorption of nutrients.
Suggest possible effects on the body of a reduction in the absorption of nutrients.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 20]
859/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
6 A new species of frog was discovered in 2009 in the Amazon rainforest in Peru.
Fig. 6.1 shows this frog, Osteocephalus castaneicola.
Fig. 6.1
(a) State the genus of this animal.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
In the past, anatomy was a way to classify species. DNA is now used to aid the classification of
organisms.
(b) (i) Draw and annotate a diagram to show the structure of DNA.
[3]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
860/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(ii) Describe how DNA can be used to classify organisms.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) DNA controls cell function by controlling the production of proteins.
(i) Proteins are coded for by a length of DNA.
What is the name given to the length of DNA which codes for a protein?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe the role of mRNA in protein synthesis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/F/M/16
861/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

BIOLOGY 0610/41
*7774192182*

1 hour 15 minutes


06_0610_41_2016_1.15
862/988
Combined By NESRINE
2 June 2023-2016
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the human heart and the main blood vessels. The functions of the parts of the
heart and some of the blood vessels are given in Table 1.1.
J
C
D
H
E
G
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
863/988
Combined By NESRINE
3 June 2023-2016
Complete Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
function letter on name
Fig. 1.1
structure that separates oxygenated and

deoxygenated blood
structure that prevents backflow of blood

from ventricle to atrium
blood vessel that carries oxygenated blood A aorta
blood vessel that carries deoxygenated blood
structure that prevents backflow of blood

from pulmonary artery to right ventricle
chamber of the heart that contains oxygenated blood
chamber of the heart that contains deoxygenated blood
[6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
864/988
Combined By NESRINE
4 June 2023-2016
(b) A group of students used a heart monitor to record the pulse rate of an athlete during a 5000
metre race. The recordings started just before the race began and ended just after it had
finished, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
start of race end of race
180
160
140
120
pulse rate 100

/ beats per
minute 80
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
time / min
Fig. 1.2
(i) Use data from Fig. 1.2 to describe the effect of exercise on the pulse rate of the athlete.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
865/988
Combined By NESRINE
5 June 2023-2016
(ii) Explain the change in pulse rate between 2 minutes and 3 minutes after the recordings
started.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [4]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
866/988
Combined By NESRINE
6 June 2023-2016
2 The nervous system coordinates the responses of animals to changes in their environment.
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement of the nervous system in a mammal.
Complete Fig. 2.1 by writing the names of the missing parts of the mammalian nervous system
in the boxes.
nervous system
............................ ............................
nervous system nervous system
brain cranial nerves spinal nerves

............................
Fig. 2.1
[3]
(b) Fig. 2.2 is a flow chart that shows how an involuntary action is controlled.
painful stimulus
pain receptor
relay neurone
motor neurone
muscle
response
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
867/988
Combined By NESRINE
7 June 2023-2016
(i) State the structure found at X.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State the type of involuntary action shown by the flow chart.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State two ways in which a voluntary action differs from an involuntary action.
1 .............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
2 .............................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
868/988
Combined By NESRINE
8 June 2023-2016
(c) Fig. 2.3 shows three pots of seedlings that have been kept in different conditions.
pot P pot Q pot R
Fig. 2.3
(i) State the conditions in which pots P and Q were kept.
P .............................................................................................................................
Q.............................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) State the name of the growth response shown by the seedlings in pot R.
................................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
869/988
Combined By NESRINE
9 June 2023-2016
(iii) Explain the advantage to the seedlings of this growth response.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(iv) Auxins control the growth responses of seedlings.
Explain how auxins control the growth response of the seedlings in pot R.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [4]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
870/988
Combined By NESRINE
10 June 2023-2016
3 Catalase is an enzyme that breaks down hydrogen peroxide inside cells. Red blood cells contain
catalase.
Some dogs have an inherited condition in which catalase is not produced. This condition is known
as acatalasia and it is caused by a mutation in the gene for catalase.
(a) Define the terms gene and gene mutation.
gene...................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
gene mutation....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A geneticist was asked to investigate the inheritance of acatalasia in dogs.
The normal allele is represented by B and the mutant allele is represented by b.
The geneticist made the diagram in Fig. 3.1 to show the inheritance of acatalasia in a family
of dogs. The shaded symbols indicate the dogs with acatalasia.
normal male
1 2 3
normal female
male with acatalasia

4 5
female with acatalasia
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the genotypes of the dogs identified as 1, 2 and 3 in Fig. 3.1.
1 .............................................................................................................................
2 .............................................................................................................................
3 ............................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
871/988
Combined By NESRINE
11 June 2023-2016
(ii) The geneticist crossed dog 4 with dog 5. Approximately half of the offspring had
acatalasia and half the offspring did not have acatalasia.
Complete the genetic diagram to show how this is possible.
dog 4 dog 5
parental phenotypes normal has acatalasia
parental genotypes ............. .............
+
gametes .......... , .......... ..........
Punnett square
offspring genotypes................................................................................................
offspring phenotypes.............................................................................................. [3]
(iii) State the name given to the type of cross that you have completed in (b)(ii).
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
872/988
Combined By NESRINE
12 June 2023-2016
4 Rhabdostyla is a single-celled organism that has no cell wall and no chlorophyll.
(a) Gases are exchanged across the cell membrane of Rhabdostyla.
Name:
the gas produced by Rhabdostyla ....................................................................................
the process that produces the gas ...................................................................................
the method of removal of the gas .....................................................................................
[3]
Rhabdostyla lives in freshwater habitats, such as ponds, lakes and rivers.
Freshwater has a very low concentration of solutes.
Rhabdostyla has a contractile vacuole that fills with water and empties at intervals as shown in
Fig. 4.1. The contractile vacuole removes excess water.
contractile
vacuole
contractile
vacuole expels
excess water
not drawn to scale
Fig. 4.1
(b) Explain, using the term water potential, why Rhabdostyla needs to remove excess water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
873/988
Combined By NESRINE
13 June 2023-2016
In an investigation, individual Rhabdostyla were placed into different concentrations of sea water.
The rate of water excreted by the contractile vacuole of each organism was determined. The results
are shown in Fig. 4.2.
20
18
16
14
12
rate of
water
excreted 10
/ µm3 s–1
8
0
0 4 12
concentration of sea water / %
Fig. 4.2
(c) Explain the results shown in Fig. 4.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
874/988
Combined By NESRINE
14 June 2023-2016
(d) Single-celled organisms with cell walls do not have contractile vacuoles. Suggest why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
875/988
Combined By NESRINE
15 June 2023-2016
5 A researcher investigated the population growth of fish for fish farming. The researcher stocked a
farmer’s lake with a small number of these fish and recorded the number of fish over the next five
years. The researcher’s results showed that the population of fish had increased exponentially.
(a) (i) Use the axes to show the exponential growth in the population of fish.
Label the axes and draw a suitable curve.
[3]
(ii) Explain why the population of fish increased exponentially.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
876/988
Combined By NESRINE
16 June 2023-2016
Fig. 5.1 shows the total mass of wild fish caught worldwide between 1950 and 2012 and the mass
of farmed fish produced worldwide over the same period.
100
90
80
70
wild fish
60
mass of fish
/ millions 50
of tonnes
40
farmed fish
30
20
10
0
1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010
year
Fig. 5.1
(b) Describe the changes in the mass of wild fish caught between 1950 and 2012.
You will gain credit if you use data from Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
877/988
Combined By NESRINE
17 June 2023-2016
(c) It is predicted that wild fish stocks will decrease and become depleted because of overfishing.
Suggest ways in which governments can try to maintain the stocks of wild fish.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]
(d) Like fish stocks, forests can be a sustainable resource.
Discuss what is meant by the term sustainable resource, using forests as an example.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
878/988
Combined By NESRINE
18 June 2023-2016
6 (a) State the balanced chemical equation for photosynthesis.
light
............................................................... chlorophyll ...............................................................
[2]
A student investigated the effect of different wavelengths of light on the rate of photosynthesis of
the water plant, Cabomba.
The student used the apparatus shown in Fig. 6.1.
OFF
tap syringe
1
2
3
4
5
0.0
graduated tube gas
0.5
1.0
1% sodium
hydrogencarbonate
solution
funnel
Cabomba
bench lamp
coloured filter
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
879/988
Combined By NESRINE
19 June 2023-2016
(b) The student collected the gas produced by the plant for five minutes. The results are shown
in Table 6.1.
Table 6.1
colour of filter wavelength of volume of gas

3
light / nm collected / cm
violet 400 0.80
blue 475 0.80
green 550 0.20
yellow 600 0.40
red 675 0.90
Describe the effect of wavelength of light on the rate of photosynthesis as shown in the student’s
results in Table 6.1.
You will gain credit if you use data from the table.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) State how the student would calculate the rates of photosynthesis from the results in Table 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15 [Turn over
880/988
Combined By NESRINE
20 June 2023-2016
(d) State why the student:
(i) kept the lamp at the same distance during the investigation,
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) used sodium hydrogencarbonate solution.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(e) State three uses in a plant of the carbohydrate produced in photosynthesis.
1.........................................................................................................................................
2.........................................................................................................................................
3.........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 11]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_41_2016_1.15
881/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

BIOLOGY 0610/42
*4518800444*

1 hour 15 minutes


06_0610_42_2016_1.10
882/988
Combined By NESRINE
2 June 2023-2016
1 All mammals have a double circulatory system. Fig. 1.1 shows part of the human double circulatory
system.
right lung left lung
P J
O B K
C
A
D
N muscular wall
of heart
right kidney left kidney
L
M
Fig. 1.1
(a) Name the muscular wall that separates the left and right sides of the human heart.
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Describe what is meant by the term double circulation.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one advantage of a double circulation.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
883/988
Combined By NESRINE
3 June 2023-2016
(c) Table 1.1 describes some of the structures of the human circulatory system shown in Fig.1.1.
Complete the table.
Table 1.1
description name of structure letter on Fig. 1.1
heart chamber with the

thickest muscular wall
blood vessel that carries

oxygenated blood to the heart
blood vessel that carries

oxygenated blood away from the heart
blood vessel that carries blood away

from the kidneys
blood vessel with the largest vena cava N

lumen
[4]
(d) Describe how blood is transported from the vena cava to the lungs. You may use the letters
on Fig. 1.1 in your description.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10 [Turn over
884/988
Combined By NESRINE
4 June 2023-2016
(e) (i) Doctors recommend that a healthy diet can reduce the risk of coronary heart disease.
Give one other lifestyle improvement patients can make that can reduce the risk of
coronary heart disease.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Sometimes surgery is required to treat coronary heart disease.
Describe one named example of surgery that can treat coronary heart disease.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
885/988
Combined By NESRINE
5 June 2023-2016
2 Fig. 2.1 is an electron micrograph showing the bacteria, Vibrio cholerae.
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) Bacteria are prokaryotes.
State two distinguishing features of all prokaryotes.
1 .............................................................................................................................
2 .............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The bacteria shown in Fig. 2.1 each have a flagellum.
Suggest the function of the flagellum in bacteria.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10 [Turn over
886/988
Combined By NESRINE
6 June 2023-2016
(b) V. cholerae is the pathogen that causes cholera. Vaccination is used to control the spread of
cholera during an outbreak.
Explain how vaccination can control the spread of diseases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) Many years ago scientists discovered that V. cholerae secretes a toxin. Fig. 2.2 shows the
results of an experiment to measure the flow of chloride ions out of human cells with and
without the toxin.
14
12
10
key
8 with toxin
flow of chloride
ions / arbitrary without toxin
units 6
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
time / s
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
887/988
Combined By NESRINE
7 June 2023-2016
(i) Calculate the difference in flow of chloride ions between the cells with the toxin and the
cells without the toxin at 50 seconds.
Show your working and state the units in your answer.
................................................. [2]
(ii) Use the data in Fig. 2.2 to describe the effect of the toxin on the flow of chloride ions
out of the cells.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
(iii) Chloride ions cannot move out of cells by simple diffusion.
Suggest and describe how chloride ions could move out of cells.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10 [Turn over
888/988
Combined By NESRINE
8 June 2023-2016
(d) The loss of chloride ions from cells causes diarrhoea and dehydration in patients with cholera.
(i) State which organ in the alimentary canal is affected by the cholera toxin.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Describe the treatment for cholera.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
889/988
Combined By NESRINE
9 June 2023-2016
3 Anthocyanin is a red pigment found in carnation flowers. Some carnation plants have a gene for
making anthocyanin.
(a) (i) A flower grower bred red carnations.
Describe how growers selectively breed plants.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Explain the disadvantages of using sexual reproduction to breed red carnations.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Meiosis is necessary for sexual reproduction of carnation plants.
Define the term meiosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10 [Turn over
890/988
Combined By NESRINE
10 June 2023-2016
(c) Carnation plants show co-dominance for the anthocyanin gene. There are two alleles:
A
• F – allele for anthocyanin pigment (red flowers)
N
• F – allele for no anthocyanin pigment (white flowers)
(i) State the genotype of a carnation plant that is heterozygous for this gene.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Describe the phenotype of a heterozygous carnation plant for this gene.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
A N A A
(iii) The breeder crossed a F F carnation plant with a F F carnation plant. Predict, using
a genetic diagram, the proportion of pure breeding carnation plants in the offspring.
parental genotypes FAFN × FAFA
+
gametes ........... ........... ........... ...........
Punnett square
offspring genotypes .............................................................................................
offspring phenotypes ...........................................................................................
proportion of pure breeding carnation plants .......................................................
[4]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
891/988
Combined By NESRINE
11 June 2023-2016
4 Some students investigated osmosis in raw potato sticks.
(a) Define the term osmosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The students measured the mass of four of the potato sticks using an electronic balance.
Fig. 4.1 shows an electronic balance.
Fig. 4.1
The students left each potato stick in one of four different liquids for 5 hours:
• distilled water
3
• 0.1 mol per dm sodium chloride solution
3
• 0.5 mol per dm sodium chloride solution
3
• 1.0 mol per dm sodium chloride solution.
After 5 hours they measured the mass again and calculated the change in mass.
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10 [Turn over
892/988
Combined By NESRINE
12 June 2023-2016
(i) Predict which of the liquids would cause the largest decrease in mass of a potato stick.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The students dried the potato sticks with paper towels before putting them on the
electronic balance.
Suggest why.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) After the experiment the students noticed that the potato stick with the lowest mass was soft
and floppy.
Explain why the potato stick had become soft and floppy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) The students followed the same experimental procedure with boiled potato sticks and found
no overall change in mass in any of the solutions.
Suggest why the mass of the boiled potato sticks remained the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
893/988
Combined By NESRINE
13 June 2023-2016
5 Hormones are secreted by glands or made artificially by drug companies.
(a) (i) Name the gland that secretes testosterone.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State why testosterone can improve sporting performance.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Describe the role of progesterone in the menstrual cycle.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) Synthetic progesterone is found in oral contraceptives.
Name one other hormone often found in oral contraceptives.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10 [Turn over
894/988
Combined By NESRINE
14 June 2023-2016
Water entering two sewage works, A and B, was tested for the presence of four hormones.
The testing was repeated on water that left the sewage works to flow into lake A and lake B.
The results of the tests on the water samples are shown in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
3
hormone concentration of hormones at sewage works / ng per dm
A B
before sewage after sewage before sewage after sewage

treatment treatment treatment treatment
including ozone including chlorine
and chlorine alone
oestrogen not measurable not measurable 0.1 not measurable
synthetic 8.5 8.0 4.5 4.6

progesterone
natural 2.5 2.8 2.4 2.7

progesterone
testosterone 15.6 3.7 2.7 3.1
(b) Explain which water sample was most polluted with hormones before sewage treatment. Use
data from Table 5.1 to support your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
895/988
Combined By NESRINE
15 June 2023-2016
(c) One reason for treating sewage is to reduce the concentration of hormones in the environment.
(i) Chlorine was used in the sewage treatment of both lakes.
Describe the effect that chlorine had on the hormone concentrations in the water. Use
data from Table 5.1 to support your answer.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State the main purpose of chlorine in sewage treatment.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10 [Turn over
896/988
Combined By NESRINE
16 June 2023-2016
(d) Describe the negative consequences of letting untreated sewage flow into lake ecosystems.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
897/988
Combined By NESRINE
17 June 2023-2016
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the changes in glucose concentration of the blood.
high blood B
glucose
concentration A
set level
time
low blood
C
glucose
concentration
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the process that maintains blood glucose concentration within set limits.
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Name the hormone that would be secreted in response to the increasing blood glucose
concentration at A in Fig. 6.1.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Name an organ that is responsible for the decrease in blood glucose concentration
after B in Fig. 6.1.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Name the compound that is converted to glucose at C in Fig. 6.1.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10 [Turn over
898/988
Combined By NESRINE
18 June 2023-2016
(c) Describe the symptoms and treatment of Type 1 diabetes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [5]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_42_2016_1.10
899/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

BIOLOGY 0610/43
*1314985603*

1 hour 15 minutes


06_0610_43_2016_1.9
900/988
Combined By NESRINE
2 June 2023-2016
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the human gas exchange system. The functions of the parts of the gas exchange
system are given in Table 1.1.
A
M
K B
C
J
D
H
E
G
Fig. 1.1
Table 1.1
function letter on Fig. 1.1 name
structure that makes sounds A larynx
bone that provides protection for the lungs
airway that allows passage of air only into

the right lung
airway that allows passage of air into

both lungs
contracts to increase volume of thorax
muscle that contracts to lower the ribcage
site of gas exchange
[6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
901/988
Combined By NESRINE
3 June 2023-2016
(b) The gas exchange system contains cartilage.
Describe the function of cartilage in the gas exchange system.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Soon after starting physical activity the concentration of carbon dioxide in the blood increases.
(i) Name the process inside cells that produces carbon dioxide.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State the effect on breathing of an increase in carbon dioxide concentration in the blood.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Explain how this effect on breathing is coordinated.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9 [Turn over
902/988
Combined By NESRINE
4 June 2023-2016
2 Fig. 2.1 is a flow chart that shows the events that occur as light travels through the eye.
light reflected
by an object
light enters the eye and

passes through the cornea
light passes
through the lens
light enters
tissue X
light is absorbed
by rod cells
impulse is
generated
impulse is transmitted
to the brain
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) State the name of the tissue X.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State the name of the nerve that transmits impulses from the eye to the brain.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State what happens to rays of light as they enter the cornea and the lens.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
903/988
Combined By NESRINE
5 June 2023-2016
(iv) Describe the role of rod cells.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) A plant, Arabidopsis thaliana, was placed on its side in the dark. Fig. 2.2 is a series of drawings
made of the plant, over seven days, as it responded to a change in its surroundings.
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the stimulus to which the plant responded.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Name the growth response shown by the plant.
................................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9 [Turn over
904/988
Combined By NESRINE
6 June 2023-2016
(iii) Explain the advantage to plants of the growth response shown in Fig. 2.2.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(iv) Auxins control the growth responses of seedlings.
Explain how auxins control the growth response of A. thaliana, shown in Fig. 2.2.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [4]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
905/988
Combined By NESRINE
8 June 2023-2016
3 (a) Sex in cats is determined in the same way as in humans.
Complete the diagram below to show how sex is determined in cats.
male cat female cat
female cat (XX)
gametes X X
......
male cat
(.........)
......
offspring ratio..................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A scientist investigated the inheritance of fur colour in cats.
The gene for coat colour is located on the X chromosome. The gene has two alleles:
• B black
• b orange.
B
The X chromosome with the allele for black is represented by X .
b
The X chromosome with the allele for orange is X .
A female cat can be a mixture of these colours, described as calico.
Fig. 3.1 shows the inheritance of this condition in a family of cats.
orange male
1 2
black male
calico female
orange female
3 4 5 6 7
black female
Fig. 3.1
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
906/988
Combined By NESRINE
9 June 2023-2016
(i) State the genotypes of cats 1, 4, and 5 in Fig. 3.1.
cat 1 .......................................................................................................................
cat 4 .......................................................................................................................
cat 5 ....................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Coat colour in cats is an example of discontinuous variation.
Explain why coat colour is an example of discontinuous variation.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9 [Turn over
907/988
Combined By NESRINE
10 June 2023-2016
4 A student investigated the diffusion of substances through Visking tubing, an artificial membrane
which has some of the properties of cell membranes.
The student made a bag of Visking tubing as shown in Fig. 4.1.
top of syringe
elastic band test-tube
Visking bag bag filled with starch

starch solution solution
and placed into a
test-tube of water
water
knot
Fig. 4.1
The student added some iodine solution to the water in the test-tube.
After 30 minutes at room temperature, the contents of the Visking bag were stained blue-black, but
the water outside remained a yellow colour.
(a) (i) Explain these results.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
908/988
Combined By NESRINE
11 June 2023-2016
(ii) State three factors that influence the movement of molecules through membranes.
1 .............................................................................................................................
2 .............................................................................................................................
3 .............................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9 [Turn over
909/988
Combined By NESRINE
12 June 2023-2016
(b) Fig. 4.2 is an electron micrograph of a red blood cell within a capillary.
muscle cell
magnification ×6500
Fig. 4.2
(i) Molecules of carbon dioxide that are produced in muscle cells are transported to the
blood.
Describe the pathway taken by these molecules of carbon dioxide.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Explain how capillaries are adapted for their functions.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
910/988
Combined By NESRINE
13 June 2023-2016
(c) Mammals have a transport system for carbon dioxide. Plants absorb carbon dioxide from their
surroundings to use in photosynthesis.
Explain how a molecule of carbon dioxide from the atmosphere reaches the site of
photosynthesis in a leaf.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9 [Turn over
911/988
Combined By NESRINE
14 June 2023-2016
5 Fig. 5.1 shows an area of forest where some of the trees have been cut down.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain the reasons why forests may be cut down as shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
912/988
Combined By NESRINE
15 June 2023-2016
(b) The loss of forests from parts of the world is assessed by satellite imagery. Table 5.1 shows
data on the forests in Indonesia and Malaysia, two countries in South-East Asia which have
large areas of forest.
Table 5.1
country type of area / thousands of hectares
forest
1990 2000 2005 2010
Indonesia natural 118 545 95 737 94 158 90 883

forest
Malaysia natural 20 420 19 932 19 317 18 649

forest
(i) Calculate the percentage loss of natural forest in Indonesia between 1990 and 2010.
Show your working and express your answer to the nearest whole number.
........................... % [3]
(ii) Use the data in Table 5.1 to compare the loss of natural forest in Indonesia with the
loss of natural forest in Malaysia.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9 [Turn over
913/988
Combined By NESRINE
16 June 2023-2016
(iii) Many hectares of natural forest have been cleared in countries such as Malaysia
and Indonesia for oil palm plantations. Both countries have also replanted forests to
grow timber and other forest products.
Suggest why replanted forests and plantations are less useful for conservation than
natural forest.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
(c) Discuss the effects of deforestation on areas of land.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
914/988
Combined By NESRINE
17 June 2023-2016
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the alimentary canals of two mammals, an insect-eating bat, which is a carnivore,
and a rabbit, which is a herbivore.
0 10
cm
0 2 W
cm
insect-eating bat rabbit
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the organs labelled V and W.
V ........................................................................................................................................
W .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Explain the role of mechanical digestion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9 [Turn over
915/988
Combined By NESRINE
18 June 2023-2016
Scientists investigated digestion in different species of mammal. The mammals that they studied
ranged in size from an elephant shrew, Elephantulus edwardii, with a mass of 50 g to an ox, Bos
taurus, with a mass of 220 kg.
The scientists added indigestible particles to the animals’ food and timed how long the particles
stayed in the digestive system.
The results for 24 different mammal species are shown in Fig. 6.2.
160
140
120
100
time in
digestive
80
system
/ hours
60
40
20
0
0.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
relative body mass / arbitrary units
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
916/988
Combined By NESRINE
19 June 2023-2016
(c) The scientists concluded that food stays longer in the digestive systems of larger mammals
compared with smaller mammals.
Discuss the evidence from Fig. 6.2 for and against the statement that food stays longer in the
digestive systems of larger mammals.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0610_43_2016_1.9
917/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 4 3 7 5 1 0 9 4 0 6 *
BIOLOGY 0610/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/FD) 117738/4
918/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
1 Penicillin is an antibiotic.
(a) (i) Explain why doctors give antibiotics to people who are ill.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why it is important to complete a full treatment of antibiotics.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
919/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(b) Penicillin was discovered in 1928 by Alexander Fleming.
Name the type of microorganism that produces the antibiotic penicillin.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Penicillin is produced commercially in fermenters as shown in Fig. 1.1.
motor
R
Q pH control reservoir
exhaust outlet
inlet for penicillin-producing
microorganisms
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2016 0610/41/O/N/16
920/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(i) Describe how a fermenter can be sterilised.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Table 1.1 shows some names of the parts of the fermenter and their functions.
Complete Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
letter from Fig. 1.1 name function
water jacket
nutrient inlet
air supply
allows collection of the liquid containing

T outlet
penicillin after fermentation
[5]
(d) Describe what happens to the liquid containing penicillin after it is collected from the fermenter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 14]
921/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 Carp are a type of fish. Researchers in Brazil measured the body lengths of a population of carp in
a river in 1998 and again in 2008.
Histograms of their results are shown in Fig. 2.1.
1998
16
14
12
number of 10
carp
/ thousands 8
0
0.0-4.0 4.1-8.0 8.1-12.0 12.1-16.0 16.1-20.0 20.1-24.0
body length / cm
2008
16
14
12
number of 10
carp
/ thousands 8
0
0.0-4.0 4.1-8.0 8.1-12.0 12.1-16.0 16.1-20.0 20.1-24.0
body length / cm
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2016 0610/41/O/N/16
922/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(a) Define the term population.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Describe the variation in body length of the carp population in 1998. Use the data in Fig. 2.1
to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The total population of carp in 1998 was 43 000 fish.
(i) Calculate the total population of carp in 2008.
Show your working.
............................................................[2]
923/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(ii) The decrease in the carp population by 2008 was caused by overfishing.
Explain how fish stocks can be sustained.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) Body length is an example of continuous variation.
(i) Suggest what causes the variation in body length in a population of fish.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Continuous variation is shown with a histogram.
Name the type of graph that should be used to show discontinuous variation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2016 0610/41/O/N/16
924/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
3 Pepsin is a protease enzyme found in the alimentary canal.
(a) (i) Name the product formed from the digestion of proteins by protease enzymes.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the organ in the alimentary canal where pepsin is secreted.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A biologist performed an experiment to find the optimum pH for the activity of pepsin.
The enzyme activity was measured in four test-tubes. Each test-tube contained a 1 cm3 cube
of cooked egg white which contains protein.
Fig. 3.1 shows the four test-tubes.
The biologist measured the time taken for the complete digestion of the cubes of cooked egg
white.
solution of enzyme
at a given pH
cube of cooked
egg white
pH 1 pH 3 pH 5 pH 7
Fig. 3.1
(i) The biologist ensured all the cubes of cooked egg white were exactly the same size.
Suggest why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Temperature must be controlled in this experiment.
Describe how temperature could be controlled.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
925/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) The same experiment was performed with trypsin, another protease enzyme.
Predict the optimum pH for trypsin.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Enzymes, such as proteases, are important in digestion.
Describe in detail how enzymes function, using other digestive enzymes as examples.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 0610/41/O/N/16
926/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Type 1 diabetes is caused by the immune system destroying body cells.
(a) (i) Suggest which organ in the body is attacked by the immune system to cause Type 1
diabetes.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Antibodies are part of the immune system.
Describe how antibodies function.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Humans need vitamin D as part of their diet.
(i) Describe a cause of vitamin D deficiency in humans.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe the effects of vitamin D deficiency in humans.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
927/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
Scientists have found that mice can suffer from Type 1 diabetes. They also found that vitamin D
affects the development of Type 1 diabetes in mice.
Two groups of mice were studied. One group were normal and the other group were
vitamin D-deficient. The percentage of mice in each group that developed Type 1 diabetes was
recorded every fifty days.
Table 4.1 shows their results.
Table 4.1
percentage of mice with Type 1 diabetes

age / days
normal mice vitamin D-deficient mice
0 0 0
50 1 1
100 8 35
150 34 62
200 45 65
250 46 65
(c) Describe the effect of vitamin D deficiency on the development of Type 1 diabetes in mice.
Use the data in Table 4.1 to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) Suggest the symptoms that mice with Type 1 diabetes would have.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2016 0610/41/O/N/16
928/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(e) Describe the treatment for human patients with Type 1 diabetes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 16]
929/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
5 Fig. 5.1 is an image of a germinating seed showing the growing root.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Describe and explain how the structures seen at J are adapted for their function.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[5]
© UCLES 2016 0610/41/O/N/16
930/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(b) (i) The root shown in Fig. 5.1 is growing downward into the soil.
Name this response seen in roots.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Name the chemical that controls this response.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) There are situations, either in wild plants or in laboratory experiments, where roots do
not grow downwards.
Suggest and explain one situation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
931/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 A DNA molecule has two strands as shown in Fig. 6.1.
strand 2
G T
A
strand 1
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) Fill in the boxes on Fig. 6.1 to show the letter of the bases on strand 2 that will pair with
the corresponding bases on strand 1. [2]
(ii) State the name for the structure of a DNA molecule as shown in Fig. 6.1.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
932/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
When molecules of DNA are used to classify species, only one of the two DNA strands is
sequenced.
First the DNA sequence from one strand of a DNA molecule from each species is lined up against
one strand from another species.
The bases of the DNA sequences from the same strand can then be compared with each other.
Fig. 6.2 shows a short section from the DNA sequences of eight plant species. There are ten
differences between species A and species B. These differences are shown in Fig. 6.2.
Species A: CTCCTCGGGT GACGGCCTAG CCCGTTGACG AATCCCATTC CTAAACTTT
Species B: CTCCTAGGGT GCAGGACTAG CCCGTTGACG AATCCCATTC CCAAGA
Species C: CTCATAGGGT GCAGGCCTAG CCCGTTGACG AATCACATTC CGATT
Species D: CTCATAGGGT GCAGGCCTAG CCCCTTGACG AATCCAATTC CGCTT
Species E: CTCATAGGGT GCAGGCCTAG CCCGTTGACG AATCCAATTC CGCTT
Species F: CTCCTAGGTT GCAGGCCTAG CCCTTTGAAG AATCACATTC CCCAA
Species G: CTCCTCGGGT GCAGGCATAG CCCTTTGACG AATCCCCTTC CGAAA
Species H: CTCCTAGGGT GCAGGCATAG CCCTTTGACG AATCCCCTTC CAAAAT
Fig. 6.2
(b) The number of differences between the DNA sequences of the eight species shown in Fig. 6.2
are recorded in Table 6.1.
Count the number of differences between the DNA sequences shown in Fig. 6.2 for:
• species C and species D
• species G and species H
Write your answers in Table 6.1. [2]
© UCLES 2016 0610/41/O/N/16
933/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
Table 6.1
species species species species species species species species

A B C D E F G H
species
10 10 13 12 11 10 9
A
species
7 8 7 7 7 6
B
species
3 7 8 8
C
species
1 9 9 8
D
species
9 8 10
E
species
6 7
F
species
G
species
H
(c) The most closely related species have the fewest differences between their DNA sequences.
State which two plant species shown in Table 6.1 are most distantly related to each other.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The most closely related species have the shortest distance from a branching point on a
classification tree.
Use the information in Table 6.1 to complete the classification tree in Fig. 6.3. Write the
letter corresponding to species B, C, D and G in the box next to the correct branch of the
classification tree. [3]
Species
Species E
Species
Species H
Species
Species F
Species
Species A
Fig. 6.3
934/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(e) A modern method for improving crop productivity is to cut out sections of DNA carrying a
useful gene from one organism and place them into another organism.
(i) Name the technique of inserting genes from one organism into another.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A gene for producing a vaccine has been inserted into banana plants.
Give two other examples in which crop plants have been changed by inserting genes.
State one advantage for each example.
example 1 ..........................................................................................................................
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
example 2 ..........................................................................................................................
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2016 0610/41/O/N/16
935/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 1 4 9 6 4 4 0 0 9 0 *
BIOLOGY 0610/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SG) 116625/3
936/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 Milk is sometimes referred to as a ‘complete food’ because it contains all the nutrients that a
young mammal requires.
(a) Table 1.1 shows three nutrients that are contained in milk.
Complete the table by stating one role of each nutrient in the body of a young mammal.
Table 1.1
nutrient role in the body

protein
lactose (milk
sugar)
calcium
[3]
(b) Protein digestion begins in the stomach of the human alimentary canal and is completed in
the small intestine.
Describe in detail how enzymes function to digest protein in the alimentary canal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
937/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Some people are unable to digest lactose (milk sugar) and have a condition known as lactose
intolerance.
Fig. 1.1 shows what happens in the intestine of a person who is lactose intolerant if they eat
food containing a lot of lactose.
from stomach
build-up of gas
and water
bacteria produce
hydrogen, methane small intestine
and carbon dioxide
large intestine
bacteria digest
lactose to simple
sugars
water
Key: not to scale

lactose
bacteria
diarrhoea and gas
Fig. 1.1
(i) Explain why lactose is not absorbed by the small intestine.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
938/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
(ii) Suggest the dangers to health of severe diarrhoea if it is not treated for a long time.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) Hydrogen gas is produced by the bacteria that digest lactose in the large intestine. The
gas is absorbed into the blood and excreted through the lungs. Lactose intolerance can be
monitored by measuring the hydrogen gas content of the air a person breathes out.
People taking part in an investigation into lactose intolerance consumed the following milk
products on different days:
A. untreated milk
B. milk treated with lactase immediately before drinking
C. milk treated with lactase three days before drinking
D. yoghurt made by bacteria that digested the lactose in the milk
The hydrogen gas content of the air breathed out was measured every hour for five hours
following the ingestion of each milk product.
The mean results are shown in Fig. 1.2.
60
A
50
B
hydrogen gas 40
breathed out
/ parts per
million 30
C
20
D
10
0
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
time / hours
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
939/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(i) Explain why untreated milk was included in the investigation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why lactase might be added to milk.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Use the results in Fig. 1.2 to explain why yoghurt is the best milk product for people with
lactose intolerance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 21]
940/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
2 Fig. 2.1 is a diagram showing a small region of DNA.
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2 shows part of the DNA enlarged to show the sequence of bases.
A G C
T T C
Fig. 2.2
(a) Complete Fig. 2.2 by adding the letters for the bases that are missing. [2]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
941/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(b) Fig. 2.3 shows how DNA is involved in protein synthesis.
DNA
mRNA
nuclear membrane
mRNA
ribosome
Fig. 2.3 not to scale
Explain how mRNA is involved in protein synthesis.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
942/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
(c) Base sequences of the DNA of different species are compared to investigate how species are
related to one another. The most closely related species have the shortest distance from a
branching point on a classification tree.
Fig. 2.4 shows how six species of fungi are related to each other.
A Aspergillus flavus
B Aspergillus oryzae
C Aspergillus fumigatus
D Neosartorya fischeri
E Aspergillus clavatus
F Aspergillus nidulans
Fig. 2.4
(i) Use the letters on Fig. 2.4 to state the two species that are most closely related.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 2.4 to explain why Aspergillus nidulans is the most distantly related species
from all of the other five species.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
943/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(d) Modern methods of classification rely on the analysis and comparison of base sequences in
DNA.
Describe the type of evidence that scientists used for classifying organisms before they were
able to sequence DNA.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
944/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a section through a kidney.
Fig. 3.1
(a) Complete the table by stating the name of the parts labelled A, B and C on Fig. 3.1.
letter name of part
[3]
(b) (i) Name the blood vessel in Fig. 3.1 that has the highest concentration of urea.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the blood vessel in Fig. 3.1 that has the lowest concentration of glucose.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
945/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
(c) Explain the role of the kidney in excretion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) Testosterone is a steroid hormone that is also taken as a drug to improve sporting
performance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State where testosterone is produced in the body.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State why testosterone is taken by some people to improve sporting performance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
946/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(e) The half-life of a drug is the time it takes for the concentration in the blood to decrease by a
factor of a half. The half-life of one form of testosterone taken to improve sporting performance
is 7 days.
A person received an injection of this form of testosterone. A blood sample taken almost
immediately showed its concentration to be 50 ng cm−3.
Predict the concentration after 14 days, assuming the person does not have another injection,
and show your working.
............................................. ng cm−3 [2]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
947/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
4 Hydrophytes are plants that show many adaptive features for life in aquatic habitats.
Fig. 4.1 shows several species of hydrophyte growing in freshwater.
Fig. 4.1
A student investigated the density of stomata on the leaves of two different species of freshwater
hydrophyte.
Table 4.1
species location of mean stomatal density / number per mm2

leaves
upper epidermis lower epidermis
Brazilian under the 0 0
waterweed, surface of the
Egeria densa water
water lily, on the surface 420 0
Nuphar lutea of the water
(a) Name the epidermal cells that control the size of stomata.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest reasons for the difference between the results for the two species.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
948/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows a section through the leaf of a water lily.
palisade mesophyll
Fig. 4.2
(i) State why the palisade mesophyll is a tissue.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name two other tissues that are present in the leaf in Fig. 4.2.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The large air spaces are an adaptation of water lily leaves. Suggest why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Hydrophytes are adapted to aquatic habitats.
State the name used for plants that are adapted to dry habitats.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
949/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(f) Explain what is meant by the term adaptive feature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
950/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
5 The numbers of different cells in a blood sample were counted. The results are shown in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
cell type number / per mm3 percentage

red blood cells 4 820 000 94.91
lymphocytes 1 900 0.04
phagocytes 6 000 0.12
platelets 250 000
total 5 077 900 100.00
(a) Complete the table by calculating the percentage of platelets. Write your answer in Table 5.1
to two decimal places. [1]
(b) State the role of platelets in the blood and describe the process they are involved in.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Lymphocytes are white blood cells that are produced in bone marrow. Lymphocytes travel in
the blood from bone marrow to lymph nodes throughout the body.
If a pathogen infects the body, some of these lymphocytes are activated.
State the role of lymphocytes in defence against pathogens.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) During a second infection of the same pathogen the response by lymphocytes is much faster.
Explain how this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
951/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(e) HIV invades specific lymphocytes that coordinate immune responses.
Fig. 5.1 shows the change in numbers of these lymphocytes following an HIV infection that
has not been treated.
1200
1000
800
lymphocytes
/ cells per mm3 600
400
200
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
time / years
Fig. 5.1
(i) Describe the changes in lymphocyte numbers following HIV infection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
952/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
(ii) Describe the effects on the body of an untreated HIV infection as shown in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
953/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
6 Wetlands are internationally important ecosystems. The spoon-billed sandpiper, Calidris pygmaea,
is an endangered species.
Fig. 6.1 shows a spoon-billed sandpiper feeding in a wetland ecosystem. The wetland is a stopover
on the bird’s long migration from north-east Russia to south-east Asia.
The smaller photograph is a close-up of the bird’s legs to show that it has been ringed.
Fig. 6.1
Spoon-billed sandpipers stop to feed at the Rudong mudflats near Shanghai, China.
Putting one or more rings on a bird’s leg is a common way to identify individual birds. Spoon-billed
sandpipers ringed in Russia have been seen at the Rudong mudflats.
(a) Suggest why scientists put leg rings on birds, such as the spoon-billed sandpiper.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
954/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
20
(b) Explain why it is important to conserve ecosystems, such as wetlands.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0610/42/O/N/16
955/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 2 6 1 6 0 1 8 6 2 8 *
BIOLOGY 0610/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SW) 117736/5
956/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 An in vitro fertilisation (IVF) procedure is outlined in Fig. 1.1.
E embryo
not drawn to scale

Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Name structures A, B and D.
A ........................................................................................................................................
B ........................................................................................................................................
D ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) State the purpose of syringe C.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Name a hormone that would be injected to stimulate egg cell development.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State when, during the menstrual cycle, this hormone should be injected.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Draw an X on Fig. 1.1 at the position where the embryos should be placed.
[1]
© UCLES 2016 0610/43/O/N/16
957/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(c) Discuss the social implications of IVF.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 11]
958/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
2 Pectinase is an enzyme used in the production of fruit juice.
(a) Describe in detail how enzymes function, using pectinase as an example.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[6]
959/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
(b) An experiment to test the effect of the size of apple pieces on the activity of pectinase was
performed by a group of students. Some of their apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1.
filter paper
funnel
measuring
cylinder
Fig. 2.1
Describe how the students should use the measuring cylinder to obtain accurate
measurements of volume.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 0610/43/O/N/16
960/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(c) The students added 1.5 cm3 of pectinase solution to pieces of apple in a beaker.
They then poured the mixture into the funnel.
They found that it took 10 minutes to collect 19 cm3 of juice.
(i) Calculate the rate of the enzyme reaction.
Show your working.
Write your answer to the nearest whole number.
...................................... cm3 per min [2]
(ii) The students performed four experiments using different ways to prepare the apples.
The same total mass and type of apple was used each time.
A 0.5 cm3 apple cubes
B 1.0 cm3 apple cubes
C whole peeled small apples
D whole unpeeled small apples
Predict and explain which experiment (A, B, C or D) would result in the fastest rate of
reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 12]
961/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
3 The length of the small intestine was measured in four types of mammal.
Table 3.1
length of small
length of small
mammal intestine relative to
intestine / cm
body mass / cm per g
insect-eating bat 19 2.30
domestic cat 104 0.05
rat 98 0.34
human 552 0.01
(a) Use the information in Table 3.1 to compare the length of the small intestine of the four
mammals.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2016 0610/43/O/N/16
962/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(b) Fig. 3.1 is a diagram showing a short length of the small intestine of a mammal.
outer surface
inner surface
lumen
Fig. 3.1
A function of the small intestine is absorption.
Describe how a molecule of glucose passes from the lumen of the small intestine into the
blood.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
963/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(c) Measurements were taken of the inner and outer surface area of two parts of the small
intestine for the four mammals in Table 3.1. The results are shown in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2
ratio of inner surface area to outer surface area

mammal
duodenum ileum
insect-eating bat 283:1 54:1
domestic cat 15:1 12:1
rat 6:1 4:1
human 7:1 3:1
(i) Suggest which mammal has the most villi per centimetre of small intestine.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The duodenum is more effective than the ileum at absorption. Use the information in
Table 3.2 to explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) Bile is released into the small intestine from the gall bladder.
Outline the roles of bile.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2016 0610/43/O/N/16
964/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
11
4 Tobacco smoke is made up of over 7000 chemicals.
Nicotine is a component of tobacco smoke.
(a) Explain why nicotine is a drug.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Describe the effect on the gas exchange system of the following components of tobacco
smoke:
carbon monoxide ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
tar .............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
965/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
(c) A study compared the percentages of men and women aged between 35 and 54 years who
smoked cigarettes. The annual death rate caused by lung cancer was also recorded.
The results are shown in the two graphs in Fig. 4.1.
90
Key
men
80 women
70
60 60
Key
men
smoking 50 50
women
/%
40 40
mean annual
30 death rate 30
from lung cancer
20 / cases per 20
100 000 people
per year
10 10
0 0
1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000
year year
Fig. 4.1
(i) Use the data shown in Fig. 4.1 to compare the percentages of men and women who
smoked cigarettes between 1950 and 1998.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2016 0610/43/O/N/16
966/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(ii) Use the information from both graphs in Fig. 4.1 to discuss the link between smoking
and lung cancer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(d) Explain why it is recommended that pregnant women do not smoke.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 17]
967/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
5 (a) (i) Describe the structure of a DNA molecule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) State the function of a gene.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Molecular biologists identified a gene found in all species of bacteria and in mitochondria.
State the function of mitochondria.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Some scientists think that mitochondria evolved from bacteria because they are similar in
size and structure. Bacteria belong to the Prokaryote kingdom.
Give two features of all prokaryotes.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
968/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
DNA can be used to distinguish between different species of bacteria.
Molecular biologists compared the DNA sequences of the gene in mitochondria and six species of
bacteria. They counted the number of differences.
Table 5.1 shows the number of differences between the DNA sequences.
Table 5.1
mitochondria A
species B
species C
species D
species E
species F
species G
mitochondria A
29 26 34 25 3 23
species B
18 12 17 26 24
species C
19 10 19 14
species D
28 29 30
species E
19 6
species F
16
species G
The most closely related species have:
• the least number of differences between their DNA sequences

• the shortest distance from a branching point on a classification tree.
© UCLES 2016 0610/43/O/N/16
969/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
(d) Use the information in Table 5.1 to complete the classification tree in Fig. 5.1. Place the letter
for each species or the mitochondria in the box next to the correct branch of the classification
tree. Two have been done for you.
Fig. 5.1
[3]
(e) Suggest why using DNA sequences is a useful method for identifying species of bacteria.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 12]
970/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
18
6 (a) Name one feature of dicotyledonous leaves that distinguishes them from monocotyledonous
leaves.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain why a leaf is an organ.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Photosynthesis occurs in leaves.
State the balanced chemical equation for photosynthesis.
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) Fig. 6.1 is an image of a section through a dicotyledonous leaf from a scanning electron
microscope.
K
J
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2016 0610/43/O/N/16
971/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
19
Identify the layers labelled in Fig. 6.1 and explain how their adaptations allow photosynthesis
to occur in the leaf.
(i) layer J ...............................................................................................................................
adaptation for photosynthesis ...........................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) layer K ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) layer L ...............................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Plants need nitrate ions for growth.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2016 0610/43/O/N/16
972/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016

* 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 *
BIOLOGY 0610/04
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) For Examination from 2016
SPECIMEN PAPER
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.

The syllabus is accredited for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
973/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
2
1 The dominant grass species in an African grassland ecosystem are star grass and red oat grass.
• Star grass is eaten by antelope species, such as topi and Thomson’s gazelle.
• Smaller animals such as mice and grasshoppers feed on red oat grass.
• Topi and Thomson’s gazelle are eaten by predators such as cheetahs, lions and serval cats.
• Grasshoppers and mice are eaten by serval cats and tawny eagles.
• Vultures feed on dead mammals.
Fig. 1.1 shows part of the food web for this ecosystem.
.................................
lions serval cats tawny eagles

.................................
Thomson’s
topi grasshoppers
gazelle .................................
star grass red oat grass
Fig. 1.1
(a) Complete the food web by writing the names of the correct organisms in the boxes in Fig. 1.1.
[3]
(b) Name the trophic level of the following species.
star grass ...............................................................................................................................
topi ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) State the principal source of energy for the food web shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what happens to energy when it leaves a food web.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
974/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
3
(d) Explain why there are no more than four trophic levels in the food web shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Fish such as salmon can be reared intensively in fish farms. They are fed on high protein food
made from animals. When eating this food, the fish are feeding as secondary consumers.
Describe the disadvantages of intensive farming, such as salmon farming, for producing
human food.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 13]
975/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a person sitting in a room. A thermometer shows the temperature of the room.
50
40
30
°C
20
10
Fig. 2.1
(a) Give three uses of energy in the body of the person in Fig. 2.1.
1 ...........................................................................................................................................
2 ...........................................................................................................................................
3 ..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i) Name the process carried out by the person in Fig. 2.1 that releases energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the balanced chemical equation that describes this process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The person leaves the room and runs very fast for 200 m. When the person stops running, his
breathing rate and his heart rate remain high for several minutes.
Explain why the person’s breathing rate and heart rate remain high.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
976/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
5
(d) The run results in changes in the skin involving the blood vessels and the sweat glands.
Describe what happens to the blood vessels and sweat glands during the run.
Explain why these changes happen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 14]
977/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
6
3 (a) Define the term sensitivity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Fig. 3.1 shows the reflex arc involved in a simple reflex action.
spinal nerve
spinal cord
Fig 3.1
(b) On Fig. 3.1 use label lines to identify and name the three types of neurone shown. [3]
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
978/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
7
(c) A reflex is an involuntary action.

Explain what is meant by the term involuntary action.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Define the term synapse.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how impulses are transmitted across a synapse.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) When a body senses danger, more adrenaline is secreted from the adrenal glands.
Describe two ways in which the hormone adrenaline affects the body in preparation for action.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(f) State one difference between nervous and hormonal control systems.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 13]
979/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
8
4 The four o’clock plant, Mirabilis jalapa, can have flowers of three different colours as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
yellow
flower
red flower orange flower
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student crossed some red-flowered plants with some yellow-flowered plants (cross 1).
She collected the seeds and grew them. All of the plants that grew from these seeds had
orange flowers.
Complete the genetic diagram to explain the result of cross 1.
parental phenotypes red flowers × yellow flowers
parental genotypes RR × YY
gametes .............. + ..............
offspring genotype ........................
offspring phenotype ........................
[3]
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
980/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
9
(b) The student then carried out three further crosses as shown in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
genotypes of offspring
cross 2 offspring of cross 1 × offspring of cross 1
cross 3 offspring of cross 1 × red-flowered plant
cross 4 offspring of cross 1 × yellow-flowered plant
Complete the table by writing in the genotypes of the offspring of crosses 2, 3 and 4, using
the same symbols as in the genetic diagram in (a).
You may use the space below for any working.
[3]
(c) Flower colour in M. jalapa is not an example of the inheritance of dominant and recessive
alleles.
Explain how the results of the crosses show that these alleles for flower colour are not dominant
or recessive.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
981/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
10
(d) The flowers from M. jalapa were cross-pollinated.
Explain the difference between self-pollination and cross-pollination.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Some plant species are self-pollinated.

Discuss the long-term effects of self-pollination on the evolution of these plant species.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
982/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
12
5 Penicillin is an antibiotic produced by the fungus Penicillium chrysogenum.
Fig. 5.1 shows the process used to produce penicillin.
waste
gases
cooling water out
water jacket
fungus and
acid or alkali
nutrients
pH monitor
temperature
monitor
filtration
grid
stirring
paddles residue
sterile air
filtrate
containing
penicillin
cooling water in
fermenter filter
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
983/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
13
(a) Explain why there is a water jacket around the fermenter and why acids or alkalis are added
to the fermenter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
984/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
14
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the mass of fungus and the yield of penicillin during the fermentation process.
50 10
45 9
40 8
35 penicillin 7
30 6
yield of
mass of
penicillin
fungus 25 5
3 / arbitrary
/ g per dm
units
20 4
fungus
15 3
10 2
5 1
0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / hours
nutrients added
Fig. 5.2
(i) State the time interval over which the fungus grew at its maximum rate.
................................................. hours [1]
(ii) As the fungus grows in the fermenter, the nuclei in the fungal hyphae divide.
State the type of nuclear division that occurs during the growth of the fungus in the
fermenter.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
985/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
15
(iii) Explain why the growth of the fungus slows down and stops.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Penicillin is not needed for the growth of P. chrysogenum.

(i) State the evidence from Fig. 5.2 that shows that penicillin is not needed for this growth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The people in charge of the penicillin production emptied the fermenter after 160 hours.
Use the information in Fig. 5.2 to suggest why they did not allow the fermentation to
continue for longer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
986/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
16
(d) Downstream processing refers to all the processes that occur to the contents of the fermenter
after it is emptied. This involves making penicillin into a form that can be used as a medicine.
Suggest why downstream processing is necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) Explain why antibiotics, such as penicillin, affect bacteria but not viruses.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
987/988
Combined By NESRINE
June 2023-2016
17
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a villus from the small intestine of a mammal and an enlarged view of a cell from
region A.
microvilli
A
mitochondria
magnification ×110 magnification ×2600
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name regions A, B and C.
A ..........................................................................................................................................
B ..........................................................................................................................................
C .................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Explain why the cells from region A have many microvilli and many mitochondria.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2014 0610/04/SP/16
988/988

Nesrine-Biology 0610 Paper4 2023-2016 QP

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nesrine-Biology 0610 Paper4 2023-2016 QP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Table of Contents

February/March 2023 Variant 2 1

February/March 2022 Variant 2 86

February/March 2021 Variant 2 215

February/March 2020 Variant 2 342

February/March 2018 Variant 2 605

February/March 2017 Variant 2 723

February/March 2016 Variant 2 845

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

1 (a) Fig. 1.1 is a simplified diagram of the circulatory system in humans.

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23

(iv) Explain the importance of the part labelled Y in Fig. 1.1.

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23 [Turn over

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23 [Turn over

2 A student investigated the digestion of starch.

Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus she used.

distilled water distilled water

starch solution starch solution

Dialysis tubing is used to represent a cell membrane.

Table 2.1 shows the results.

colour with Benedict’s solution colour with Benedict’s solution

break down of startch

going form high conc to lower conc

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23 [Turn over

enzyme substrate product or products

fatty acids and glycerol

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23

3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows part of a classification diagram for plants.

(i) Complete Fig. 3.1.

(ii) Describe two identifying features of monocotyledons.

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23 [Turn over

The haploid stages of the life cycle are represented by (n).

The diploid stages of the life cycle are represented by (2n).

adult sporophyte adult gametophyte (n)

zygote gametes (n)

State the number of chromosomes in the body cells of the gametophyte.

(ii) Identify and describe process A in Fig. 3.2.

(iii) State the name of process D in Fig. 3.2.

(i) Describe what is meant by the term species.

(ii) Annotate Fig. 3.3 to show the mechanism of cross-pollination by:

• labelling the structures involved

(iii) Draw an X on Fig. 3.3 to show where fertilisation occurs. [1]

(iv) Explain the disadvantages of cross-pollination compared with self-pollination.

4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is a photograph of a tree that has been girdled.

Use the terms source and sink in your answer.

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23

(c) State the balanced symbol equation for photosynthesis.

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23 [Turn over

5 The eye is a sense organ that is part of the nervous system.

(a) Explain why the eye can be described as a sense organ.

(b) State the two parts of the central nervous system.

(c) Fig. 5.1 is a diagram of a section through the human eye.

(i) Draw an X on Fig. 5.1 to identify the blind spot. [1]

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23

Complete Table 5.1.

name of the part letter in Fig. 5.1 function

transmits impulses to the central nervous system

................................................................... and ................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2023 0610/42/F/M/23 [Turn over